Training Services Catalog

Training Services Catalog
Workforce Development Catalog
Creating a plan to fill workforce skill gaps
Not Just a Catalog of Classes –
A Holistic Approach to Workforce Development
The cost of unscheduled downtime, safety compliance and new
technology integration can significantly impact productivity.
However, many of these issues can be minimized with proper
workforce training and development.
The demands of your business are increasing and the supply of
skilled employees is decreasing. Do you have a plan to address
these issues and bring together all the necessary steps to create a
comprehensive workforce development solution?
With well-thought out plans and a strategy, you can not only reap
the benefits of a more satisfied and more productive workforce,
but you will be able to
measure it with key
metrics to show your
return on investment.
Rockwell Automation
developed a lifecycle to
show how the process of
creating a highly-skilled
workforce is a disciplined
process, rather than just
a one-time event. There
are four key steps to the
process that our team
of experts will walk you
through when deciding
how to execute on
your plan.
Scan this code to visit
Rockwell Automation
Training Services
on the web.
Assess: This step enables you
to gauge the current abilities of
your employees and better create
individualized development plans.
Train: Using data from your
assessment, you can leverage specific,
flexible and customizable approaches
to not only fit your employees’
learning needs, but also fit your
business’ production goals.
Apply: After your training is
completed, Rockwell Automation
has developed job aids and refresher
tools so employees can continuously
improve their skills and practice in
an offline environment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Measure: Using essential
manufacturing metrics, you can
leverage assessment data both pre
and post training to ensure the
effectiveness of your training plan.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
1
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Managing Industrial Networks with
Cisco Networking Technologies (IMINS)
Safety
Over the past century, global manufacturing systems have evolved from manual,
linear processes to high-powered, efficient automated systems through landmark
advances to automation technology and production methods. Your commitment
to blend information technology into your traditional operations business
practices is crucial to keep pace with your competition and continue to find
paths to improvement.
Networks
Visualization
While technology plays a key role in this evolution,
have you considered the value of a properly
developed workforce? Because of the changes in
technology, a maintenance staff that understands the
interplay between the operational and IT technology
is key to the ongoing health of your operation.
Motion Control
Rockwell Automation, in collaboration with Strategic
Alliance partner Cisco®, now offers the Managing
Industrial Networks with Cisco Networking
Technologies (IMINS) class. This class is designed
for IT and operations technology professionals who
are responsible for the implementation, operation,
and support of networked industrial infrastructure.
The course helps students prepare for the Cisco
Industrial Networking Specialist Certification exam
(exam ID 600-601) and achieve their Cisco Industrial
Networking Specialist Certification.
Drives
Through this course, you will:
• Achieve competency and skills to install,
configure, maintain, and troubleshoot industrial
network systems
Why Rockwell Automation?
Rockwell Automation is in a unique position to offer
this certification course because of our collaboration
with Cisco, leveraging our combined experience in
the operations and IT spaces. Our instructors use this
balanced approach between both disciplines, and
have the proper skills and experience to teach these
concepts to provide exceptional value to all students.
Enroll Today!
Due to high anticipated enrollment, we encourage
you to visit our website for information on pricing,
class locations, dates, and enrollment information.
Visit www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Process Control
• Interpret design and drawings to recognize
industrial topologies and access reference materials
• Help ensure network availability, reliability,
and cyber security
Condition Monitoring
Scan this code to select your
country and access the
Training Services website.
• Take the first step in a portfolio of educational
products toward a career in industrial networks
• Become a certified network specialist
Software
2
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Four Easy Ways to Enroll
5
How to Use the Curriculum Maps
6
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
4
Instructor-Led Courses
PLC-5®/RSLogix™ 5
33
SLC™ 500/RSLogix 500
39
Safety
47
Networks
63
Visualization/HMI
75
Motion Control
85
Power Controls (Drives and Motor Control Centers)
95
Process Control
113
Condition Monitoring
125
Software
133
Virtual Classroom
141
Craft Skills and Mechanical Concepts
151
Industrial Leadership Skills
185
Silver Courses
195
Networks
25
Visualization
Micro Controllers and Connected Components
Safety
7
Motion Control
ControlLogix®/Studio 5000 Logix Designer™
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Web-Based Training
211
Mobile
227
Workstations
231
Job Aids
257
Savings Options
263
Certificate Programs
269
Assessment Services
279
Enrollment
285
Index
289
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Process Control
197
Condition Monitoring
Computer-Based Training
Drives
Self-Paced e-Learning
3
Software
Top 20 Classes
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Table of Contents
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
20
Top
Rockwell Automation Courses
Course Number
Course Title
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
1
CCP299
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
2
CCP146
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
3
CCP143
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
4
CCP153
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: ControlLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5
CCP151
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
6
CCV204
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus Programming
7
CCV207
FactoryTalk View SE Programming
8
CCPS43
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
9
CCP122
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals
10
CCN145
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4: Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS) Programming
11
CCA183
PowerFlex 750-Series Maintenance and Troubleshooting
12
CCPS41
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming
13
CCP298
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: CompactLogix Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
14
CCA182
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration and Startup
15
CCCL21
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
16
CCN130
Motion Control Fundamentals
17
CCP164
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and Troubleshooting
18
CCN200
Kinetix 6000 Troubleshooting and Project Interpretation
19
SAF-LOG101
20
CCV209
GuardLogix Application Development
FactoryTalk View ME and Panelview Plus Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The Right Training Makes All the Difference
Software
4
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
General Information
• Training Schedules and Pricing
Refer to the Training Services website for current
schedules and course tuition.
Scan this code to access the
Training Services website and
online enrollment.
• Terms and Conditions
Printed materials provided in Rockwell Automation
training courses are copyrighted and may not be
reproduced. No audio or visual recording of
Rockwell Automation training courses, or
Rockwell Automation personnel teaching such
courses, may be taken or reproduced electronically.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
United States
Atlanta
Boston
Charlotte
Chicago
Cincinnati
Cleveland
Dallas
Davenport
Denver
Detroit
Houston
Indianapolis
Kalamazoo
Motion Control
Canada
Little Rock
Los Angeles
Milwaukee
Minneapolis
Nashville
New York City
Philadelphia
Richmond
Rochester
San Francisco
Seattle
St. Louis
Tampa
Brampton
Calgary
Cambridge
Dartmouth
Edmonton
Montreal
Vancouver
Drives
• Continuing Education Units (CEUs)
Rockwell Automation awards Continuing Education
Units (CEUs) for attendance in its courses. It demonstrates
our commitment to quality standards and practices. Refer
to the course description, which can be found in the training
catalog or training schedule:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Rockwell Automation training is conducted in
several cities across the United States and in
Canada. Call 440-646-3434 (option 7) to be routed
to the nearest Rockwell Automation training
coordinator in one of these locations:
Process Control
Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that
students only make refundable travel and lodging
arrangements. Rockwell Automation reserves the
right to alter course schedules, content, limit class
size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
Rockwell Automation
Training Offices
Condition Monitoring
• Cancellation Policy
Cancellation of registration for a Rockwell Automation
course less than 14 days prior to the start date is
subject to a cancellation fee of 50% of the tuition.
If a student fails to appear for a scheduled course,
full tuition will be charged.
Visualization
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Networks
Safety
Email: Send completed Training
Enrollment Form in the back of this catalog
to [email protected]
Call 440-646-3434 (option 7) or email
[email protected] with questions.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
5
Software
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Fax: Send completed Training Enrollment
Form in the back of this catalog to your
local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation Training office
Phone: Call your local Allen-Bradley
distributor or 440-646-3434 (option 7)
Web:
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
4 Easy Ways to Enroll
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
How to Use the Curriculum Map
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Curriculum maps show a recommended path based on your job responsibilities within a technology area. For example,
the courses in the maintain section are designed for and instruct students on maintenance-related responsibilities.
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Locate the start icon
. This is the beginning of the “Understand” section. Courses with a “START” icon are
required prerequisites. If there is no start icon, identify the recommended courses in the “Understand” section.
Courses in the “Understand” section apply to all students and provide the prerequisite knowledge required to
successfully complete courses in both the “Maintain or Troubleshoot” and “Program or Design” sections.
It is highly recommended you complete the courses in the “Understand” track before progressing to the other
tracks in the curriculum.
2.
Select the course that best fits your job responsibilities in either the “Maintain or Troubleshoot” and “Program or
Design.” Note that some curriculum maps offer additional sections and courses related to “Safety Standards,”
“Integrate or Design,” and “Application-Specific Courses.” Courses with an arrow represent a progression in the
content covered. Be sure to consult the course descriptions because some courses may require additional prerequisites.
Safety
1.
NOTE: When presented with a choice of two courses, select the most appropriate one by reviewing the course description or
using the Course Selection Tool (www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training) to assess your knowledge on the course.
Networks
3.
Review related products that are available for prerequisite, refresher, or supplemental courses in the “e-LEARNING”
section of the curriculum map. e-Learning options include web-based training, computer-based training, mobile app,
and iBooks.
4.
Use the legend in each map to identify and locate additional information.
Core Requirement for Certificate Program for the specific
technology. Refer to the Certificate Program section of the
catalog for more information.
Course is taught virtually with a live-instructor. Refer to the
Virtual Classroom section of the catalog for more information.
Visualization
Optional Exam
Last Half Day of Class
Optional exam can be completed to receive certification.
Hardware is included with the purchase of the course.
Combination Understand and Maintain
or Troubleshoot Level Course.
On-Site
Only
Course
Course is delivered on-site at the customer’s facility.
Motion Control
Combination Program or Design and
Maintain or Troubleshoot Level Course.
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
6
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Function Block
Programming
CCP152 • 2 Days
Introduction
to Automation
CCP800 • 3 Days
Introduction
to the Integrated
Architecture System
CIA101 • 2 Days
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500
(CIP) Programming
PowerFlex 750-Series
Configuration for
an Integrated
Architecture System
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
CCN144 • 4 Days
CCA184 • 1 Day
CCP711 • 1 Day
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Project
Development
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS)
Programming
CCP151 • 2 Days
CCP143 • 4 Days
CCN145 • 4 Days
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
CCP146 • 2 Days
Also
Available
in Spanish
Ladder Logic Basics
with CompactLogix
Starter Workstation
VC-LLB
(5) 120-min. Sessions
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
Kinetix 6000
Troubleshooting
and Project
Interpretation
CCP153 • 4 Days
CCCL21 • 2 Days
CCN200 • 2 Days
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
CompactLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
OEM: ControlLogix,
FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000 and
PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
CCP299 • 4.5 Days
CCP298 • 4.5 Days
OEM100 • 5 Days
Combination of CCP146 and
CCP153 Courses
Combination of CCP146 and
CCP153 Courses
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
8
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Core Requirement for
Certificate Program
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Structured Text/
Sequential Function
Chart Programming
SI: Logix 5000 Project
Development and Basic
Ladder Logic Programming
SI100 • 4 Days
e-LEARNING
POINT I/O
Implementation
VC-PIO
120-min. Session
RSLogix 5000 Software Online Monitoring
CCP154 • 2 Days
ControlLogix
Fundamentals
Fuzzy Logic Design
and Development
PRS012 • 2 Days
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 5:
Advanced Motion
Programming
CCN190-LD • 2 Days
Machine-Level
Design Optimization:
Drive and Motor Selection
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
VC-MLDO-01
90-min. Session
Machine-Level
Design Optimization:
Networks, Controller,
and I/O Selection
VC-MLDO-02
120-min. Session
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming
Machine Level
Design Optimization
Bundle: VC-MLDO
RSLogix 5000 Software Motion
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
RSLogix 5000 Software Project Configuration
ControlLogix
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
t lL i TTroubleshooting
bl h ti
ControlLogix
Guide App Available on iTunes
Kinetix 6500
Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
RSLogix 5000 Software Bundle
Online Monitoring
Offline Programming
Project Configuration
CCN201 • 3 Days
Introduction
d i to Automation
A
i
iBook Available on iTunes
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Includes Hardware Kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
Combination
mbination Understand and
ntain or Troubleshoot Level Course
Maintain
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
9
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Training + Starter Workstation
with “Build Your Own” workstation option
Attend ControlLogix courses and maintain your skills with our Starter Workstation
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Take Your Classroom Training
Back to Your Job
Safety
Six Rockwell Automation ControlLogix courses are
bundled with a CompactLogix Starter Workstation
to provide an opportunity for ongoing practice.
This offer is optional; however, the CompactLogix
Starter Workstation allows you to reinforce the
skills acquired from any of the ControlLogix
training classes. With this offer you can elect to
“build your own” starter workstation or receive a
pre-assembled workstation.
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
The workstation can be used for:
• Providing opportunities for realistic
and safe practice
• Refreshing skills
• Reinforcing and practicing maintenance
and troubleshooting skills
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer Curriculum Map
Drives
Process Control
CompactLogix Starter Workstation
Your CompactLogix Starter Workstation
will include the following:
• Assembled workstation or a “build your
own” workstation that includes a kit
and an instruction guide
• 1 CompactLogix L30ER processor
• 1 CompactLogix AC power supply
• 1 digital combo, 6 digital in/4 digital out
• 4 momentary push buttons
• 2 selector switches
• 1 Compactbus end cap
• AmeriPak shipping case
Condition Monitoring
Note: Software is not included
with the starter workstation.
For a schedule of ControlLogix classes in your area and detailed course
descriptions, go to: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Software
Dimensions
• Width - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Height - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth - 6 in. (15 cm)
• Weight - 15 lb (7 kg)
10
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CIA101
CEUs 1.4
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
11
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about and
interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While
performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products function together
within Integrated Architecture.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Identify components of the integrated architecture system
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the
• Program a basic Logix Designer project for an integrated system
Integrated Architecture System
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
PREREQUISITES
• Identify programming languages in an integrated system
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Understand Logix5000™ multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Motion Control
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE® SYSTEM
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to students within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand:
• Identify:
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
Safety
CEUs 2.1
Drives
3 Days
Networks
CCP800
Process Control
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 1:
CONTROLLOGIX SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS
CCP146
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation with a fundamental knowledge of Logix5000 systems. Students will be introduced to Logix5000
system components and functionality and will have an opportunity to use Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to perform basic system configuration tasks.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have little or no working experience with Logix5000 systems or
• Understand ControlLogix system components
other programmable controllers
• Select and connect to industrial networks in a Logix5000 system
PREREQUISITES
• Download and go online to a Logix5000 controller
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Operate the Logix Designer application
• Configure local 1756-I/O modules
• Create tags and monitor data in a Logix Designer project
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Draft basic ladder logic for a Logix Designer routine
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Select basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix Designer routine
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
• Enter ladder logic components in a Logix Designer routine
• Locate ControlLogix system components, I/O Tags, and devices in a
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Logix5000 system
Fundamentals Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ53
This course is intended for maintainers or programmers. Some topics may be
similar to topics covered in course CCP299.
Visualization
LADDER LOGIC BASICS WITH COMPACTLOGIX™
STARTER WORKSTATION
VC-LLB
Virtual
Classroom
(5) 120-min. Sessions
CEUs 1.0
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to write and test basic ladder logic code and how to employ common programming strategies and best practices. Students will learn
how to select and program bit, timer, counter, compare, and move instructions. Examples and labs will use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application and a CompactLogix
controller; however, the general ladder logic concepts covered in this course are applicable to most common programmable controllers.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Beginning programmers or individuals who are required to edit ladder logic
• Review basic logic flow
PREREQUISITES
• Convert scenarios to if – then statements
A general knowledge of automation, including the general purpose of a controller,
• Convert if – then statements to simple rungs
data, and I/O; and the purpose of common devices like push buttons, pilot lights,
• Enter ladder logic into software
limit switches, relays, contractors, and solenoids is required
• Download a project
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• Monitor the ladder logic
• Tie the alias to an existing address
• A computer and phone
• Apply bit instructions and common ladder logic strategies
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer (version 21) must be installed and activated. The
• Select a class of instruction categories
virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
• Select and integrate timers and counters
installation of the software if students do not have it.
• Select and integrate compare and move instructions
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation (shipped prior to class)
• Combine compare with move instructions
Software
12
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to troubleshoot a previously operational ControlLogix system and restore normal operation. Students will have the
opportunity to develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology, practicing a systematic strategy for diagnosing and troubleshooting problems,
and performing hands-on exercises.
Safety
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix or other
Logix5000 system, but have no current working experience with Logix5000 systems
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with common industrial control system concepts
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSJ20
ABT-1756-DRG70
Networks
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide
Visualization
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Interpret arrays
• Locate CompactLogix
• Interpret tags of user defined
system components
data types
• Navigate through the Logix
• Search for project components
Designer application
• Force I/O and toggle bits
• Connect a computer to a
• Troubleshoot digital I/O, analog I/O,
communications network
remote I/O, controller, power supply,
• Download and go online
• Locate I/O tags and devices
and noise related problems
• Interpret Logix Designer project
• Update Logix5000 firmware
organization and execution
• Analyze and troubleshoot a system
• Interpret ladder logic structure
using a trend chart
• Locate and edit tag values
• Edit ladder logic online
• Interpret bit and frequently
• Manage Logix Designer project files
used instructions
• Document and print components
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course CCP146, CCP153, and CCP298.
CCP298
4.5 Days
Motion Control
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 1:
COMPACTLOGIX FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CEUs 3.2
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to troubleshoot a previously operational ControlLogix system and restore normal operation. Students will develop
and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used, practicing a systematic strategy for diagnosing and troubleshooting problems, and performing
hands-on exercises.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: This course is intended for individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot
• Interpret tags of user defined
• Locate CompactLogix
a CompactLogix system – but have no or little current working experience with
data types
system components
CompactLogix systems
• Search for project components
• Navigate through the Logix
PREREQUISITES
• Force I/O and toggle bits
Designer application
• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks
• Troubleshoot digital I/O, analog I/O,
• Connect a computer to a
• Previous experience with common industrial control system concepts
banked local I/O, distributed I/O,
communications network
controller, power supply, and noise
• Download and go online
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
related problems
• Locate I/O tags and devices
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Update Logix5000 firmware
• Interpret Logix Designer project
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
• Analyze and troubleshoot a system
organization and execution
using a trend chart
• Interpret ladder logic structure
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
• Edit ladder logic online
• Locate and edit tag values
covered in course CCP146, CCP153, and CCP299.
• Manage Logix Designer project files
• Interpret bit and frequently
• Document and print components
used instructions
• Interpret arrays
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CCP299
13
Software
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 1:
CONTROLLOGIX FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 2:
CONTROLLOGIX MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCP153
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational ControlLogix system and restore normal
operation. This course adds to students’ skill sets by introducing new tasks, such as connecting to a network, interpreting project execution, and editing ladder logic online.
After practicing such skills, students will be presented with a systematic strategy for diagnosing and troubleshooting a variety of system errors, such as controller, I/O, and
other hardware problems, noise-related problems, and software configuration problems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix or other
Logix 5000 system
• Optional: Locate ControlLogix system components
• Interpret project organization and execution, frequently used instructions, arrays,
PREREQUISITES
and tags of user-defined data types
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Locate and edit tag values
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Force I/O and toggle bits
• Knowledge of basic ladder logic instructions
• Troubleshoot digital, analog, and remote I/O
• Update Logix5000 firmware
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Troubleshoot controller, power supply, noise related, and digital I/O
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
module problems
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Analyze and troubleshoot a system using trend chart
• Edit ladder logic online
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
• Optional: Edit FDB’s online
• Document, print, and search project components
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course CCP299.
Motion Control
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 3:
BASIC LADDER LOGIC INTERPRETATION
CCCL21
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is a skill-building course that provides maintainers with a more detailed understanding of Studio 5000 Logix Designer ladder logic instructions and terminology.
It also provides the resources and hands-on practice required to interpret ladder logic instructions for any Logix5000 controller. Students will have the opportunity to use the
Logix Designer application to perform basic software tasks to meet the requirements of a given functional specification. In addition to using ladder logic, students will be
introduced to ladder logic techniques, established standards, and common rules for interpretation ladder logic.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Maintainers who need to interpret ladder logic using the Logix Designer application
• Interpret move instructions
• Review basic ladder logic
PREREQUISITES
• Interpret math instructions
• Document and search ladder logic
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Interpret expression handling
• Interpret timer and counter
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
instructions
instructions
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Interpret program control instructions • Interpret copy and file fill instructions
•
Completion
of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: ControlLogix Maintenance
• Interpret compare instructions
and Troubleshooting course (CCP153) or equivalent experience
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
covered in course CCP151.
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Software
14
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the system
through hands-on exercises using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application. Students will learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system.
Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators. Upon
completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Locate Kinetix 6000 components
• Check Kinetix 6000 connections
• Interpret Kinetix 6000 indicators
• Analyze fault codes in a Kinetix 6000 system
• Interpret motion state and motion move instructions in a Logix Designer Project
• Test and tune axes in a Logix Designer project
• Replace a Kinetix 6000 drive
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
CCP151
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
15
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This is a skill-building course that provides programmers with the resources and hands on practice required to program basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix5000
controller. Students will use the Logix Designer Application to perform basic software tasks to meet the requirements of a given functional specification. In addition, students
will set up a sequencer to run equipment through a predefined procedure and separate production procedure from equipment control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Start and test a ladder diagram
• Have little controller experience
• Program timer and counter instructions
• Are responsible for programming Logix5000 controllers using the Logix
• Program compare, move, and math instructions
Designer Application
• Document and search and handle expressions
• Need to learn how to draft ladder logic for any application
• Program and separate the procedure from equipment control
PREREQUISITES
• Copy and fill an array
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Motion Control
CEUs 1.4
Process Control
2 Days
Condition Monitoring
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 2:
BASIC LADDER LOGIC PROGRAMMING
Visualization
ABT-1756-DRG70
Software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion
control systems
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent knowledge of or experience with
the ControlLogix platform and basic ladder logic
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
2 Days
Safety
CCN200
Networks
KINETIX® 6000 TROUBLESHOOTING AND PROJECT INTERPRETATION
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 3:
PROJECT DEVELOPMENT
CCP143
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
Given a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. This course
covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and SoftLogix™ controllers. This
course presents a deeper understanding of project development tasks, such as organizing tasks and routines, organizing controller data, configuring modules, and sharing
data. Students will use Producer/Consumer technology to multicast input and output devices, share data between controllers, and control remote I/O.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to develop Logix Designer projects for any Logix5000
• Communicate with a local 1756• Create and organize a project
controller
I/O module and over an EtherNet/IP
• Create periodic and event tasks
PREREQUISITES
network
• Develop an add-on instruction in
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure a message
ladder diagram
• Knowledge of common controller terms and operation through experience
• Allocate connections
• Organize arrays
or completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Retrieve and set controller status
• Create a user-defined data type
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or completion of the RSTrainer for ControlLogix
values with GSV/SSV instructions
• Import components
Fundamentals computer-based training (9393-RSTCLX)
• Program a BTD instruction
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Ability to write basic ladder logic with common instructions or through
• Configure a controller to produce and • Handle a major fault
completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
• Manage project files
consume data
Programming course (CCP151)
• Update firmware
• Configure controllers to share data
Visualization
over EtherNet/IP™
Motion Control
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAMMING
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
CCP152
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an understanding of Logix Designer function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands on practice are provided to program a
Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to individual function block instructions and create and develop function
block diagram programs and routines.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Create a function block diagram
• Are responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000
• Program logical function block instructions
controllers using Logix Designer application with function block diagrams
• Program timer and counter function block instructions
• Use ActiveX controls in an operator interface such as FactoryTalk View ME software
• Program analog function block instructions
PREREQUISITES
• Program device driver function block instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Select timing modes in a function block instruction
• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory, including basic
• Program a totalizer function block instruction
loop control
• Program and monitor an RMPS (ramp/soak) function block instruction
•
Completion
of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Developing course
• Control program flow using function block instructions
(CCP143)
or
equivalent experience
• Program a PID loop using function block diagram
• Tune a PID loop using ActiveX controls
• Develop an add-on instruction in function block diagram
Software
16
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to configure, test, tune, and program SERCOS motion axes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer programming environment.
Building upon the skills gained in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143), students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture
to a multi-axis SERCOS motion control system. Students will also practice project planning and efficient programming skills necessary for translating a machine specification
into reliable ladder logic code. Because all Logix5000 products share common features and a common operating system, students will be able to apply the configuring and
programming motion control skills they learn in this course to any of the Logix5000 controllers that are capable of motion control.
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and servo motion systems
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
Visualization
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
CCN190-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality using ladder
logic including SERCOS motion control technology. Students will learn how to apply advanced programming skills including tuning with motion analyzer software, advanced
camming techniques, coordinated motion, and add-on instructions for motion applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to program advanced Logix5000 motion control systems
• Tune a servo axis with motion analyzer software
PREREQUISITES
• Program event driven tasks
• Program output cam instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Calculate a cam profile
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
• Program coordinate and motion add-on instructions
(CCP143) or equivalent experience with basic ladder logic programming
• Develop a motion control project using the power programming state model
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4: Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS)
• Program coordinated move transform instructions in a pick and place application
Programming course (CCN145) or equivalent experience
Motion Control
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Drives
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 5:
ADVANCED MOTION PROGRAMMING
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project for a SERCOS motion application
• Add drives and configure SERCOS axes
• Test SERCOS hardware
• Autotune SERCOS axes
• Plan a motion project
• Create user-defined data types, an axis-level program shell, and axis-level tags
• Program:
- Stopping routine
- Axis-level dispatch and power
- Resetting routine
up routines
- Starting routine
- Axis-level command routine
- Execute routine
- Axis-level waiting routine
- Electronic gearing
- Aborting routine
- Electronic camming
- Clearing routine
• Replicate the axis program and application-level program
• Add a virtual axis
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 2.8
Safety
4 Days
Networks
CCN145
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
17
Software
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
KINETIX 6000 (SERCOS) PROGRAMMING
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
STRUCTURED TEXT/ SEQUENTIAL FUNCTION CHART PROGRAMMING
CCP154
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills and knowledge to program using the structured text and sequential function chart programming languages. Students will learn
how to select instructions, expressions, and constructs, and then enter these elements and more into a routine. Students will also learn how to test sequential function chart
logic using forces and step throughs.
Safety
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Program assignments, expressions, and instructions in structured text
• Program constructs and comments in structured text
• Design a sequential function chart
• Program and test a sequential function chart
• Store, pause, and reset sequential function chart data
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to program structured text and sequential function chart
routines in Logix Designer projects for any Logix5000 controller
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or experience with basic Logix Designer projects (navigating the
software, creating tags, creating routines, etc.)
Networks
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
Visualization
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
PHASEMANAGER™ PROJECT DESIGN
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
CCP711
1 Days
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using the PhaseManager
feature. This course presents a tool that will help students effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project by
identifying control and equipment modules within application code. They will separate equipment code from equipment phase code, test an equipment phase, and configure
a sequential function chart as an internal sequencer.
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Define equipment phases and state models in a Logix Designer project
• Separate equipment phrase code from equipment code
• Test an equipment phase
• Configure a sequential function chart as an internal sequencer
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to apply the S88 state model to Logix Designer projects for any
Logix5000 controller
Process Control
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
course (CCP143) or advanced programming experience using the Logic
Designer Application
• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
Condition Monitoring
Software
18
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills to produce a fuzzy control system for a continuous process application. It introduces the range of options for fuzzy systems but
focuses on using fuzzy logic to adjust the gains of a PID loop to meet specific control requirements. Starting with a description of a process, students will decide whether fuzzy
logic is the best control method, and then will design a fuzzy system, develop it in FuzzyDesigner software, and implement it in a Logix5000 controller. Students will use
FuzzyDesigner’s simulation, graphing, and online monitoring tools to validate the system against control requirements.
Safety
Visualization
Networks
PREREQUISITES
• Ability to perform these Logix Designer Application skills:
- Enter and edit logic
- Download and go online
- Monitor and edit data
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146)
CCN144
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to configure, test, tune, and program CIP motion axes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer programming environment.
Building upon the skills gained in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143), students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture
to a multi-axis CIP motion control system. Students will practice project planning and efficient programming skills necessary for translating a machine specification into
reliable ladder logic code. Because all Logix5000 products share common features and a common operating system, students will be able to apply the configuring and
programming motion control skills they learn in this course to any of the Logix5000 controllers that are capable of motion control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project for a CIP motion application
PREREQUISITES
• Add drives and configure CIP motion axes
• Test CIP motion hardware
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Autotune CIP motion axes
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
• Plan a motion project
knowledge of general motion control, drives, feedback devices, and servo
• Create user-defined data types, axis-level program shell, and axis-level tags
motion systems
• Program the:
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
- Axis-level dispatch and power up routines
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
- Axis-level command routine
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Axis-level waiting routine
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
- Aborting, clearing, stopping, resetting, and starting routine
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
• Replicate the axis program
Logix5000
Documentation
Reference
Guide
CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Replicate an application-level program and the execute routines
• Add a virtual axis
• Program electronic gearing and camming
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
19
Motion Control
4 Days
Drives
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
KINETIX 6500 (CIP) PROGRAMMING
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to design, develop, or implement advanced process
control applications
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Decide when to use fuzzy logic
• Chose a fuzzy control scheme
• Identify input and output variables, terms, and membership parameters
• Write rules
• Chose a defuzzification method
• Create FuzzyDesigner project
• Create ports and variables
• Enter terms and rules
• Chain rules
• Simulate a fuzzy system execution
• Graph inputs and outputs
• Create, import, monitor, and change add-on instruction
Condition Monitoring
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PRS012
Software
FUZZY LOGIC DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX® 750-SERIES CONFIGURATION FOR AN
INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM
CCA184
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, given a PowerFlex 750-Series drive (PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755) that has been successfully started up, students will be able to integrate
their drive into a system that includes Logix5000 controllers and PanelView™ Plus terminals running FactoryTalk View ME software. Throughout the course, students will have
the chance to use a variety of hardware and software tools, including the A6 LCD HIM, Logix Designer software, and FactoryTalk® View ME software. After each demonstration,
students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to add PowerFlex 750-Series drives to an Integrated
• Add a PowerFlex 750-Series drive to a Logix Designer project
Architecture system
• Locate and modify PowerFlex 750-Series data using Logix Designer software
PREREQUISITES
• Integrate a PowerFlex 750-Series drive with a Logix5000 controller
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add PowerFlex 750-Series faceplates to a FactoryTalk View ME application
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Operate a PowerFlex 750-Series drive in an Integrated Architecture system
(including PPE requirements and safe practices)
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Completion of the PowerFlex 750-Series Startup & Configuration course (CCA182)
• Knowledge of Logix5000 system fundamentals and basic programming skills
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
through one or more of the following methods::
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20G-DRG70
Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Fundamentals course (CCP146)
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
- Logix 5000 software computer-based and/or web-based training
- Equivalent experience programming Logix5000 control systems
• Previous experience with FactoryTalk View ME software is suggested, but
not required
Motion Control
MACHINE-LEVEL DESIGN OPTIMIZATION:
DRIVE AND MOTOR SELECTION
VC-MLDO-01
Virtual
Classroom
90 Minutes
CEUs 0.15
COURSE PURPOSE
This course covers best practices for architecting control solutions for machines. The instructor will show students how to size and select drives and motors and then they will
practice these tasks with an application. The design tools and best practices covered in the course aim to optimize and reduce build time with machine-level design.
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a motion profile, a mechanism, and transmissions
• Select a motor and drive
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
20
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers and OEMs who design machine-level control applications
PREREQUISITES
There are no prerequisites for this course; however, experience with designing
machine-level control applications is helpful
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Motion Analyzer software, version 6.1, must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 0.2
COURSE PURPOSE
This course covers best practices for architecting control solutions for machines. The instructor will show students how to size and select control platforms and machine-level
networks and then they will practice these tasks with an application. The design tools and best practices covered in the course aim to optimize and reduce build time with
machine-level design.
Visualization
Networks
Safety
PREREQUISITES
There are no prerequisites for this course; however, experience with designing
machine-level control applications is helpful
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Integrated Architecture Builder software, version 9.1, must be installed
and activated. The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to
obtain a temporary installation of the software if students do not have it.
SI100
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to develop a project and program basic ladder logic
instructions for any Logix5000 controller. Students will have an opportunity to use the RSLogix 5000 application to perform basic software tasks to meet the requirements
of a given functional specification. In addition, students will be introduced to basic Logix5000 concepts and terminology.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: System integrator programmers who have little or no working experience with
• Document and search ladder logic
• Locate control system components
Logix5000 controllers, and are responsible for programming Logix5000 controllers
• Configure produce/consume
• Create and modify a project
using the RSLogix 5000 application.
messaging and message instructions
• Organize project and arrays
PREREQUISITES
• Configure controllers to share date
• Connect a computer to a
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
over an EtherNet/IP network
communication network
• Read wiring diagrams
• Create a periodic and event task
• Download and go online
• Develop an add-on instruction
• Communicate with local and remote
• Test a ladder diagram
I/O modules
• Handle a major fault
• Update Logix5000 firmware
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCP143, CCP146, and CCP151
• Import Logix Designer components
• Start a ladder diagram
in a consolidated format. Do not take all 4 courses.
• Optional:
• Create tags and monitor data
- Understand control systems
• Enter ladder logic components
- Manage Logix Designer
• Create UDTs
project files
• Select basic ladder logic instructions
• Program timer, counter, move, math,
and compare instructions
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
21
Motion Control
SI: LOGIX5000 PROJECT DEVELOPMENT AND BASIC
LADDER LOGIC PROGRAMMING
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers and OEMs who design machine-level control applications
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Select network topology/components and a controller and I/O
• Add devices to the network
• Verify network loading
Process Control
120 Minutes
Condition Monitoring
Virtual
Classroom
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
VC-MLDO-02
Software
MACHINE-LEVEL DESIGN OPTIMIZATION:
NETWORKS, CONTROLLER, AND I/O SELECTION
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
OEM: CONTROLLOGIX, FACTORYTALK VIEW ME, KINETIX 6000,
AND POWERFLEX 40 FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
OEM100
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot: Studio 5000 applications that operate on a ControlLogix-based machine; FactoryTalk
View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on PanelView Plus terminals; Kinetix 6000 motion systems; and PowerFlex 40 drives. Students will have the opportunity to
develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used with: ControlLogix hardware, PanelView Plus terminal, Kinetix 6000 systems, and PowerFlex
40 drives; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View ME application. Students will also learn to diagnose and troubleshoot problems with controller, I/O or
other hardware issues.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: OEMs who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix-based machine, but
• Configure produced/consumed data
• Assign an IP address to a computer
have little to no working experience with ControlLogix systems
• Tune a PID loop
• Connect a computer to a network
PREREQUISITES
• Manage project files
• Configure EtherNet/IP addresses
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure a trend chart
• Download and go online
• Perform basic voltage and current checks
• Test a ladder diagram
• Update firmware
• Read wiring diagrams
• Troubleshoot digital and analog
• Locate I/O tags and devices
Visualization
•
•
•
•
•
•
Locate and edit tag values
Create and modify project
Draft basic ladder logic
Select ladder logic instructions
Edit ladder logic online
Program timer, counter, math,
compare, and move instructions
• Search for project components
• Force I/O and toggle bits
I/O modules
• Modify application communications
• Download runtime files
• Configure display security, graphic
displays, and interactive controls
• Troubleshoot workstation problems
• Interpret motion instructions
and indicators
• Modify drive parameters
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
EtherNet/IP™ Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
ABT-N300-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
ABT-1756-TSJ20
Motion Control
VC-PIO
POINT I/O™ IMPLEMENTATION
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to implement a POINT I/O system from determining the quantity and type of I/O needed to testing your system. This course will also show
students how to calculate power requirements and decide whether an expansion power supply will be needed. Students will also add and configure an Ethernet adapter and
I/O modules in a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project.
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Size a POINT I/O control system
• Configure POINT I/O control system components in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer project
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application (version 21) must be installed and
activated. The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to
obtain a temporary installation of the software if students do not have it.
Software
22
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers who design and develop control applications and who will be
working with POINT I/O system components over an EtherNet/IP™ network
PREREQUISITES
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer experience or one of the following courses:
- Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting (CCP299)
- Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: CompactLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting (CCP298)
• Knowledge of Ethernet fundamentals
• Knowledge of safe electrical practices
• Knowledge of electrical principles such as voltage, current, and power
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6500 servo drive system. During class, students will practice
operating and troubleshooting the system through hands-on exercises using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. Building upon the skills developed in the
Fundamentals of Motion Control course (CCN130), students will learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system. Students will practice identifying
faults related to hardware, software, and motion networks by leveraging tools such as web pages, system LEDs, and Logix Designer status indicators. Upon completion of this
course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6500 servo drive system.
Safety
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6500 motion
control systems
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
knowledge of or experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and
position loop systems
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent knowledge of or experience with the
ControlLogix platform and basic ladder logic
CATALOG #
Visualization
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
Motion Control Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-M100-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
23
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
Motion Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify the physical components and wiring of a Kinetix 6500 servo drive
• Interpret Kinetix 6500 servo drive status indicators
• Using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application:
- Determine the status of a drive and its associated axis
- Test wiring and signals for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Trend status information for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Tune a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
• In a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project:
- Verify a Kinetix 6500 servo drive and drive axis configuration
- Interpret motion state instructions for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Interpret motion move instructions for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Troubleshoot ladder logic for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
• Troubleshoot failed communications for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive control module
• Access a Kinetix 6500 servo drive web page
• Remove and replace a Kinetix 6500 servo drive
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CCN201
Networks
KINETIX 6500 TROUBLESHOOTING AND
PROJECT INTERPRETATION
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Fundamentals Training + One
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Attend a Rockwell Automation Fundamentals class
and receive a 20% discount on your next training class!
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Fundamentals Training + One is a great way to extend your
Drives
learning experience beyond just the basics and save money in
the process. Enroll in any Rockwell Automation Fundamentals
class and receive a discount on your second class.
Process Control
After attending a Fundamentals class, you have thirty days
to enroll in a second class to receive the discount.
Condition Monitoring
Rockwell Automation will automatically reduce your second class
tuition by 20% off the list price.
Software
24
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
How to Enroll
To enroll in a Rockwell Automation
training class, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor,
Rockwell Automation sales office or dial
440-646-3434 (option 7) and mention
promotional code TAS0702.
This offer is not valid with other promotions.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
Micro Controllers and Connected Components
Micro Controllers and Connected Components Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
MicroLogix 1400
Processor Installation and
Data Monitoring
MicroLogix 1400
Processor Embedded Web
Server Management
CCPM41 • 1 Day
CCPM43 • 1 Day
MicroLogix 1400 Processor
Installation, Data
Monitoring and Embedded
Web Server Management
CCPM44 • 2 Days
Combination of CCPM41
and CCPM43 Courses
Introduction to
Automation
CCP800 • 3 Days
Introduction to
the Integrated
Architecture System
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
CIA101 • 2 Days
Micro850 Installation,
Wiring, and Troubleshooting
with Micro850 Workstation
VC-M850
(5) 120-min.
Sessions
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
26
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
Micro850
Programming
M850P • 2 Days
PowerFlex 523/525
Drives with
PowerFlex 525 Drive Kit:
Communications and
Programming
VC-PF523P
nss
(2) 90-min. Sessions
Introduction to Automation
iBook Available on iTunes
Includes Hardware Kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
27
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
CCP800
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Mobile
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to you within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand:
• Identify:
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
Visualization
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEGRATED
ARCHITECTURE™ SYSTEM
CIA101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about and
interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While
performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products function together
within Integrated Architecture.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Identify components of the integrated architecture system
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the Integrated
• Program a basic Logix Designer project for an integrated system
Architecture System
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
PREREQUISITES
• Identify programming languages in an integrated system
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understand Logix5000 multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Condition Monitoring
Software
28
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
1 Day
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
CCPM43
CEUs 0.7
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
29
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently monitor data for their MicroLogix1400 processor remotely over an Ethernet/IP
network. Each lesson in the course is devoted to a step in the process of accessing processor and control systems data with remote access applications. After each procedure
has been demonstrated, students will be given an opportunity to apply what they have learned by accessing a simple web page view and the custom designed user-provided
page views. Students will receive a kit of hardware in this course. Students keep the installed and programmed MicroLogix processor for additional practice.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to remotely access processor and control system data for
• Understand the embedded web server
MicroLogix 1400 processor
• Monitor processor diagnostics
PREREQUISITES
• Configure server settings and user accounts
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Understand simple web pages
OR
• Generate user-provided web pages
•
Basic
experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
• Optional: Configure an Ethernet network
ability to go online and program basic ladder logic)
Motion Control
MICROLOGIX 1400 PROCESSOR EMBEDDED
WEB SERVER MANAGEMENT
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently install a MicroLogix 1400 processor and monitor data. Each lesson in this course
is devoted to a step in the installation and data monitoring sequence. Students will begin by learning about the hardware features of the MicroLogix 1400 processor. Next,
students will install their own MicroLogix processor on a DIN Rail. Students will then learn a step-by-step procedure on how to monitor data using the LCD and keypad.
Students will be given an opportunity to apply what they have learned by monitoring data in their MicroLogix 1400 processor. Students keep the installed and programmed
MicroLogix processor for additional practice.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to install and monitor data on a MicroLogix 1400 processor
• Install the processor
PREREQUISITES
• Use the LCD and keypad
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Monitor user defined target files
OR
• Use the mode switch and user defined LCD
• Basic experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
• Configure the Ethernet port on the processor
ability to go online and program basic ladder logic)
Safety
CEUs 0.7
Drives
1 Day
Mobile
CCPM41
Process Control
MICROLOGIX™ 1400 PROCESSOR INSTALLATION
AND DATA MONITORING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
MICROLOGIX 1400 PROCESSOR INSTALLATION, DATA
MONITORING, AND EMBEDDED WEB SERVER MANAGEMENT
CCPM44 *
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Mobile
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently install a MicroLogix 1400 processor and monitor data. Students will begin by
learning about the hardware features of the MicroLogix 1400 processor. Next, students will install their own MicroLogix processor on a DIN Rail. Students will learn a
step-by-step procedure on how to monitor data using the LCD and keypad. Students will be given the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently monitor data
for their MicroLogix 1400 processor remotely over an Ethernet network. Students will learn to access control systems data with remote access applications. Students will
be given an opportunity to access a simple web page view and the custom user-provided page views. Students keep the installed and programmed MicroLogix system for
additional practice.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to install a MicroLogix 1400 processor, monitor data, and work
• Install the processor
with the embedded web server
• Use the LCD and keypad
PREREQUISITES
• Monitor user defined target files
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Use the mode switch and user defined LCD
OR
• Configure the Ethernet port on the processor
•
Basic
experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
• Understand the embedded web server
ability
to go online and program basic ladder logic)
• Monitor processor diagnostics
• Configure server settings and user accounts
• Understand simple web pages
• Generate user-provided web pages
Visualization
MICRO850® PROGRAMMING
* Course CCPM44 is a combination class of courses CCPM41 and CCPM43.
M850P
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to program Micro850 controllers using ladder diagram, function block diagram, and structured text programming
languages. The instructor will demonstrate and students will practice programming multiple example applications using programming best practices in each of the
programming languages.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to learn how to program Micro850 controllers
• Establish EtherNet/IP™ communications and validate Micro850
PREREQUISITES
controller firmware
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create a new Connected Components Workbench™ project
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Configure plug-in and expansion I/O modules for Micro850 controllers
• Organize functional specifications for Micro850 controllers
• Program Micro850 controllers using:
- Basic ladder diagrams
- Ladder diagrams with boolean instructions
- Ladder diagrams with data conversion, arithmetic, and comparator instructions
- Ladder diagrams with counter and timer instructions
- Function block diagrams
- Structured text
Software
30
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
VC-M850
CEUs 1.0
Mobile
Safety
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to install and wire Micro850 controllers, plug-in and expansion I/O modules, power supplies, and I/O devices. This
course will also teach students how to troubleshoot basic controller and power supply problems. Throughout this course, the instructor will cover a range of topics from
understanding the basics of control systems and wiring, to installing I/O devices and identifying common Micro850 problems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are new to controllers and need to install and wire Micro850
• Install a Micro850 controller, a power supply, I/O devices, and plug-in and
system components
expansion I/O modules
PREREQUISITES
• Wire a Micro850 controller and a power supply
Basic working knowledge of safe electrical practices including but not limited to:
• Wire I/O devices to a Micro850 controller
• Understanding electricity, how it works, and the dangers involved in working
• Ensure proper electrical connection of I/O devices
with electricity
• Isolate the cause of a fault or failure condition
• Identifying hazardous conditions
• Troubleshoot a Micro850 controller and power supply
• Adhering to all safety regulations
• Resolve common controller and power supply faults
VC-PF523P
(2) 90-min Sessions
CEUs 0.3
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to program drive parameters for a drive application. This course will teach students how to create a custom parameter
group based upon drive applications. Throughout this course, the instructor will cover a range of topics from establishing communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via
a USB connection and EtherNet/IP network to testing parameters of a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the HIM.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have drive programming experience but are new to PowerFlex
component-class drives
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via a USB connection
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 525 drive via an EtherNet/IP network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the Startup Wizard in Connected
• Knowledge of AC/DC drive fundamentals and drives programming experience
Components Workbench software
• Basic working knowledge of safe electrical practices including, but not limited to:
• Create a CustomView™ parameter group
- Understanding electricity, how it works, and the dangers involved in working
• Edit and test parameters using the HIM
with electricity
- Identifying hazardous conditions
- Adhering to all safety regulations
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• PowerFlex 525 drive kit (shipped prior to class)
• A computer and phone
• Connected Components Workbench software must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
31
Motion Control
Virtual
Classroom
Drives
POWERFLEX 523/525 DRIVES WITH POWERFLEX 525
DRIVE KIT: COMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAMMING
Visualization
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Micro850 workstation (shipped unassembled, prior to class)
Process Control
(5) 120-min. Sessions
Condition Monitoring
Virtual
Classroom
Software
MICRO850 INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH MICRO850 WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Micro Controllers &
Conn. Components
Stay Ahead of the Technology Curve
Industry-Recognized Curriculum
and Cutting-Edge Lab Equipment
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Micro850 Programmable Controller
Safety
Rapid changes in manufacturing and automation technology can make it
difficult for educators with technical programs to stay up to date on the
latest information. Rockwell Automation provides an affordable educational
support program for schools interested in advancing their technical
curriculums.
Rockwell Automation offers a Micro850 Configuration, Programming, and
Troubleshooting curriculum and lab workstation, to help you achieve
current industry standards. These resources will help you stay ahead of the
technology curve:
Mobile
• Micro850 Classroom Curriculum (TCT-M850-TIP and TCT-M850-TSP)
Visualization
Students assemble and build their own
workstation and learn about Micro850
controllers and system components. Wiring
kits are available so workstations can be
dismantled and used for the next class.
Hands-on lab exercises provided in the
curriculum materials allow students to
practice the following skills:
• Micro850 Workstation and Wiring Kit (ABT-TDM850 and ABT-TDM850KIT)
An assembled workstation and optional case are also available
for purchase.
Motion Control
• Fully wire, install, and configure a
Micro850 workstation
Drives
• Program the Micro850 controller using
the free downloadable Connected
Components Workbench software.
Students learn to program Ladder Logic,
Function Block Diagrams, and
Structured Text.
Process Control
• Develop troubleshooting skills needed
to assess abnormal conditions in a
working system
Condition Monitoring
For information about other education
resources and partnership opportunities
with Rockwell Automation, please email us
at [email protected] or
call 440-646-3434, select option 7.
Software
32
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5/RSLogix 5 Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
CCPS65 • 1 Day
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Programming
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Advanced Programming
CCP410 • 4 Days
CCP411 • 4.5 Days
PLC-5/SLC 500
and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122 • 2 Days
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCP412 • 4 Days
CCP409 • 4 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
34
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
RSLogix 5 Software
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
RSLinx Software
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
PLC Fundamentals
Web-Based Training
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
35
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX FUNDAMENTALS
CCP122
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will identify the main components of programmable controller systems and describe their
functions and describe the flow of information through a programmable controller system. They will receive a thorough introduction to RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software,
and will learn how to transfer, monitor, and run projects on a PLC-5 or SLC 500 processor and how to interpret simple ladder logic.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand programmable controller systems
• Have little or no working experience with programmable controller systems
• Identify common hardware components of processors
• Are preparing for the following courses: PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming
• Identify hardware components of I/O systems
(CCP410), SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming (CCPS41), PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
• Identify I/O configurations
Maintenance and Troubleshooting (CCP412), and SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
• Get started with programming systems
Maintenance and Troubleshooting (CCPS43)
• Change the radix (base) of a number
• Set up communications between a programming system and a processor
PREREQUISITES
• Identify PLC-5 and SLC 500 system addresses
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Interpret ladder logic
• Interpret Timer On-Delay (TON) and Count Up (CTU) instructions
Visualization
PLC-5 AND RSLOGIX 5 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCP412
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course provides students with the knowledge and the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related to noise,
power, and discrete and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students are introduced to basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostic tasks. Students
practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 5 project.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for troubleshooting and maintaining PLC-5 systems
• Communicate with a PLC-5 processor
using RSLogix 5 software
• Monitor and enter data
PREREQUISITES
• Interpret bit instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Edit and search ladder logic
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Document a project
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
• Force inputs and outputs
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Configure and preview a project report
• Create a histogram and trend chart
• Troubleshoot noise, discrete and analog I/O, I/O channel and chassis, and
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
processor/power supply problems
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ22
• Interpret and edit counter and timer instructions
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
• Search and interpret basic ladder logic
• Interpret and edit compare, data manipulation, and program control instructions
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
• Maintain and troubleshoot a PLC-5 system
Software
36
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CCP409
CEUs 2.8
Safety
Networks
Visualization
CCP410
COURSE PURPOSE
This course introduces students to programming techniques and instructions to configure and program a 1785 PLC-5 system. The instructor will demonstrate how to use
programming instructions and techniques to create a ladder logic project. Students will be given exercises that provide them with hands-on practice using RSLogix 5 software
to program a PLC-5 processor.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have to write ladder logic projects for 1785 PLC-5 processors
• Establish communications
PREREQUISITES
• Configure channels
• Identify addresses and organize the data table
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Draft ladder logic
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Program bit instructions
or equivalent experience
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Select and program timer and counter instructions
• Control program flow
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
• Enter documentation
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
• Search ladder logic
• Convert integer values to and from binary coded decimal values
• Select and program mathematical, compare, and manipulation instructions
• Configure and preview a project printout
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
37
Motion Control
CEUs 2.8
Drives
4 Days
Process Control
PLC-5 AND RSLOGIX 5 PROGRAMMING
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This course builds upon students’ knowledge of basic maintenance and troubleshooting techniques and provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose
problems found in advanced PLC-5 applications. Students will interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions in troubleshooting scenarios. In addition,
students will practice diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions and troubleshooting communications problems with Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™)
and remote I/O networks.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced
• Communicate with a PLC-5 processor on a DH+ network
PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 5 software
• Interpret program flow and interrupt routines
PREREQUISITES
• Troubleshoot:
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- Sequential function charts
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
- Multiple main control programs
• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
- Fault, STI, and PII routines
course (CCP412)
- FSC, immediate I/O update, shift register, and sequencer instructions
- Indexed and indirect addressing
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Message and PID instructions
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ22
- Analog data transfers
- Data transfers between scanner and adapter
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
• Apply preventative maintenance and troubleshooting strategies to a PLC-5 system PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
Condition Monitoring
4 Days
Software
PLC-5 AND RSLOGIX 5 ADVANCED
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5 AND RSLOGIX 5 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
CCP411
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will help provide students with the skills needed to program PLC-5 processors using RSLogix 5 software. Students will practice using advanced programming
techniques and instructions. The instructor will demonstrate all relevant procedures, then provide students with realistic situations in which to practice those procedures.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to write or interpret ladder logic projects using advanced
• Set up a PLC-5 system on a DH+ network
programming techniques and instructions for PLC-5 processors
• Plan program flow strategies
PREREQUISITES
• Program SFCs, MCPs, and advanced routines
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Program various advanced instructions
• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming course (CCP410) or
• Apply indirect and indexed addressing
equivalent experience
• Transfer data between processors and analog modules
• Transfer data between scanner and adapter processors
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Program a message (MSG) instruction for DH+ communications
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
• Program Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) and ASCII instructions
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
Visualization
SLC 500 AND PLC-5 COMMUNICATIONS
CCPS65
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx® software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure and manage various
communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students will learn how to monitor,
optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) communications and serial driver in
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or
RSLinx software
RSLogix 5 software
• Navigate RSLinx software
PREREQUISITES
• Download and upload a project
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Go online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 processor
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Change the processor operating mode
• Completion of the Fundamentals of Programmable Controller Systems Using
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 Software course (CCP122) or a fundamental knowledge
• Apply diagnostic tools and utilities
of programmable controllers
• Configure client application communications
Condition Monitoring
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Software
38
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1747-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
SLC 500/RSLogix 500 Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
CCPS65 • 1 Day
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Programming
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Advanced Programming
CCPS41 • 4 Days
CCPS42 • 4 Days
PLC-5/SLC 500
and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122 • 2 Days
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
OEM: SLC 500 and
RSLogix 500 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
CCPS43 • 4 Days
CCPS45 • 4 Days
OEM 101 • 2 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
40
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
Also
Available
in Spanish
RSLinx Software
R
RSLogix
500 Software Offline Programming
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
SLC 500 Hardware Fundamentals
RSLogix 500 Software Online Monitoring
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training
SLC 500 Programming Fundamentals
RSLogix 500 Software Documenting and Searching
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training
SLC 500 Fundamentals Bundle
RSLogix 500 Software Bundle
Offline Programming
Online Monitoring
Hardware
Fundamentals
Programming
Fundamentals
Documenting and Searching
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
41
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5/SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX FUNDAMENTALS
CCP122
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will learn how to describe the flow of information and functions of a programmable controller
system. Students will learn how to navigate through RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software. Students will learn how to transfer, monitor, and run projects on a PLC-5 or SLC 500
processor and how to interpret simple ladder logic.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have little or no working experience with programmable
• Understand programmable controller systems
controller systems
• Identify common hardware components of processors
PREREQUISITES
• Identify hardware components of I/O systems
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Identify I/O configurations
• Change the radix (base) of a number
• Set up communications between a programming system and a processor
• Identify PLC-5 and SLC 500 system addresses
• Interpret ladder logic
• Interpret Timer-On Delay (TON) and Count Up (CTU) instructions
Visualization
SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX 500
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCPS43
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course provides the necessary practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related to noise, power, and discrete
and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students will be introduced to basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostic tasks. Students practice these
diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 500 project.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to troubleshoot and maintain SLC 500 systems using
• Communicate with an SLC 500 processor
RSLogix 500 software
• Identify memory layout and SLC 500 system addresses
PREREQUISITES
• Monitor and enter data
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Search, document, and edit ladder logic
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Interpret various ladder logic instructions
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
• Configure and preview a project report
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Troubleshoot processor, power supply, and noise-related problems
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Troubleshoot discrete and analog I/O problems
• Create a histogram
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
• Force inputs and outputs
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ22
• Maintain and troubleshoot an SLC 500 system
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Software
42
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CCPS45
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Networks
Visualization
CCPS41
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX 500 PROGRAMMING
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose problems found in advanced SLC 500 applications. In troubleshooting scenarios, students will
interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions by operating a variety of simulation devices and software HMI applications, such as PanelView terminals, and
RSView®32 software applications. Students will practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions and troubleshooting communication problems
with DH+ and remote I/O networks.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced
• Setup an SLC 500 system on a DH+ network
SLC 500 applications using RSLogix 500 software
• Troubleshoot RSLogix 500 projects containing the following:
PREREQUISITES
- STI, DII, program flow/interrupt, and fault routines
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- Immediate I/O update, shift register, sequencer, and PID instructions
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
- Indexed and indirect addressing
• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and
- Message instructions for DH+ communications
Troubleshooting course (CCPS43)
- Remote I/O addressing
- Discrete data transfers on a remote I/O link
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Block transfers on a remote I/O link
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
• Apply preventative maintenance and troubleshooting strategies
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ22
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Process Control
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Condition Monitoring
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Test a project
• Configure and preview a project report
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice to program an SLC 500 processor. Students will create a program, step-by-step, to meet the
requirements of a given functional specification. As each section of the program is built, students will gain experience that can be applied to more advanced
RSLogix 500 projects.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for programming SLC 500 applications using
• Communicate with an SLC 500 processor
RSLogix 500 software
• Create a new project and draft ladder logic
PREREQUISITES
• Determine addresses and assign symbols
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Determine program flow and create subroutines
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Select and program timer, counter, math, data handling, and
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers
comparison instructions
OR
• Enter and search for documentation
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Organize the data table
43
Software
SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX 500 ADVANCED
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX 500 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
CCPS42
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides programmers with skills to develop advanced ladder logic projects for SLC 500 systems using RSLogix 500 software. This course covers several networking
options, particularly Data Highway Plus (DH+) and remote I/O communications. Students will be introduced to DH+ and remote I/O communications configurations and will
have the opportunity to program advanced instructions for data transfer over a DH+ network and a remote I/O link.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Setup an SLC 500 system on a DH+ network
• Need to program advanced ladder logic instructions or
• Plan program flow strategies
• Set up and configure SLC 500 systems for DH+ and/or remote
• Program STI, DII, and fault routines
I/O communications
• Apply immediate I/O update instructions
PREREQUISITES
• Program shift register, sequencer, and PID instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Assign remote I/O addresses
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Configure an SLC 500 system for discrete data transfers and block transfers
• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming course (CCPS41)
on a remote I/O link
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Apply indirect and indexed addressing
• Program a message instruction for DH+ communications
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Visualization
SLC 500 AND PLC-5 COMMUNICATIONS
CCPS65
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure and manage various
communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students will learn how to monitor,
optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or
• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) communications and serial driver in
RSLogix 5 software
RSLinx software
• Navigate RSLinx software
PREREQUISITES
• Download and upload a project
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Go online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 processor
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Change the processor operating mode
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
or a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
• Apply diagnostic tools and utilities
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Configure client application communications
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Software
44
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
OEM: SLC 500 AND RSLOGIX 500
FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
OEM101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to maintain and troubleshoot an RSLogix 500 application on a SLC 500-based machine.
Students will have the opportunity to develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used with SLC 500 hardware and RSLogix 500 software.
Students will also practice diagnosing and troubleshooting problems with Controller, I/O, or other hardware issues.
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
ABT-1747-TSJ22
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
45
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
Motion Control
Visualization
Curriculum Note:
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCP122 and CCPS43 in an
accelerated format. Do not take this course with the other two courses.
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
OEMs who need to maintain and troubleshoot SLC 500 applications using
RSLogix 500 software
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Perform basic voltage and current checks
• Read wiring diagrams
Networks
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Communicate with a processor
• Determine addresses
• Draft basic ladder logic
• Program bit, timer, counter, math, and compare instructions
• Search ladder logic
• Force I/O and toggle bits
• Configure a histogram
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Global Workforce Solutions
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Global Workforce Solutions collaborates with thought-leading
companies focused on driving consistent global training programs
and creating employee development roadmaps.
By partnering with our clients as their single source training
provider, together we achieve consistent results in their electrical,
mechanical, and automation controls training programs.
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Global Workforce Solutions designs and implements
future-proof, sustainable, flexible solutions
that result in retained performance, while
continuously measuring the value of
each solution through ongoing
alignment and investment analysis.
Mastery Level
Networks
• Maximum Business Impact
• Creation of Proactive Workforce
• System-Level Courses
• Train-the-Trainer
Intermediate Skills
Visualization
• Speed of Execution
• Adaptation of New Technologies
• Increased Workforce Flexibility
• Enhanced Problem Solving
• Optimized Skills for First Responders
Foundation Skills
Motion Control
• Focus on Installed Base
• Baseline Skills
• Hands-on Experience
• Standard Operating
Procedures
• Risk-free Practice
• Safety Compliant
Drives
Process Control
During the assessment stage,
we can identify and align the
right role with the right set of
knowledge or skills.
Condition Monitoring
Custom Hands-on Courses • Native Language • Local Delivery
Time-Proven Methods of Learning Effectiveness • Factory Developed Instructors
Certificate Programs • Skills and Knowledge Assessments
Software
46
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Safety
Safety
Safety Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
SAFETY STANDARDS
Functional Safety
for Machinery
Introduction
SAF-TUV1 • 3 Days
Functional
Safety for Machinery
Engineer Certification
(TÜV Rheinland)
Functional
Safety for Machinery
Technician Certification
(TÜV Rheinland)
SAF-TUV2 • 4 Days
ays
SAF-TUV3 • 2.5 Days
ays
Exam
SAF-TUVT
0.5 Day
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Fundamentals
Exam
SAF-TUV3T
60 Mins.
Electrical Safety
and Lockout/Tagout
Mechanical Safety
and Lockout/Tagout
Electrical Safety for
Non-Electrical Personnel
SAF-001 • 1 Day
SAF-003 • 1 Day
SAF-004 • 1 Day
SAF-PLC101 • 1 Day
On-Site
Only
Course
On-Site
Only
Course
On-Site
Only
Course
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
2030 ElectroGuard
Safety Isolation System
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Fundamentals
SAF-ELE101-LD
1 Day
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Project Development
GuardLogix
Application
Development
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Programming
CCP143 • 4 Days
SAF-LOG101 • 2 Days
SAF-PLC103 • 1 Day
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
GuardLogix
Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
SAF-LOG103 • 1 Day
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
2030 ElectroGuard
Safety Isolation System
Authorized Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
SAF-PLC102 • 1 Day
SAF-ELE102-LD • 2 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
48
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
NFPA 70E 2015 Arc Flash
Awareness
NFPA 70E 2015 Electrical Safety and
Arc Flash Compliance
Machine Functional
Safety and ISO 13849
System Design:
Risk Assessment
SAF-SFT10615 • 1 Day
SAF-SFT11215 • 2 Days
US STANDARDD
US STANDARDD
VC-MFSISO-01
120-min. Session
NFPA 70E 2015 Arc Flash Awareness
VC-SFT10615
(4) 90-min. Sessions
US STANDARDD
e-LEARNING
2014 National Electrical
Code (NEC):
Update Awareness
2014 National
Electrical Code (NEC):
Comprehensive Awareness
SAF-SFT2014A • 2 Days
SAF-SFT2014C • 4 Days
US STANDARDD
US STANDARDD
Electrical Safety and Arc
Flash Awareness
CA-SAF-SFT100 • 0.5 Day
CANADA STANDAARD
Industrial Safety
Web-Based Training
AADvance Comprehensive
System Training
PRST9063LD • 3 Days
AADvance Operation,
Maintenance,
and Troubleshooting
Safety Relays and
Devices Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PRST9064LD • 2 Days
SAF-COM101 • 2 Days
Core Requirement for
Certificate Program
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
Combination Understand and
Maintain or Troubleshoot Level Course
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
49
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
GUARDPLC™ 1600/1800 CONTROLLER
SYSTEMS FUNDAMENTALS
SAF-PLC101
1 Days
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a fundamental knowledge of GuardPLC 1600/1800 systems and RSLogix Guard PLUS software.
Students will be introduced to GuardPLC safety standards, functionality and controller circuitry, controller components, and distributed I/O modules. Students will have
hands-on opportunities to use RSLogix Guard PLUS software to establish communications with a controller. This course provides students with the resources and hands-on
practice required to download a project to a GuardPLC 1600 controller and start a routine.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have no or little experience using GuardPLC 1600/1800 controllers
• Understand the safety principles of a GuardPLC system
PREREQUISITES
• Understand the functionality of a GuardPLC system
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Identify GuardPLC 1600/1800 system components
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
• Get started with RSLogix Guard PLUS software
• Configure communications for a GuardPLC 1600/1800 controller
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Download and start the RSLogix Guard PLUS project
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50
GuardPLC Documentation Reference
Guide CD
ABT-1753-DRG70
Visualization
2030 ELECTROGUARD® SAFETY ISOLATION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
AND TROUBLESHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS
SAF-ELE101-LD
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will help provide students with the fundamental skills needed to operate, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System. The
instructor will describe and demonstrate basic system functionality and procedures for checkout, troubleshooting, and preventive maintenance. Students will then practice
these procedures using ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System modules. Highlights of this course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped with expansion,
communication, and pneumatic isolation modules.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard Safety
• Understand workplace practices for using the ElectroGuard system
Isolation System
• Perform system checkout
PREREQUISITES
• Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard system
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Interpret the status indicator lights
• Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures
• Replace ElectroGuard modules
• Experience using a multimeter and reading an electrical schematic
• Create a service log
• Ability to interpret an electrical schematic
• Perform preventive maintenance
Condition Monitoring
This course is intended for maintainers or programmers. Some topics may be
similar to topics covered in course SAF-ELE102-LD.
Software
50
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SAF-LOG103
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to monitor and troubleshoot Logix Designer projects and
hardware for GuardLogix controllers
Visualization
SAF-PLC102
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide
ABT-1753-TSJ50
GuardPLC Documentation Reference
Guide CD
ABT-1753-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently maintain an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and troubleshoot a GuardPLC
controller. It builds upon students’ fundamental knowledge of common controller terms and operation, and students’ ability to save, compile code, and download a project.
This course adds to students’ skill sets by introducing new tasks, such as creating and connecting signals, modifying a function block program, and troubleshooting problems
with the controller. Students will learn offline and online monitoring, testing of a routine, forcing project signals, and configuring and exporting diagnostic logs for locating
errors and simulating test conditions that do not occur in normal operation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Modify and download an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
• Need to maintain RSLogix Guard PLUS projects
• Configure and export GuardPLC diagnostic logs
• Troubleshoot GuardPLC controllers
• Troubleshoot GuardPLC 1600/1800 controller errors
PREREQUISITES
• Monitor and test an RSLogix Guard PLUS routine
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Force an RSLogix Guard PLUS project signal
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
• Archive and restore an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
course (SAF-PLC101)
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Motion Control
GUARDPLC 1600/1800 CONTROLLER SYSTEMS
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CATALOG #
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
Drives
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
Safety
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix Systems
Fundamentals course (CCP146) and Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting course (CCP153) or equivalent
experience with Logix Designer application
• General experience with industrial controls
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand GuardLogix controller safety operation
• Identify GuardLogix system hardware and project components
• Download and upload a GuardLogix project
• Troubleshoot GuardLogix controller components
• Troubleshoot and replace GuardLogix CompactBlock™ guard I/O safety modules
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation with a fundamental knowledge of a GuardLogix system. Upon completion of this course,
students should be able to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational GuardLogix system. Students will have the opportunity to develop and practice these skills by
learning basic GuardLogix concepts and terminology and troubleshooting a GuardLogix project.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
51
Software
GUARDLOGIX® FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
2030 ELECTROGUARD SAFETY ISOLATION SYSTEM AUTHORIZED
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
SAF-ELE102-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will help provide students with the skills and authorization level needed to maintain and troubleshoot the factory-sealed modules of a 2030 ElectroGuard Safety
Isolation System. The instructor will describe and demonstrate procedures for module checkout, troubleshooting, and preventative maintenance. Students will then practice
these procedures using ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System modules. Highlights of this course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped with expansion,
communication, and pneumatic isolation modules. This course will provide students with opportunities to practice troubleshooting module faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand functional specifications of ElectroGuard modules, including power
• Need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard System
panel, control module, expansion module, remote lockout station, and pneumatic
• Require authorization to repair sealed modules
isolation module
PREREQUISITES
• Perform module checkout
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Break the factory seal of an ElectroGuard module
• Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures
• Troubleshoot within the module
• Experience using a multimeter
• Interpret status indicator lights
• Ability to interpret an electrical schematic
• Replace the module seal
• Completion of the 2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System Maintenance and
• Create a service log
Troubleshooting Fundamentals course (SAF-ELE101-LD) or equivalent experience
• Perform preventive maintenance
• Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard system to the component level
Visualization
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course SAF-ELE101-LD.
AADVANCE® OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
PRST9064LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides an overview of AADvance hardware, software, and troubleshooting. The course consists of a mixture of lecture and hands-on lessons. Upon successful
completion of this course, students should be able to understand how AADvance operates as a fail-safe or fault tolerant controller; understand the configuration limits of the
system; navigate the workbench; monitor programs; lock/force I/O points; isolate faults to the module level by interpreting automatic fault indications; and hot-replace failed
modules without disrupting the systems or process.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting the AADvance system
• Recognize system architectures
PREREQUISITES
• Identify components
• General knowledge of programmable logic controllers (PLCs)
• Install and wire a system
• Background in industrial electronic control principles and practices
• Develop a program
• Download and monitor a project
• Update a running project
• Manage version source control
• Troubleshoot a system
Condition Monitoring
Curriculum Note:
Do not take both PRST9063LD and PRST9064LD because they share similar content.
If you are responsible for designing, building, or programming an AADvance system,
take this course instead: AADvance Comprehensive System Training (PRST9063LD)
Software
52
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in maintaining and troubleshooting safety relays and devices in relay-based machine functional safety systems. Students will be introduced
to safety relays and input and output devices used to configure safety systems according to industry standards for functional safety of machinery. Students will have the
opportunity for hands-on experience with Rockwell Automation safety products, including safety relays; opto-electronic presence sensing devices (light curtains and sensors);
pressure sensing devices (safety mats); operator interface devices (grip enabling switches and E-stop push buttons); electromechanical switches (interlock); and electronic
switches (non-contact RFID).
Visualization
CCP143
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
Given a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. This course
covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and SoftLogix controllers. This course
presents a deeper understanding of project development tasks, such as organizing tasks and routines, organizing controller data, configuring modules, and sharing data.
Students will use Producer/Consumer technology to multicast input and output devices, share data between controllers, and control remote I/O.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to develop Logix Designer projects for any
Logix5000 controller
• Communicate with a local
• Create and organize a project
1756-I/O module and over an
• Create periodic and event tasks
PREREQUISITES
EtherNet/IP network
• Develop an add-on instruction in
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure a message
ladder diagram
• Knowledge of common controller terms and operation through experience
• Allocate connections
• Organize arrays
or completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Retrieve and set controller status
• Create a user-defined data type
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or completion of the RSTrainer for ControlLogix
values with GSV/SSV instructions
• Import components
Fundamentals computer-based training (9393-RSTCLX)
• Program a BTD instruction
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Ability to write basic ladder logic with common instructions or through
• Configure a controller to produce and • Handle a major fault
completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
• Manage project files
consume data
Programming course (CCP151)
• Update firmware
• Configure controllers to share data
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
over EtherNet/IP™
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
53
Motion Control
4 Days
Drives
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 3:
PROJECT DEVELOPMENT
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who maintain and troubleshoot electric circuits or machine systems and
need to learn more about how to apply their skills to relay-based machine functional
safety systems
PREREQUISITES
Experience:
• Interpreting industrial electrical circuit schematics
• Maintaining industrial electrical circuits or machine systems
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Maintain relay-based machine functional safety systems
• Interpret and clear faults:
- At the safety relay
- For E-stop push buttons and grip enabling switches
- For interlock and non-contact switches
- For light curtains and safety sensors
- For safety mats
- For safety outputs
- For wiring in safety systems
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 1.4
Condition Monitoring
2 Days
Safety
SAF-COM101
Software
SAFETY RELAYS AND DEVICES MAINTENANCE
AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SAF-LOG101
GUARDLOGIX APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Safety
• Configure GuardLogix controller safety option
• Program a dual-channel input stop instruction and dual-channel input stop with
test and mute instruction
• Program a configurable redundant output instruction
• Program a five position mode selector instruction
• Program a safety mat instruction
Visualization
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a Logix Designer project for a GuardLogix system and maintain the system. Students will have the opportunity
to develop and practice these skills by: adding and configuring CompactBlock Guard I/O safety modules; creating and configuring a GuardLogix project; generating safety
signatures and lock/unlock a GuardLogix controller; and programming safety instructions.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to develop Logix Designer projects for GuardLogix controllers
• Create a new GuardLogix project using the Logix Designer application
PREREQUISITES
• Configure CompactBlock Guard I/O safety modules for a GuardLogix project using
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
the Logix Designer application
• Get CompactBlock Guard I/O point status information via explicit messaging using • Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
course (CCP143) and GuardLogix Fundamentals and Troubleshooting course
the Logix Designer application
(SAF-LOG103).
• Configure a GuardLogix controller to produce and consume safety data
•
General
experience with industrial controls
over EtherNet/IP
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
GUARDPLC 1600/1800 CONTROLLER SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING
CATALOG #
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
SAF-PLC103
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to effectively program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project for GuardPLC controller
communications with other devices, such as an OPC server and another controller. This course adds to students’ skill set by introducing new tasks, such as creating
user-defined function blocks, configuring a distributed I/O module, and configuring OPC and peer-to-peer communications. Students will learn how to configure user
accounts for restricting access to windows of an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and for performing certain tasks on a GuardPLC controller.
Drives
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create an RSLogix Guard PLUS function block routine
• Configure a GuardPLC distributed I/O module
• Create RSLogix Guard PLUS project user accounts
• Configure a GuardPLC OPC server
• Configure GuardPLC peer-to-peer communications
Condition Monitoring
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50
GuardPLC Documentation Reference
Guide CD
ABT-1753-DRG70
Software
54
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who:
• Need to program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
• Configure a GuardPLC controller to communicate with other devices
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
course (SAF-PLC101)
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Maintenance and
Troubleshooting course (SAF-PLC102)
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides a comprehensive overview of AADvance hardware, software, and troubleshooting. Upon successful completion of this course, students should be able to
understand how AADvance operates as a fail-safe or fault tolerant controller; understand the configuration limits of the system; examine process I/O requirements and select
the appropriate hardware; design and assemble a complete system; use the Workbench to configure and program the system, including communication with external devices;
develop functions, function blocks and programs using standard IEC 61131 programming languages; make hardware expansions to an existing system; and isolate faults to
the module level by interpreting automatic fault indications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for designing, building, programming, and
• Map a binding between controllers
• Recognize system architectures
troubleshooting an AADvance system
• Manage version source control
• Identify components
PREREQUISITES
• Protect a project
• Install and wire a system
• General knowledge of programmable logic controllers (PLCs)
• Import and export elements
• Develop a program
• Background in industrial electronic control principles and practices
• Archive and restore a project
• Simulate and test a project
• Configure OPC communication
• Download and monitor a project
• Troubleshoot a system
• Create and use functions and
Curriculum Note:
• Develop a project
function blocks
Do not take both PRST9063LD and PRST9064LD because they share similar
content. If your responsibilities are limited to maintaining and troubleshooting the
• Update a running project
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PRST9063LD
Safety
AADVANCE COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM TRAINING
CEUs 0.7
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
55
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information about potential safety hazards, safety precautions, personnel protection equipment, general emergency response, and the local
lockout/tag-out program.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Maintenance technicians
• List electrical shock effects
PREREQUISITES
• Describe general safety practices
There are no prerequisites for this course.
• Use locks and tags
• Work around energized equipment
• Explain the purpose of preventive maintenance
• Describe arc flash
• Explain multiple personnel safety requirements
• Use and maintain personal protective equipment (PPE) and electrical
safety equipment
• Follow good housekeeping
• Perform a controlled restoration of power
Motion Control
1 Day
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
SAF-001
Process Control
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
Visualization
AADvance system, take this course instead: AADvance Operation, Maintenance, &
Troubleshooting (PRST9064LD)
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
MECHANICAL SAFETY AND LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
SAF-003
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information potential safety hazards, safety precautions, personnel protection equipment, general emergency response, and the local
lockout/tag-out program.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical maintenance technicians
• List general safety practices
PREREQUISITES
• Use locks and tags
There are no prerequisites for this course.
• Maintain and using personal protective equipment (PPE)
Safety
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use fall protection
Interpret material data safety sheets (MSDS)
Read chemical labeling
Perform hot work
Follow fire prevention guidelines
Use and maintaining fire extinguishers
Visualization
ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR NON-ELECTRICAL PERSONNEL
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
SAF-004
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an overview for compliance with OSHA and NFPA 70E® electrical safety regulations including arc flash protection.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Facility non-electrical and non-technical personnel
• List applicable policies and regulations
PREREQUISITES
• Define a qualified person
There are no prerequisites for this course.
• Follow general safety precautions
• Define the voltage level convention
• Follow tool and equipment safety guidelines
• Control hazardous energy
• Work on energized equipment (OSHA requirements)
• Follow arc flash protection
• Use and care for personal protective equipment
• Avoid specific electrical hazards
Condition Monitoring
Software
56
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SAF-SFT2014A
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SAF-SFT2014C
CEUs 2.8
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
57
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course builds on a student’s working knowledge of the National Electric Code and provides a detailed review of the 2014 NEC changes.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Review of the NFPA 70 NEC for 2014 will follow the following agenda:
New electricians and other individuals working with electrical equipment or enrolled
- General Requirements Art. 90 - 240
in an up-grader or apprentice program
- Grounding Vs. Bonding Art. 250
PREREQUISITES
- Wiring Methods Art. 300 - 392
Familiarity with fundamentals of electricity
- Equipment for General Use Art. 400 – 450
- Special Occupancies Art. 500 - 590
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
- Special Equipment Art. 600 – 702
2014 NEC Paperback edition
- Limited Energy and Communication Systems Art. 725 - 820
Motion Control
4 Days
Drives
2014 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC):
COMPREHENSIVE AWARENESS
Visualization
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course builds on a student’s working knowledge of the National Electrical Code and provides a detailed review of the 2014 NEC changes.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to identify changes in the
Electricians and other individuals working with electrical equipment or enrolled in
following chapters of the 2014 National Electrical Code:
an up-grader or apprentice program
- Chapter 1 – Article 100
PREREQUISITES
- Chapter 2 – Article 200
• Familiarity with fundamentals of electricity
- Chapter 3 – Article 300
• A working knowledge of NEC
- Chapter 4 – Article 400
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
- Chapter 5 – Article 500
- Chapter 6 – Article 600
2014 NEC Paperback edition
- Chapter 7 – Article 700
- Chapter 8 – Article 800
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
2014 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE® (NEC®):
UPDATE AWARENESS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FUNCTIONAL SAFETY FOR MACHINERY INTRODUCTION
SAF-TUV1
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This is an introduction to the Rockwell Automation/TÜV Rheinland certification course in functional safety for machinery. This course will define the design and proof
requirements for functional safety of machines, according to current standards and guidelines. Practical examples will demonstrate possible techniques for machine guarding
and protection. This course will introduce organizational measures that can be instituted to protect employees and equipment. The organizational measures include quality
assurance techniques and documentation for life-cycle design and validation. After completing this course, students should understand how safety devices and components
are assembled and applied to reduce hazards from machinery so the necessary safety for people and the environment is achieved.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Application engineers, system integrators, developers, safety specialists, and
topics and tasks:
authorized experts in machinery
• Understand the Functional Safety for Machinery Certification (TÜV Rheinland)
PREREQUISITES
• Define:
It is highly recommended that training participants have professional experience
- European and OSHA guidelines and requirements
in the field of Functional Safety or have attended another introduction course on
- Risk analysis and processes (ISO 12100:2010)
Functional Safety
- ISO 13894-1, ISO 13849-1/2, and IEC 62061
- New standards regarding safety of machinery
- Basic electrical safety principles (IEC 60204-1)
• Identify:
- Safety devices
- Safety functions of machines
- Circuits, schematics, and examples
• Perform ISO 13849/IEC 62061 calculations
FUNCTIONAL SAFETY FOR MACHINERY ENGINEER CERTIFICATION
(TÜV RHEINLAND)
SAF-TUV2 (Exam: SAF-TUVT)
4 Days*
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn how current standards dictate the design and proof of functional safety for machines. The participant will learn how safety devices
and components are assembled and applied to reduce hazards from machinery so the necessary safety for people and environment is achieved. Practical examples will
demonstrate possibilities regarding machine protection. In addition to the technical requirements, students will learn about organizational measures, quality assurance
techniques, and documentation for lifecycle design and validation. After completing this course, students should understand and be able to use IEC 60204-1, IEC 62061,
ISO 12100, ISO 13849-1, -2, and other relevant machine functional safety standards. The exam is optional for students who would like to attend the training, but do not
want certification.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Application engineers, system integrators, developers, safety specialists and
topics and tasks:
authorized experts in machinery
• Understand the Functional Safety for Machinery Engineer Certification
PREREQUISITES
(TÜV Rheinland)
• Recommended completion of the Functional Safety for Machinery Introduction
• Define:
course (SAF-TUV1), but not mandatory
- Legal guidelines and standards
• A completed and approved Functional Safety Technician eligibility form from TÜV
- Risk analysis and processes (ISO 12100:2010)
Rheinland is required for admittance to the exam
- Basic electrical safety principles (IEC 60204-1)
EXAM AND ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR TÜV FUNCTIONAL SAFETY ENGINEER
- New standards regarding safety of machinery
The following requirements must be met in order to receive the TÜV Functional
- ISO 13849-1, ISO 13849-2, and IEC 62061
Safety Engineer certificate:
• Identify:
• A completed and approved eligibility form from TÜV Rheinland proving:
- Safety devices
- Minimum of 3-5 years experience in the field of Functional Safety
- Safety functions of machines
- University engineering degree (master’s or bachelor’s) or equivalent engineer
- Circuits, schematics, and examples
level responsibilities and status certified by employer
• Perform ISO 13849/IEC 62061 calculations
• Completion of eligibility form from Rockwell Automation/TÜV Rheinland
*additional 0.5 days for exam
• A passing grade of 70% or higher on Functional Safety for Machinery Engineer
Certification (TÜV Rheinland) exam (SAF-TUVT)
58
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SAF-SFT10615
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
The purpose of this course is to provide the student with an overall understanding of the current requirements of NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
A complete review of the standard will be provided, along with a review of the tables used to determine the limited and restricted approach boundaries and tables and
calculation methods used to determine the arc flash boundary and for determining proper personal protective equipment (PPE).
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals that require access to or will be exposed to the work area designated by
• Electrical safety terminology
• OSHA final rule
the arc flash or limited approach boundaries
- Arc flash boundary and arc rating
• Arc flash hazards, statistics, and
PREREQUISITES
- Electrically safe work condition
considerations
• Familiarity with basic electricity
- Incident energy
• Protecting the electrical worker
• Proficiency in student’s respective classification
- Overcurrent protective devices
- Safety-related work practices
OR
- Shock protection (limited and
- Electrical safety program
• Enrolled in an up-grader or apprentice program
restricted approach) boundaries
- OSHA general duty clause
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
- Qualified person
- OSHA 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S
NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®, 2015 Edition
• Arc flash calculations overview
requirements
(NFPA 70E 2015)
- NFPA 70E 2015 requirements
- PPE selection per Article 130 tables
- 2014 NEC Article 110.16 Arc Flash
- Arc flash boundary calculation
Hazard Warning
- Introduction to PPE selection based
on incident energy calculations
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
59
Visualization
Safety
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
NFPA 70E 2015 – ARC FLASH AWARENESS
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn how the current standards dictate the selection, assembly, installation, validation, and maintenance of safety devices and components to
reduce hazards from machinery and ensure the safety of people and the environment. Practical examples will demonstrate possibilities regarding machine protection. This
training will cover safety topics, such as: redundancy, testing, distance calculations, assigning required level of risk reduction as PL, monitoring moveable guard positions, and
fault avoidance for relevant life cycle phases. Students who want Functional Safety for Machinery Technician Certification (TÜV Rheinland) must register for and pass the exam
(SAF-TUVT3). The exam is optional for students who would like to attend the training, but do not want certification.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Machine technicians, application engineers, safety specialists and those responsible
• Understand the Functional Safety Technician certification (TÜV Rheinland)
for repairing and maintaining machine safety
• Define:
PREREQUISITES
- Legal guidelines and standards
• Basic working knowledge of electrical and electronic control functions for
- Risk analysis and processes (ISO 12100:2010)
machinery is recommended
- Basic electrical safety principles (IEC 60204-1)
• Awareness of basic safety principles is recommended
- Basic safety principles
• A completed and approved Functional Safety Technician eligibility form from
- Machine guarding principles
TÜV Rheinland is required for admittance to the exam
- New standards regarding safety of machinery
EXAM AND ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR TÜV FUNCTIONAL SAFETY TECHNICIAN
• Identify:
The following requirements must be met in order to receive the TÜV Functional
- Safety functions
Safety Technician certificate:
- Safety devices
• A completed and approved eligibility form from TÜV Rheinland proving:
- Circuits, schematics, and examples
- Minimum of 1-2 years of experience working on industrial machinery
• Evaluate machine safety using a practical example
- Experience in machinery maintenance and operation, verified by employer
• Proof of eligibility form (see Prerequisites)
• Successful completion of Functional Safety for Machinery Technician Certification
**additional 60 min. for exam
(TÜV Rheinland) (SAF-TUV3)
• A passing grade of 70% or higher on Functional Safety for Machinery Technician
Certification Exam (TÜV Rheinland) (SAF-TUVT3)
Drives
CEUs 3.2
Process Control
2.5 Days**
Condition Monitoring
SAF-TUV3 (Exam: SAF-TUVT3)
Software
FUNCTIONAL SAFETY FOR MACHINERY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION
(TÜV RHEINLAND)
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
NFPA 70E 2015 – ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND
ARC FLASH COMPLIANCE
SAF-SFT11215
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
The purpose of this course is to provide the student with an in-depth understanding of the current requirements of NFPA 70E 2015. A complete presentation of the standard
will be provided, along with the examples and exercises covering the tables and calculation methods used in the standard for determining approach boundaries and selecting
proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
• Other topics:
- Arc flash, limited approach, and
• Arc flash ruling
- Typical third-party vendor arc
- Maintenance
restricted approach boundary
• Arc flash hazards
flash study
- Mitigation
• Energized electrical work permit
- Facts, statistics, and requirements
- Overcurrent protective devices
- A turnkey solution
• PPE selection
- Thermal intensity, pressure,
- Trip coordination
- Arc flash study benefits
- Using Article 130 tables
auditory, projectile and inhalation
- Based on incident energy
• Protecting the electrical worker
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
calculations
- Company/electrical safety
Individuals who:
• Arc flash calculations (NFPA 70E)
programs and enforcement
• Are responsible for ensuring compliance with, developing training on,
- Short-circuit current
- OSHA general industry regulations
or supervising employees who are required to work in accordance with
- Power in the arc
- OSHA 29 CFR 1910.132,
NFPA 70E 2015
- Arc flash boundary (two methods)
CFR 1910.333, and CFR 1910.335
• Will be exposed to work areas designated by the approach boundaries
- Arc in open air incident energy
• Applicable standards
PREREQUISITES
- Arc in a cubic box incident energy
- Electrically safe work conditions
• Familiarity with basic electricity
- Calculation limitations
- Qualified person
• Proficiency in student’s respective classification
- Intro to IEEE 1584 methodology
- 2014 NEC Article 110.16 Flash
OR
- IEEE 1584 Arcing Current
Protection Labeling
• Enrolled in an upgrader or apprentice program
- IEEE 1584 Incident Energy
- NFPA 70E 2015 labeling
- IEEE 1584 Curable Burn Distance
• Approach boundary terms
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Motion Control
NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®, 2015 Edition
MACHINE FUNCTIONAL SAFETY AND ISO 13849
SYSTEM DESIGN: RISK ASSESSMENT
VC-MFSISO-01
Virtual
Classroom
120 Min. Session
CEUs 0.2
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course teaches students to use a structured risk assessment process based on ISO 13849. Students will learn how to identify the hazards of a machine, estimate the level
of risk, and choose risk reduction techniques. During the exercises, students will make their decisions using the terms and rating system from ISO 13849. As students work
through the process, they will build documentation that they can use throughout the lifecycle of their machines.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Design engineers, maintenance managers, or people in health and safety roles
• Define the scope of the risk assessment
PREREQUISITES
• Identify the hazards
Experience with the design, development, maintenance, or supervision of
• Determine the risk level of each hazard
industrial automation systems is required
• Identify potential risk reduction techniques
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• Choose risk reduction techniques
• Write a risk assessment report
A computer and phone are required
Software
60
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Virtual
Classroom
(4) 90 Min. Sessions
CEUs 0.15 each
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students to assess arc flash hazards and act to mitigate them by selecting appropriate PPE and determining shock protection and arc flash boundaries.
Students will learn how to use NFPA 70E 2015 and approach boundary calculation methods to determine approach boundaries. This course provides some of the key
requirements necessary to become a “qualified” person as defined in OSHA 1910.269, 332, 333, and NFPA 70E, such as: determining approach distances; being capable of
using special precautionary techniques, PPE, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools; receiving safety training to recognize and avoid hazards.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals required to work in accordance with NFPA 70E or who will be exposed to
• Determine appropriate PPE
work areas designated by an arc flash boundary
• Determine thermal and shock boundaries
PREREQUISITES
• Perform bolted fault arc flash calculations
• Experience distinguishing exposed live parts from other parts of
• Perform arc fault calculations
electrical equipment
•
Determining
nominal system voltage of exposed live parts
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• Skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical
• A computer and phone
equipment and installations
• A calculator must be available for Session 2
• A scientific calculator must be available for Session 3 and Session 4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
VC-SFT10615
Safety
NFPA 70E 2015 –
ARC FLASH AWARENESS
CA-SAF-SFT100
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
61
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides information potential safety hazards, safety precautions, personnel protection equipment, and safe electrical practices.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals that require access to, or will be exposed to the work area designated by
• NFPA 70E/CSA Z462 workplace electrical safety standards
the flash protection boundary
• Canadian regulations
PREREQUISITES
• Shock, arc flash, arc blast hazards
There are no prerequisites for this course.
• Electrocution
• Using the appropriate tools
• Qualified verses unqualified
• Approach boundaries
• Appropriate safety related work practices
• Lock-out tag-out of electrical devices
• Personal protection equipment (PPE)
• Arc resistant clothing required by NFPA 70E and CSA Z462
• Protective device coordination (fuses, breakers, grounding, GFI, etc.)
Motion Control
CEUs 0.4
Drives
0.5 Days
Process Control
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND ARC FLASH AWARENESS
Visualization
Students can use the calculator found in Microsoft Windows>Programs>Accessories
for all sessions.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Deploy Expert Training
Without Travel Expenses
Instructor-Led and Web-Delivered Virtual Classes
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Number
For Enrollment
Safety
Visualization
Rockwell Automation offers interactive Virtual
Classroom training, which are short, one or
two-hour training sessions conducted by a
knowledgeable instructor via the Internet.
Motion Control
Drives
What is it?
• Travel-free alternative to traditional
classroom courses
• “Blended” learning mode, combining
instructor presentations, demonstrations,
exercises, check knowledge and white
board interactivity
• Dynamic question and answer sessions
• Desktop sharing between instructor
and student
• Global solution for customer
participants worldwide
• Modular – Allowing the student to
concentrate on the content they need
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
What it is not?
• Not a conference call, webinar, or webcast
• Not a recorded substitute for traditional
classroom training
• Not a click-through PowerPoint® presentation
For more information
Contact your local authorized Allen-Bradley
distributor, Rockwell Automation sales office,
or call 440-646-3434 (option 7).
Software
62
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Course Name
Description
VC-LLB
Ladder Logic Basics
Available in Spanish
(VC-LLB-ES)
Session 1: 120 min.
Session 2: 120 min.
Session 3: 120 min.
Session 4: 120 min.
Session 5: 120 min.
Bundled with a
CompactLogix starter
workstation
VC-PIO
POINT I/O
Implementation
Session 1: 120 min.
VC-SFT10615
NFPA 70E 2015 - Arc
Flash Awareness
Session 1: 90 min.
Session 2: 90 min.
Session 3: 90 min.
Session 4: 90 min.
VC-MFSISO-01
Machine Functional
Safety & ISO 13849
System Design: Risk
Assessment
Session 1: 120 min.
VC-FTVIEW-01
FactoryTalk ViewPoint
Implementation
Available in Spanish
(VC-FTVIEW-01-ES)
Session 1: 90 min.
VC-CCN300B
Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP
Session 1: 120 min.
Session 2: 120 min.
Session 3: 120 min.
VC-MLDO
Machine-Level Design
Optimization: Drive
and Motor Selection &
Networks, Controller,
and I/O Selection
Session 1: 90 min.
Session 2: 120 min.
VC-PF755H-01
PowerFlex 755 Floor
Mounted Drives: PreInstallation Planning
Session 1: 120 min.
VC-M850
Micro850 Installation,
Wiring, and
Troubleshooting
Session 1: 120 min.
Session 2: 120 min.
Session 3: 120 min.
Session 4: 120 min.
Session 5: 120 min.
Bundled with an
unassembled Micro850
workstation
VC-PF523P
PowerFlex 523/525
Drives with PowerFlex
525 Drive Kit:
Communications and
Programming
Session 1: 90 min.
Session 2: 90 min.
Bundled with a
PowerFlex 525 drive kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
Networks
Networks Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
Stratix 5700 Switch
Configuration for an
EtherNet/IP Network
CCP179 • 2 Days
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications
on DeviceNet
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications
on ControlNet
CCA162 • 1 Day
CCA164 • 2 Days
Introduction to
Automation
CCP800 • 3 Days
DeviceNet
and RSNetWorx
Configuration
and Troubleshooting
ControlNet
and RSNetWorx
Configuration
and Troubleshooting
CCP164 • 3 Days
CCP173 • 3 Days
SStudio
t d 5000 Logix Designer
Level 4: Kinetix 6500
(CIP) Programming
CCN144 • 4 Days
Introduction to
the Integrated
Architecture System
CIA101 • 2 Days
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
CCPS65• 1 Day
EtherNet/IP
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
NetLinx System
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP180 • 1 Day
CCP177 • 4 Days
Combination of DeviceNet, ControlNet
and EtherNet/IP Maintenance Topics
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
64
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Core Requirement for
Certificate Program
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
P
PowerFlex
700 Vector
Control Communications
over EtherNet/IP
CCA165 • 1 Day
Data Highway/Ethernet
Peer-to-Peer
Communications
CCP310-LD • 4.5 Days
CENTERLINE MCC with
IntelliCENTER Software
Commissioning on an
EtherNet/IP Network
RSLinx Software
CCI108 • 3 Days
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Managing Industrial
Networks with Cisco
Networking Technologies
EtherNet/IP - Hardware
and IP Addressing
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
IMINS • 5 Days
Web-Based Training
Introduction
d i to AAutomation
i
iBook Available on iTunes
EtherNet/IP Communications
and Diagnostics
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
EtherNet/IP Bundle
Hardware
and IP Addressing
Communications
and Diagnostics
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Combination Program or Design and
Maintain or Troubleshoot Level Course
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Combination Understand and
Maintain or Troubleshoot Level Course
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
65
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
CCP800
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to you within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand:
• Identify:
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
Networks
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM
CIA101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about and
interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While
performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products function together
within Integrated Architecture.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Identify components of the integrated architecture system
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the Integrated
• Program a basic Logix Designer project for an integrated system
Architecture System
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
PREREQUISITES
• Identify programming languages in an integrated system
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understand Logix5000 multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Condition Monitoring
Software
66
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
This blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure and
manage various communication options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students will learn how
to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) communications and serial driver in
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5
RSLinx software
software
• Navigate RSLinx software
PREREQUISITES
• Download and upload a project
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Go online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 processor
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Change the processor operating mode
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
or a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
Networks
CCP177 *
Curriculum Note:
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics covered in courses CCP164, CCP173, and CCP180.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
*Combination of DeviceNet, ControlNet, and EtherNet maintenance topics
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
67
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to provide students with the necessary skills to effectively maintain and troubleshoot DeviceNet™, ControlNet™, and EtherNet/IP™ hardware and
software. Students will build their skills by using troubleshooting best practices and network troubleshooting tools; gain experience troubleshooting DeviceNet, ControlNet,
and EtherNet/IP networks by maintaining connectivity to the networks; and learn a variety of software packages and hardware indicators to ensure that the Logix5000
controllers and devices on the networks maintain communications to sustain optimal performance.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting existing
• Identify NetLinx networks and hardware components of an EtherNet/IP system
DeviceNet, ControlNet, and EtherNet/IP networks
• Connect a computer to a Logix5000 system over an EtherNet/IP network
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Troubleshoot EtherNet/IP network media components
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ20
• Monitor/troubleshoot EtherNet/IP media components
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ50
• Identify ControlNet media components/signal measuring equipment
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N200-DRG70
• Connect to a ControlNet network using RSLinx classic software
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ20
• Troubleshoot a scheduled ControlNet data connection for a ControlLogix controller
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ50
• Troubleshoot a ControlNet network using RSNetWorx™ for ControlNet software
• Identify DeviceNet network components
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N100-DRG70
• Commission nodes on, and troubleshoot, a DeviceNet network
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Troubleshoot a DeviceNet network using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix 5000
PREREQUISITES
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Logix
5000
Documentation
Reference
Guide
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
Motion Control
CEUs 2.8
Process Control
4 Days
Condition Monitoring
NETLINX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1747-DRG70
Software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
1 Day
Safety
CCPS65
SLC 500 AND PLC-5 COMMUNICATIONS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
DEVICENET AND RSNETWORX
CONFIGURATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCP164
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course prepares students to successfully design and configure an efficient DeviceNet network using components for the ControlLogix platform. To meet this objective,
students begin by designing a cable system, and then configure a driver, a 1756-DNB scanner module, and network devices. This course prepares students to troubleshoot a
malfunctioning DeviceNet network and return it to normal operation with minimum downtime. Students will verify proper network installation and perform both hardware
and software-based tasks used to isolate DeviceNet problems, as well as practice the tasks necessary to add and replace network devices.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are:
• Identify DeviceNet network components and design a DeviceNet cable system
• Responsible for designing and configuring a new DeviceNet network
• Create a DeviceNet network configuration
• Responsible for isolating and correcting problems or performing basic
• Commission nodes on a DeviceNet network
maintenance on a DeviceNet network
• Configure a 1756-DNB DeviceNet scanner module
PREREQUISITES
• Map inputs and outputs on a DeviceNet network
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
• Configure Automatic Device Recovery (ADR) on a DeviceNet network
course (CCP146)
• Communicate on a DeviceNet network using explicit messaging
OR
• Troubleshoot a DeviceNet network using:
• Knowledge of common ControlLogix terminology and the ability to program and
- RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
interpret basic ladder logic instructions in RSLogix 5000 software
- RSLogix 5000 software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- DeviceNet and ControlLogix hardware indicators
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ20
• Troubleshoot duplicate node addresses on a DeviceNet network
• Restore a malfunctioning DeviceNet network to normal operation
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ50
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N100-DRG70
Motion Control
CONTROLNET AND RSNETWORX
CONFIGURATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCP173
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to efficiently design and configure a ControlNet network. Students will gain these skills from the ground up, practicing
each step in the design and configure process from choosing the correct cable to configuring the connections that will transmit data from ControlLogix (Logix5000) controllers
and other devices across that cable. This course provides students with the skills needed to safely and efficiently return a malfunctioning network to normal operation. The
instructor will introduce a logical process for troubleshooting ControlNet and RSNetWorx components and demonstrate how to identify problems with communications cards,
cabling, and other network hardware.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are:
• Design and troubleshoot a ControlNet media system
• Responsible for designing/configuring a new ControlNet &RSNetWorx network
• Go online to a ControlNet network
• Managing/modifying an existing ControlNet & RSNetWorx network
• Enter scheduled ControlNet I/O data connections for Logix5000 controllers
PREREQUISITES
• Enter ControlNet messages for Logix5000 controllers
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Isolate faulty ControlNet and RSNetWorx media using signal measurement
• Experience with Windows-based programming software (Studio 5000
equipment
Logix Designer)
• Isolate ControlNet and RSNetWorx network malfunctions using LEDs and
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
mnemonic displays
• Identify a ControlNet and RSNetWorx network malfunction using RSLinx software
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ50
• Troubleshoot a ControlNet and RSNetWorx network using RSNetWorx for
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ20
ControlNet software
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N200-DRG70
Software
68
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CCP310-LD
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
Safety
Networks
CCA162
CEUs 0.7
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
CATALOG #
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-20B-DRG70
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
69
Software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to communicate
on an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, students will learn how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, such as browsing the
network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. The students will learn scanner module configuration and input and output
mapping. Students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700 vector control drive and RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet software.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 vector control drives
• Connect a drive to a DeviceNet network
to communicate on a DeviceNet network
• Commission a PowerFlex 700 node on a DeviceNet network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure drive and adapter parameters using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files for the PowerFlex 700 vector control drive
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
• Configure a 1756-DNB module to communicate with a PowerFlex 700 vector
or equivalent experience
control drive using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Completion of the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup
• Map PowerFlex 700 vector control drive inputs and outputs to a 1756-DNB
course (CCA161) is recommended but not required
module using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
Motion Control
1 Day
Drives
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS ON DEVICENET
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an overall systems approach of how Data Highway Plus (DH+) and Ethernet networks relate to both programmable controllers and
computers. General network architectures are discussed along with system interconnections, cabling, and installation. Students will be introduced to programming for
controllers relative to the DH+ and EtherNet networks. Students will learn about the structure of DH+ and EtherNet communication protocols.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals who:
• DH+ and Ethernet topologies
• Are responsible for designing, developing, or system programming
• Token passing protocol
programmable logic controllers
• Channel diagnostics
• Senior level maintenance personnel who will be involved in specifying,
• PLC-5 channel buffers
installing, programming, or planning PLC-5, SLC-500, or ControlLogix
• PC-PLC-5 communications
peer-to-peer communications over DH+ or Ethernet networks
• PLC-5-to-PLC-5 remote communications
PREREQUISITES
• Ethernet protocols
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• PLC-5, SLC-5/05, and ControlLogix CIP Ethernet messages
• Completion of the PLC-5 Programming course (CCP410)
• SLC-5/04 and ControlLogix DH+ messages
• Completion of the SLC-500 Programming course (CCPS41)
• Completion of the ControlLogix Project Development course (CCP143)
Process Control
DATA HIGHWAY/ETHERNET PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS ON CONTROLNET
CCA164
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully starting up a PowerFlex 700 vector control AC drive and
commissioning it on a ControlNet network. Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 vector control drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet
communications adapter and learn to configure a ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up PowerFlex 700
• Configure PowerFlex 700 vector control drive parameters using the LCD HIM,
vector control drives
DriveExplorer™ software, and DriveExecutive™ software
PREREQUISITES
• Upload and download PowerFlex 700 vector control drive data
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Window environment
• Start up a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Install and configure a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive ControlNet
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
communications adapter
or Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/
• Configure an offline ControlNet network
WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
• Enter scheduled ControlNet I/O data connections for Logix5000 controllers
• Enter ControlNet messages for Logix5000 controllers
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Control PowerFlex 700 vector control drive operation
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick
Reference Guide
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ50
Motion Control
ETHERNET/IP FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CCP180
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing fundamental knowledge of industrial communications over an EtherNet/IP network. Students will learn basic concepts and learn
how to use various tools to assign IP addresses to EtherNet/IP devices. This course prepares students to effectively resolve issues with communications between a controller
and the devices it is controlling. Students will troubleshoot EtherNet/IP network media and components, including a Stratix 5700™ switch. Students will have an opportunity
to monitor diagnostic information using web-based technologies and modify web server module data views and tag values.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting devices on an
• Assign an IP address to a computer
EtherNet/IP network
• Ping a module IP address
PREREQUISITES
• Assign IP addresses using:
Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix Systems
- RSLinx classic software and rotary switches
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
- BOOTP-DHCP server software
• Isolate an EtherNet/IP network problem
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Diagnose problems with EtherNet/IP modules and network components
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Monitor an EtherNet/IP network using web-enabled technologies
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
Software
70
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 1.4
CCN144
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
71
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to configure, test, tune, and program CIP motion axes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer programming environment.
Building upon the skills gained in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143), students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture
to a multi-axis CIP motion control system. Students will practice project planning and efficient programming skills necessary for translating a machine specification into
reliable ladder logic code. Because all Logix5000 products share common features and a common operating system, students will be able to apply the configuring and
programming motion control skills they learn in this course to any of the Logix5000 controllers that are capable of motion control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
should attend this course. In addition, only students who are already familiar with
• Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project for a CIP motion application
Logix5000 systems and general motion control
• Add drives and configure CIP motion axes
• Test CIP motion hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Autotune CIP motion axes
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Plan a motion project
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
• Create user-defined data types, axis-level program shell, and axis-level tags
knowledge of drives, feedback devices, and servo motion systems
• Program the:
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
- Axis-level dispatch and power up routines
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
- Axis-level command routine
- Axis-level waiting routine
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Aborting, clearing, stopping, resetting, and starting routine
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
• Replicate the axis program
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
• Replicate an application-level program and the execute routines
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Add a virtual axis
• Program electronic gearing and camming
Motion Control
CEUs 2.8
Process Control
4 Days
Condition Monitoring
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
KINETIX 6500 (CIP) PROGRAMMING
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in configuring a Stratix 5700 switch for industrial communications over an EtherNet/IP network. Students will learn how to use the Device
Manager Web Interface, a graphical device management tool, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer software to configure and monitor the switch. Students will learn to effectively
secure and limit access to the switch. This course covers one-to-one IP address translation (referred to as Network Address Translation) for segmenting
machine-level network devices from the plant network. Students will have an opportunity to run diagnostic tests to help resolve system and port issues on the switch
as well as perform common functions such as resetting the switch.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for configuring a Stratix 5700 switch for an
• Configure:
EtherNet/IP network
- Stratix 5700 switch settings
PREREQUISITES
- DHCP persistence
Completion of the EtherNet/IP™ Fundamentals and Troubleshooting course (CCP180)
- Network address translation
or equivalent experience
- Security and traffic monitoring parameters
• Monitor Stratix 5700 switch status and performance
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Troubleshoot the Stratix 5700 switch
EtherNet/IP
Procedures
Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Update the Stratix 5700 switch firmware
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
• Manage the Stratix 5700 switch using Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
• Create and assign VLANs
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
2 Days
Safety
CCP179
Software
STRATIX 5700 SWITCH CONFIGURATION
FOR AN ETHERNET/IP™ NETWORK
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS OVER ETHERNET/IP
CCA165
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, given a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive that has been successfully started up and configured, students should be able to add their drive to
an EtherNet/IP network that includes Logix5000 controllers or PanelView Plus terminals running FactoryTalk View ME software. Throughout the course, students will have
the chance to use a variety of hardware and software tools, including: A3 LCD HIM; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and drive configuration software (DriveExecutive,
Connected Components Workbench). After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 700 vector control
drive in tandem with a CompactLogix controller and/or PanelView Plus terminal.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for commissioning PowerFlex 700 vector control drives on an
• Add a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project
EtherNet/IP network
• Import PowerFlex 700 vector control drive control code into a Studio 5000 Logix
PREREQUISITES
Designer project
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Create new PowerFlex 700 vector control drive control code in a Studio 5000 Logix
• Completion of the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup course
Designer project
(CCA161) or equivalent experience
• Synchronize data and test PowerFlex 700 vector control drive operating modes
•
Knowledge
of Logix5000 system fundamentals and basic programming skills
• Configure PowerFlex 700 vector control drive peer-to-peer communications
through one of the following methods:
- Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Programming course (CCP151)
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
- Completion of available RSLogix 5000/Studio 5000 software computer-based
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
and/or web-based training
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
Equivalent
on-the-job experience
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
CENTERLINE MCC WITH INTELLICENTER® SOFTWARE
COMMISSIONING ON AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK
CCI108
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, given a newly installed CENTERLINE MCC with IntelliCENTER software, students should be able to produce an operational motor control system
over an EtherNet/IP network. Throughout the course, students will work with a number of hardware and software products, including IntelliCENTER software; E300™ and
E3 Plus™ electronic overload relays; PowerFlex 525 and PowerFlex 40 variable speed drives; Stratix 5700 industrial Ethernet switches; Logix5000 controllers and the Studio
5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View software. Students will be introduced to a variety of tools they can use to ensure proper functioning of a motor control
system. This course also shows how CENTERLINE MCCs interact with other parts of a control system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: System engineers and/or other individuals responsible for starting the operation of a
• Verify connections between CENTERLINE MCC sections
CENTERLINE motor control center
• Implement an EtherNet/IP network topology for an MCC
PREREQUISITES
• Configure:
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical and industrial
- Stratix 5700 EtherNet/IP switch settings
safety (including PPE requirements and safe practices)
- IntelliCENTER software preferences
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
- E300 and E3 Plus electronic overload relays
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
- PowerFlex 525 and PowerFlex 40 drive parameters
• Install IntelliCENTER software and data disks
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Modify CENTERLINE MCC lineup properties using IntelliCENTER software
IntelliCENTER
Software
Procedures
Guide
ABT-MCC-TSJ50
• Add MCC components to a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
CENTERLINE MCC and IntelliCENTER Software
• Enable automatic device configuration for a PowerFlex 525 drive in a
Documentation Reference Guide
ABT-MCC-DRG70
CENTERLINE MCC
• Add IntelliCENTER ActiveX controls to a FactoryTalk View application
• Configure and view IntelliCENTER energy software data
• Add documentation to an IntelliCENTER software database
• Modify MCC component spare parts lists in IntelliCENTER software
• Manage IntelliCENTER software databases
72
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 3.5
COURSE PURPOSE
Managing Industrial Networks with Cisco® Networking Technologies (IMINS)Version 1.0 is a hands-on lab-based course, which helps students with the foundational skills
needed for the management and administration of networked industrial control systems. The IMINS course, developed in conjunction with Rockwell Automation, helps plant
administrators, control system engineers, and traditional network engineers understand networking technologies that are needed in today’s connected plants and enterprises.
This course also helps students prepare for the Cisco Industrial Networking Specialist Certification exam (exam ID 600-601) and qualify for the Cisco Industrial Networking
Specialist certification. The goal of this course is to enable students to achieve competency and skills to install, configure, maintain, and troubleshoot industrial network
systems while helping to ensure network availability, reliability, and Internet security throughout your company.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: IT and operations technology (OT) professionals and control engineers who will be
• Describe Cisco Industrial Ethernet (IE) switches, Cisco Connected Grid™ switches
involved with the implementation, operation, and support of networked industrial
and routers, and Rockwell Automation Stratix™ switches
products and solutions for the manufacturing, process control, and oil and gas
• Interpret designs and drawings, recognize industrial topologies, and access
industries
reference materials
PREREQUISITES
• Install industrial network components
The knowledge and skills that you must have before attending this course include
• Deploy industrial network components
a college degree or non-degreed qualified technician with 2-3 years experience.
• Perform basic maintenance tasks
Also, it is recommended you take the following Cisco Electronic Learning and
• Troubleshoot network and control issues
Training (ELT) courses to achieve a basic understanding of networking and industrial
protocols:
• Networking Fundamentals for Industrial Control Systems (INICS)
• Industrial Control Systems Fundamentals for Network Engineers (ICINS)
Web-Based Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
5 Days
Safety
IMINS
Networks
MANAGING INDUSTRIAL NETWORKS WITH CISCO
NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES
Motion Control
Try it for Free!
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
73
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
Sign up for a free five-day trial of our web-based training and visit
Rockwell Automation University Online! Go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/self-paced
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Instructor-Led Training
Bring Expert Instructors to Your Location with
Rockwell Automation On-Site Training!
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Standard, on-site training courses
provide these benefits:
Safety
Networks
Networks
Training cost can quickly rise when one or more
individuals are sent to a remote location to attend a
training course. It is often tempting to allow employees
to learn through trial and error, but this is also a waste
of time and money. A simple solution to such a
logistical problem is the Rockwell Automation on-site
training services.
Motion Control
On-site training can work in a typical classroom
environment or one-on-one on the plant floor.
Certain factors will dictate whether classroom or
individual training is best, such as the number of students,
current skill levels, and desired skill levels.
Drives
You Choose . . .
Process Control
•
•
•
•
•
Flexibility
Shift Schedules
Training time frames
Days of the week
Class size
•
•
•
•
Content
Standard
Tailored
Custom
•
•
•
•
Location
Your Classroom
On the plant floor
Other site
Condition Monitoring
Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor, 440-646-3434 (option 7) to
initiate a discussion about our on-site training courses.
Software
74
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
• Flexible location – at your facility, in your
training center, on the plant floor
• Flexible schedule (any date, time, or shift)
that works best for your employees
• Free! pre- and posttests that measure your
students’ knowledge gain and demonstrate
the value of Rockwell Automation
training solutions
• Dedicated instructor emphasizing hands-on,
job related training relevant to your employees’
skill and knowledge needs, as well as
your requirements
• Adjustment of training content based on
students’ prerequisite and current skill levels
• Overall training cost-savings – eliminate
expenses associated with employees
traveling to off-site training
• Consistent instruction – employees that
attend the same training and learn the same
information from the same instructor
Personal Trainer
Our Rockwell Automation instructor can help
you create automation expertise with one-on-one
training. The Personal Trainer is an experienced
instructor and technical expert who develops
and implements an individualized training plan
for one to two individuals on-site at your facility.
The Personal Trainer can provide in-depth
technical experience or help mentor newly
hired employees.
Custom On-Site Training
Rockwell Automation provides custom on-site,
classroom training to meet your industry,
application, and system-level training needs.
This type of instructor-led instruction is available for companies who want to ensure their
employees are highly skilled in certain applications or systems, or within certain industries.
The training content focuses not only on the
Rockwell Automation technology but the
integration of the technology in your specific
application and industry.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Visualization/HMI
Visualization/HMI
Visualization/HMI Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus
Programming
CCV204 • 4 Days
Microsoft VBA
Configuration with
FactoryTalk View SE
Applications
Introduction to
Automation
VBAFTVSE • 4 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Programming
FactoryTalk View SE
Architecture
CCV207 • 4.5 Days
CCV205-LD • 2 Days
RSView32
Project
Development
PanelView 300/550/
600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder32
Application Development
CCV201 • 4.5 Days
CCP196 • 2 Days
CCP800 • 3 Days
Introduction to
the Integrated
Architecture System
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
CIA101 • 2 Days
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCV209 • 2 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCV206-LD • 2 Days
RSView32
Project Maintenance
CCP200 • 4 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
76
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
Also
Available
in Spanish
FactoryTalk
ViewPoint
Implementation
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Applications and Displays
VC-FTVIEW-01
90-min. Session
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Drawing Objects
SI: FactoryTalk View SE
Configuration
SI101 • 3 Days
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Introduction
d i to AAutomation
i
iBook Available on iTunes
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Interactive Objects
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
OEM: ControlLogix,
FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000 and
PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
OEM100 • 5 Days
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition - Bundle
Applications and Displays
Drawing Objects
Interactive Objects
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Virtual Classroom
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
77
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
CCP800
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to you within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand
• Identify
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM
CIA101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Visualization/HMI
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about and
interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While
performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products function together
within Integrated Architecture.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Identify components of the integrated architecture system
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the Integrated
• Program a basic Logix Designer project for an integrated system
Architecture System
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
PREREQUISITES
• Identify programming languages in an integrated system
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understand Logix5000 multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Condition Monitoring
Software
78
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on PanelView Plus terminals.
This course provides opportunities to work with both the hardware and software. Students will gain the hands-on skills required to prepare a PanelView Plus terminal
for operation. Students will work with FactoryTalk View ME software and RSLinx Enterprise software and will practice downloading FactoryTalk View ME applications to a
PanelView Plus terminal.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain FactoryTalk ME applications and troubleshoot
• Replace components on a PanelView Plus terminal
PanelView Plus terminals
• Set options on a PanelView Plus terminal
PREREQUISITES
• Manage runtime files on a PanelView Plus terminal
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Manage development files using the application manager
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Modify RSLinx Enterprise communications in a FactoryTalk View ME application
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or basic experience with ControlLogix tags
• Download and upload FactoryTalk View ME runtime files
and architecture
• Troubleshoot a PanelView Plus terminal
• Create tags and test data in a FactoryTalk View ME application
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Modify graphic displays in a FactoryTalk View ME application
FactoryTalk
View
ME
and
PanelView
Plus
• View and print FactoryTalk View ME components using the
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
application documenter
CCV206-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Visualization/HMI
FACTORYTALK VIEW SE MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
2 Days
Safety
CCV209
Networks
FACTORYTALK VIEW ME AND PANELVIEW PLUS
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
79
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills required to diagnose common problems on a FactoryTalk View SE system. Students will practice operating and
troubleshooting the system through hands-on exercises using FactoryTalk View SE software. In the class, students will practice troubleshooting methods such as alarming,
diagnostics logging, data logging, and trending. Students will learn how to configure communications with a processor and the functions of redundancy.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who maintain FactoryTalk View SE projects
• Understand FactoryTalk View SE software
PREREQUISITES
• Establish and maintain communications
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Monitor and interact with alarms
• Utilize diagnostics/data logging and trending
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Configure redundancy
FactoryTalk
View
SE
Procedures
Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
• Development and operating tips
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSVIEW32 PROJECT MAINTENANCE
CCP200
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to provide students with the skills needed to maintain and modify an RSView32 human-machine interface (HMI) automation project used to control
and monitor an operation. Students will use RSView32 software to practice the tasks associated with maintaining an existing RSView32 project by modifying functionality
and features. Students will demonstrate the proper operation of the project by interacting with a computer and a Logix5000 controller, PLC-5 processor, or SLC 500 processor.
Students will learn how to track real-time plant activity to reduce maintenance costs and optimize productivity.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Configure direct driver, DDE, and OPC communications
• Need to maintain and modify an existing RSView32 project
• Modify the tag database and a tag monitor
• Need to control and monitor an operation using RSView32 software
• Create and modify graphic displays and objects
PREREQUISITES
• Configure and run activity log files
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure trends, security, and startup settings
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Create macros and symbols
or the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
• Configure and run alarms
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Create and modify key definition control
• Create, modify, and download recipe files
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Modify and run derived tag, parameter, and event files and data log models
RSView32 Procedures Guide
ABT-9301-TSJ50
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course CCV201.
OEM: CONTROLLOGIX, FACTORYTALK VIEW ME, KINETIX 6000
AND POWERFLEX 40 FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
OEM100
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Visualization/HMI
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot Studio 5000 applications that operate on a ControlLogix-based machine, FactoryTalk
View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on PanelView Plus terminals, Kinetix 6000 motion systems, and PowerFlex 40 drives. Students will have the opportunity to
develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used with ControlLogix hardware, PanelView Plus terminal, Kinetix 6000 systems, and PowerFlex
40 drives; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View ME application. Students will also learn to diagnose and troubleshoot problems with controller, I/O or
other hardware issues
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: OEMs who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix-based machine, but
• Tune a PID loop
• Assign an IP address to a computer
have little to no working experience with ControlLogix systems.
• Manage project files
• Connect a computer to a network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a trend chart
• Configure Ethernet/IP addresses
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Test a ladder diagram
• Download and go online
• Perform basic voltage and current checks
• Troubleshoot digital and analog
• Update firmware
• Read wiring diagrams
I/O modules
• Locate I/O tags and devices
• Modify application communications
• Locate and editing tag values
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Download runtime files
• Create and modifying project
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
• Configure display security, graphic
• Draft basic ladder logic
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
displays, and interactive controls
• Select ladder logic instructions
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
• Troubleshoot workstation problems
• Edit ladder logic online
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
• Interpret motion instructions
• Program timer, counter, math,
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
and indicators
compare, and move instructions
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Modify drive parameters
• Search for project components
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
• Force I/O and toggling bits
Curriculum Note:
• Configure produced and
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCP299, CCP151, and CCV204
consumed data
in an accelerated format. Do not take this course with the other three courses.
80
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with the skills necessary to develop FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on the
next-generation PanelView Plus terminals. During class, students will gain hands-on skills, like preparing a PanelView Plus terminal for operation, creating a new application
and run it on a terminal, creating/configuring/animating graphic objects on graphic displays, configuring security for granting/restricting access to certain graphic displays or
for rights to perform certain actions, and creating/configuring messages and alarms for alerting operators to changes in a process.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to create FactoryTalk View ME applications for use on a
• Configure a PanelView Plus terminal, RSLinx enterprise communications,
PanelView Plus terminal
FactoryTalk security, and display security
PREREQUISITES
• Create and customize a FactoryTalk View ME application
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create and modify tags and graphic objects
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Add and configure graphic display
Fundamentals course (CCP146)
• Create and manipulate graphic objects
OR
• Create and configure interactive controls, information messages, alarms,
• Basic experience with ControlLogix tags and architecture
and macros
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Create and manage FactoryTalk View ME runtime files
• Configure basic animation for FactoryTalk View ME objects, recipes with the
FactoryTalk ME and PanelView Plus
RecipePlus system, and language switching
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
• Create data logs and trends, tag placeholders, and parameter files
• Add global objects
• Insert faceplates
VC-FTVIEW-01
90 Minutes
CEUs 0.15
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to monitor their FactoryTalk View ME projects in a web browser. This course will show students how to create a new FactoryTalk View ME
web application and connect to an existing FactoryTalk View ME web application via Ethernet from a PanelView Plus.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to monitor installations from any remote location with
• Verify client requirements
Internet access, but without FactoryTalk View ME software
• Verify server requirements
PREREQUISITES
• Create a new ME web application
Experience using FactoryTalk View ME software and PanelView Plus programming
• Connect to an existing ME web application
is required. Specifically, students must know how to create .apa files and download
• Troubleshoot common integration problems
files to PanelView Plus terminals
Visualization/HMI
Virtual
Classroom
Drives
FACTORYTALK VIEWPOINT IMPLEMENTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
4 Days
Safety
CCV204
Networks
FACTORYTALK VIEW ME AND
PANELVIEW PLUS PROGRAMMING
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
81
Software
Condition Monitoring
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
A computer and phone
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FACTORYTALK VIEW SE PROGRAMMING
CCV207
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will aid students in developing FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) applications. All aspects of the FactoryTalk View SE software are presented, followed by interactive
hands-on lab assignments emphasizing application of the concepts in an industrial setting. Students will have the opportunity to create an application and build graphic
displays. Students will work with RSLinx Enterprise communications software and the FactoryTalk diagnostics system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to develop FactoryTalk View SE local (stand-alone) or network
• Configure RSLinx enterprise communications
(distributed) applications
• Configure OPC communications
PREREQUISITES
• Create a network FactoryTalk View SE application
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create graphic displays
• Build and animate an interactive graphic display
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Configure global objects
FactoryTalk
View
SE
Procedures
Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
• Configure HMI tag-based alarms and FactoryTalk alarms/events
• Create and configure a trend
• Create macros, symbols, and keys
• Create an HMI tag database
• Use tag placeholders and create a FactoryTalk View SE client
• Create and view a data log model
• Create a derived tag tile and an event file
• Optional: Add VBA display code
FACTORYTALK VIEW SE ARCHITECTURE
CCV205-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Visualization/HMI
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will allow students to successfully deploy a finished FactoryTalk View SE distributed application. Building on students’ knowledge of HMI (human-machine
interface) application development and their experience with operating these systems, this course covers: review of Windows domains and Windows 2003 security; Windows
networking basics; FactoryTalk View SE distributed application architecture guidelines; deployment of components for a distributed application; terminal server and remote
desktop connection configuration; and troubleshooting.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to move a distributed FactoryTalk View SE application from an
engineering environment to the plant floor
• Identify network/Windows considerations for a Distributed FactoryTalk
• View SE Application
PREREQUISITES
• Design a FactoryTalk View SE network (distributed) application
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Evaluate FactoryTalk View SE system design using the reference system
• Familiarity with Windows 2003 Server and Windows networking concepts
• Add terminal services to a FactoryTalk View SE network system
• Completion of the FactoryTalk View SE Programming course (CCV207)
• Implement FactoryTalk Security
OR
• Install FactoryTalk View SE software
•
Previous
experience working with FactoryTalk View SE software or similar
• Deploy a FactoryTalk View SE network application
HMI/SCADA
(Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) products
• Implement redundancy in a FactoryTalk View SE Network Application
• Use remote desktop connection and terminal services to view remote
• FactoryTalk View SE clients
Software
82
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn to develop and implement Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) procedures or subroutines within a FactoryTalk View SE project. The course
covers VBA concepts, an overview of the VBA language, FactoryTalk View SE software’s Object Model and the creation, modification and execution of VBA procedures from
within FactoryTalk View SE software. Students will learn the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel®, Word®, and Access Object Models. Interacting with these Object Models
from within their FactoryTalk View SE VBA procedures will allow students to create applications that perform such tasks as creating and printing Word documents or Excel
spreadsheets with charts, and reading and writing to Access® database files.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who wish to implement VBA procedures within their FactoryTalk View SE
• Configure VBA within an FactoryTalk View SE project
projects to meet application requirements
• Configure UserForms and events in FactoryTalk View SE VBA
PREREQUISITES
• Debug tools and error handling in VBA
• Familiarity with the Windows XP user interface and FactoryTalk View SE software
• Triggering a command on a client from an HMI server
• Familiarity with processors
• Access the FactoryTalk View SE object model from an external
automation controller
• Control Microsoft Excel, Word, and Access with VBA
• Configure OPC automation with VBA
• Configure trend object
CCV201
CEUs 3.2
Visualization/HMI
4.5 Days
Process Control
CATALOG #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
Condition Monitoring
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
RSView32 Procedures Guide
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to provide students with the skills needed to create an RSView32 human-machine interface (HMI) automation project used to control and monitor
an operation. Students will use RSView32 software to practice the tasks associated with creating an RSView32 project, including using Microsoft OLE, ActiveX, and DDE
technologies. Students will demonstrate the proper operation of the project by interacting with a computer and either a ControlLogix controller or software that simulates
ControlLogix or SLC hardware. Students will learn how to track real-time plant activity to reduce maintenance costs and optimize productivity.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Create RSView32 projects, derived tag & event files, ActiveX objects, and
• Need to create an RSView32 project to control
graphic displays
• Need to monitor an operation using RSView32 software
• Configure direct driver communications, OPC/DDE communications, trends &
PREREQUISITES
pens, and security
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create and monitor tags, alarms, and activities
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Configure and run data log models
or the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
• Add animation to graphic displays
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Create and run parameter files, macros, and symbols
This course is intended for programmers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course CCP200.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
83
Software
RSVIEW32 PROJECT DEVELOPMENT
• Create RAD server, client connections, key definition control, and OLE objects
• Enter and run VBA code
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
4 Days
Safety
VBAFTVSE
Networks
MICROSOFT VBA CONFIGURATION WITH
FACTORYTALK VIEW SE APPLICATIONS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PANELVIEW 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
AND PANELBUILDER®32 APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
CCP196
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course prepares students to successfully design and configure a control panel application for a PanelView standard terminal that is used to control and monitor an
operation. Students will use PanelBuilder32 software to practice the tasks associated with creating the operator interface screens and they will demonstrate proper operation
of the screens by interacting with the terminal and the processor. Students will learn how to troubleshoot a terminal and PanelBuilder32 application to help decrease
downtime of equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Prepare a standard PanelView terminal for operation
• Need to diagnose and correct application and/or terminal problems
• Connect communications cables
• Need to create a PanelBuilder32 application
• Create an application, a tag database, and background text
• Need to control and monitor an operation using a PanelView standard terminal
• Define network communication parameters
PREREQUISITES
• Download an application
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create control objects and displays
• Experience creating ladder logic using RSLogix 500 software
• Create messages and reports
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Add bitmap graphic images
or equivalent experience
• Troubleshoot a PanelView standard terminal and a PanelBuilder32 application
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 and
PanelBuilder32 Procedures Guide
SI: FACTORYTALK VIEW SE CONFIGURATION
CATALOG #
ABT-2711-TSJ50
SI101
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Visualization/HMI
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to organize and develop FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) applications. This course provides opportunities for
students to organize and develop FactoryTalk View SE applications. During class, students will have the opportunity to practice the skills used to create build graphic
displays. Students will learn how to configure alarms and security, trend data, and test their application using FactoryTalk View SE Client. Students will also work with RSLinx
Enterprise communications software.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: System Integrator Programmers who have little or no working experience with
• Get started with FactoryTalk View SE
developing FactoryTalk View SE local (stand-alone) or network (distributed)
• Configure:
applications
- RSLinx Enterprise communications in a new FactoryTalk View SE application
PREREQUISITES
- Global objects
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- HMI tag-based alarms
• Read wiring diagrams
- FactoryTalk alarms and events
• Create a graphic display and an HMI tag database
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Build an interactive graphic display
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
• Animate a graphic display
• Use tag placeholders and create a FactoryTalk View SE client
Curriculum Note:
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCV207 in a consolidated
• Create and configure a trend
format. Do not take both courses.
• Create a derived tag file and an event file
• Configure security
Software
84
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Motion Control
Motion Control
Motion Control Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
SStudio
di 5000 Logix Designer
Level 4: Kinetix 6500
(CIP) Programming
SStudio
d 5000 Logix Designer
Level 4: Kinetix 6000
(SERCOS) Programming
S d 5000 Logix Designer
Studio
Level 5: Advanced Motion
Programming
CCN144 • 4 Days
CCN145 • 4 Days
CCN190-LD • 2 Days
Introduction to
Automation
CCP800 • 3 Days
Motion Control
Fundamentals
CCN130 • 2 Days
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
Introduction to
the Integrated
Architecture System
Kinetix 6000
Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CIA101 • 2 Days
CCN200 • 2 Days
OEM: ControlLogix,
FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000 and
PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
Kinetix 6500
Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCN201 • 3 Days
OEM100 • 5 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
86
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Core Requirement for
Certificate Program
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
e-LEARNING
Choosing an
EtherNet/IP Network
Topology and Configuring
the Network in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer Project
Adding Drives
and Configuring
Axes for Control Over an
EtherNet/IP Network in a Studio
5000 Logix Designer Project
VC-CCN300-01
120-min. Session
VC-CCN300-02
120-min. Session
Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP Bundle:
VC-CCN300B
Commissioning
Axes for Control Over an
EtherNet/IP Network Using
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
VC-CCN300-03
120-min. Session
RSLogix 5000 Software Motion
RSTrainer
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Introduction
d i to AAutomation
i
iBook Available on iTunes
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Virtual Classroom
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
87
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
CCP800
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to you within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand
• Identify
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
Visualization
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM
CIA101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about and
interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While
performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products function together
within Integrated Architecture.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Program a basic Logix Designer project for an integrated system
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the Integrated
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
Architecture System
• Understand Logix5000 multi-discipline control
PREREQUISITES
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Condition Monitoring
Software
88
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the system
through hands-on exercises using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. Students will learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system.
Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators. Upon
completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion
• Locate Kinetix 6000 system components
control systems
• Check Kinetix 6000 connections
PREREQUISITES
• Interpret Kinetix 6000 indicators
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Analyze fault codes in a Kinetix 6000 system
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
• Interpret motion state and move instructions in a Logix Designer project
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
• Test and tune axes in a Logix Designer project
•
Completion
of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Replace a Kinetix 6000 drive
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience with the ControlLogix
platform and basic ladder logic
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
89
Motion Control
CEUs 1.4
Process Control
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CCN200
Condition Monitoring
KINETIX 6000 TROUBLESHOOTING AND PROJECT INTERPRETATION
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an overview of motion control concepts, terminology, functionality, and applications. In addition, students will learn how motion control
applications function using the concepts and principles discussed in each lesson. This course allows students to establish the strong essential foundation needed to maintain
and program motion control systems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Identify:
• Need to learn basic motion control concepts for their job
- Servo motion elements
• Need a prerequisite for attending other motion control courses
- Motion drive elements
PREREQUISITES
- Motor types and components
Background in basic electricity, electronics, controllers operation, and computer
- Feedback devices
concepts is helpful
• Trace the power supply circuit
• Create a motion profile
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Identify and apply a reference
Motion Control Fundamentals Procedures Guide
ABT-M100-TSJ50
• Trace signal flow through the drive control module
Motion Control Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-M100-DRG70
• Identify and scale loads
Safety
CEUs 1.4
Software
2 Days
Networks
CCN130
MOTION CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
ControlLogix/Studio
5000 Logix Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
KINETIX 6000 (SERCOS) PROGRAMMING
CCN145
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to configure, test, tune, and program SERCOS motion axes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer programming environment.
Building upon the skills gained in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143), students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture
to a multi-axis SERCOS motion control system. Students will also practice project planning and efficient programming skills necessary for translating a machine specification
into reliable ladder logic code. Because all Logix5000 products share common features and a common operating system, students will be able to apply the configuring and
programming motion control skills they learn in this course to any of the Logix5000 controllers that are capable of motion control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project for a SERCOS motion application
PREREQUISITES
• Add drives and configure SERCOS axes
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Test SERCOS hardware
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
• Autotune SERCOS axes
experience with general motion control, drives, feedback devices, and servo
• Plan a motion project
motion systems
• Create user-defined data types, an axis-level program shell, and axis-level tags
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
• Program:
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
- Stopping routine
- Axis-level dispatch and power
- Resetting routine
up routines
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Starting routine
- Axis-level command routine
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
- Execute routine
- Axis-level waiting routine
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
- Electronic gearing
- Aborting routine
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
- Electronic camming
- Clearing routine
• Replicate the axis program and application-level program
• Add a virtual axis
Motion Control
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 5:
ADVANCED MOTION PROGRAMMING
CCN190-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality using ladder
logic, including SERCOS motion control technology. Students will learn how to apply advanced programming skills including tuning with Motion Analyzer software, advanced
camming techniques, coordinated motion, and add-on instructions for motion applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and program advanced Logix5000 motion
• Tune a servo axis with Motion Analyzer software
control systems
• Program event driven tasks
PREREQUISITES
• Program output cam instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Calculate a cam profile
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
• Program coordinate and motion add-on instructions
course (CCP143) or equivalent knowledge or experience with basic ladder logic
• Develop a motion control project using the power programming state model
programming
• Programming coordinated move transform instructions in a pick and
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4: Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS)
place application
Programming course (CCN145) or equivalent experience
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
experience with general motion control
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Software
90
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an Ethernet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Choose a network topology
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Choose network components
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a network
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
• Add the motion group and axes
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
ADDING DRIVES AND CONFIGURING AXES FOR
CONTROL OVER AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK
IN A STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER PROJECT
Visualization
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
VC-CCN300-02
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 0.2
Safety
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
91
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an Ethernet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Add drives
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Configure axes
PREREQUISITES
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Motion Control
Virtual
Classroom
Networks
VC-CCN300-01
Process Control
CHOOSING AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK
TOPOLOGY AND CONFIGURING THE NETWORK
IN A STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER PROJECT
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COMMISSIONING AXES FOR CONTROL OVER AN
ETHERNET/IP NETWORK USING THE
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER APPLICATION
VC-CCN300-03
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an EtherNet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Start up an EtherNet/IP network
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Test hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Autotune axes
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
• Test axis performance
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
Networks
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Visualization
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
KINETIX 6500 (CIP) PROGRAMMING
CCN144
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to configure, test, tune, and program CIP motion axes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer programming environment.
Building upon the skills gained in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143), students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture
to a multi-axis CIP motion control system. Students will practice project planning and efficient programming skills necessary for translating a machine specification into
reliable ladder logic code. Because all Logix5000 products share common features and a common operating system, students will be able to apply the configuring and
programming motion control skills they learn in this course to any of the Logix5000 controllers that are capable of motion control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project for a CIP motion application
PREREQUISITES
• Add drives and configure CIP motion axes
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Test CIP motion hardware
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
• Autotune CIP motion axes
knowledge of general motion control, drives, feedback devices, and servo
• Plan a motion project
motion systems
• Create user-defined data types, axis-level program shell, and axis-level tags
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development course
• Program the:
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
- Axis-level dispatch and power up routines
- Axis-level command routine
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
- Axis-level waiting routine
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
- Aborting, clearing, stopping, resetting, and starting routines
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
• Replicate the axis program
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Replicate an application-level program and the execute routines
• Add a virtual axis
• Program electronic gearing and camming
Software
92
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot Studio 5000 applications that operate on a ControlLogix-based machine, FactoryTalk
View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on PanelView Plus terminals, Kinetix 6000 motion systems, and PowerFlex 40 drives. Students will have the opportunity to
develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used with ControlLogix hardware, PanelView Plus terminal, Kinetix 6000 systems, and PowerFlex
40 drives; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View ME application. Students will also learn to diagnose and troubleshoot problems with controller, I/O or
other hardware issues
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: OEMs who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix-based machine, but
have little to no working experience with ControlLogix systems.
• Assign an IP address to a computer
• Tune a PID loop
• Connect a computer to a network
• Manage project files
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a trend chart
• Configure Ethernet/IP addresses
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Test a ladder diagram
• Download and go online
• Perform basic voltage and current checks
• Troubleshoot digital and analog
• Update firmware
• Read wiring diagrams
I/O modules
• Locate I/O tags and devices
• Modify application communications
• Locate and editing tag values
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Download runtime files
• Create and modifying project
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
• Configure display security, graphic
• Draft basic ladder logic
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
displays, and interactive controls
• Select ladder logic instructions
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
• Troubleshoot workstation problems
• Edit ladder logic online
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
• Interpret motion instructions
• Program timer, counter, math,
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
and indicators
compare, and move instructions
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Modify drive parameters
• Search for project components
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
• Force I/O and toggling bits
• Configure produced and
consumed data
Curriculum Note:
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 3.5
Safety
5 Days
Networks
OEM100
Visualization
OEM: CONTROLLOGIX, FACTORYTALK VIEW ME, KINETIX 6000,
AND POWERFLEX 40 FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
93
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Motion Control
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCP299, CCP151, and CCV204
in an accelerated format. Do not take this course with the other three courses.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
KINETIX 6500 TROUBLESHOOTING AND PROJECT INTERPRETATION
CCN201
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6500 servo drive system. During class, students will practice
operating and troubleshooting the system through hands-on exercises using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. Building upon the skills developed in the
Fundamentals of Motion Control course (CCN130), students will learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system. Students will practice identifying
faults related to hardware, software, and motion networks by leveraging tools such as web pages, system LEDs, and Logix Designer status indicators. Upon completion of this
course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6500 servo drive system.
Safety
Networks
Visualization
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify the physical components and wiring of a Kinetix 6500 servo drive
• Interpret Kinetix 6500 servo drive status indicators
• Using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application:
- Determine the status of a drive and its associated axis
- Test wiring and signals for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Trend status information for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Tune a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
• In a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project:
- Verify a Kinetix 6500 servo drive and drive axis configuration
- Interpret motion state instructions for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Interpret motion move instructions for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
- Troubleshoot ladder logic for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive axis
• Troubleshoot failed communications for a Kinetix 6500 servo drive control module
• Access a Kinetix 6500 servo drive web page
• Remove and replace a Kinetix 6500 servo drive
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6500 motion
control systems
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
knowledge of or experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and
position loop systems
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent knowledge of or experience with the
ControlLogix platform and basic ladder logic
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
Motion Control Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-M100-DRG70
Bring Training to Your Organization with On-Site Training Services!
Rockwell Automation on-site training can work in a
typical classroom environment or on the plant floor.
Motion Control
Process Control
Receive these benefits with standard, on-site training:
• Flexible location - At your facility, in your training
center, or at distributor location.
• Flexible schedule - Any date, time, or shift that
works best for your employees.
• Free pre- and posttests that measure your
employees’ knowledge gain and demonstrate the
value of Rockwell Automation training solutions.
• Dedicated instructor emphasizing hands-on,
job-related training relevant to your
employees’ needs.
• Training content adjusted according to employee
skill levels.
• Training cost savings - No travel expenses.
• Standardized training - Employees attend the
same training and learn the same information.
Condition Monitoring
Software
94
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
To start your on-site training program, call
440-646-3434 (option 7) or contact your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Power Controls (Drives and Motor Control Centers)
Power Control (Drives and Motor Control Centers) Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
APPLICATION-SPECIFIC COURSES
PowerFlex 400
AC Drive Field Startup
for HVAC
Applications
PowerFlex 400/70/700/753
AC Drive Field Startup
for Water Wastewater
Applications
CCA171-LD • 1 Day
CCA177 • 2 Days
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
Introduction to
Automation
CCP800 • 3 Days
AAC/DC Motors
and Drives
Fundamentals
CCA101 • 2 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications
on DeviceNet
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications
on ControlNet
CCA162 • 1 Day
CCA164 • 2 Days
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Configuration and Startup
PowerFlex
750-Series Configuration
and Startup
CCA161 • 1 Day
CCA182 • 2 Days
PPowerFlex
o
700 Vector
Control Communications
over EtherNet/IP
CCA165 • 1 Day
PowerFlex
750-Series Configuration
for an Integrated
Architecture System
CCA184 • 1 Day
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
Motor
Theory
EM-202 • 3 Days
PowerFlex 70
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
AutoMax
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 700S Phase ll
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCA159LD • 1 Day
RE0520 • 4 Days
PFX700S2-LD • 3 Days
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex
750-Series Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
1336 PLUS ll
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCA183 • 2 Days
CCA137 • 3 Days
CCA163 • 1 Day
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
96
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ee-LEARNING
-L
Fundamentals of AC/DC
Motors and Drives
PowerFlex 523/525
Drives with
PowerFlex 525 Drive Kit:
Communications and
Programming
IntelliCENTER
and DeviceNet
Configuration
CCI106-LD • 2 Days
Web-Based Training
VC-PF523P
nss
(2) 90-min. Sessions
On-Site
Only
Course
CCENTERLINE MCC with
IntelliCENTER Software
Commissioning on an
EtherNet/IP Network
PowerFlex DC Drive
Configuration
and Startup
CDD161 • 2 Days
AC and DC Drives
iBook Available on iTunes
CCI108 • 3 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
On-Site
Only
Course
PowerFlex 700S Phase ll
HiHP Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex
DC Drive
Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-HIHP-LD • 3 Days
CDD163 • 2 Days
PowerFlex 755 Floor
Mounted Drives:
Pre-Installation Planning
VC-PF755H-01
120-min. Session
Includes Hardware Kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
OEM: ControlLogix,
FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000 and
PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
OEM100 • 5 Days
Core Requirement for
Certificate Program
On-Site
Only
Course
Introduction
d i to AAutomation
i
iBook Available on iTunes
Motor
Control
EM-204 • 5 Days
PowerFlex 7000C Liquid
Cooled Medium Voltage
Drive Operation
and Maintenance
CAN7000C • 4 Days
PowerFlex 7000 Medium
Voltage Drive Operation
and Maintenance
CAN7000 • 3.5 Days
Virtual Classroom
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
97
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
CCP800
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should have a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation
industries to an introduction of basic automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI). In addition, students will learn
common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers may be available to you within this field.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Understand
• Identify
• Have little or no experience with automation systems
- Industrial automation careers
- Common industries and
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation systems
- Basic mechanical components
applications in industrial
PREREQUISITES
- Automation control systems
automation
Basic training in electricity and electrical safety
- Controllers
- Industrial automation standards
- Networks
and regulations
- Safety in automation
- I/O devices and modules
- Process control
- System documentation
• Recognize logic and basic
- HMI
programming concepts
- AC and DC motors and drives
Visualization
AC/DC MOTORS AND DRIVES FUNDAMENTALS
CCA101
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts and terminology. At the completion of this course, students
will have the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to attend other Rockwell Automation AC and DC drives courses. Students will gain the hands-on skills
required to build a miniature DC motor and investigate how a variable-speed drive controls the speed and direction of an attached motor. Students will become familiar with
the drive Human Interface Module (HIM), which allows programmers, maintainers, and troubleshooters access to information stored within the drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to gain a fundamental understanding of motor and drive
• Identify electromechanical system components and concepts
concepts before they learn to program, maintain, and troubleshoot AC and DC drives
• Recognize AC/DC motor drive hardware and operation
PREREQUISITES
• Select a replacement motor
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Recognize line protection and filtering device hardware and functions
• General knowledge of electricity and electrical/industrial safety
• Prevent electrostatic damage
• Familiarity with electrical measuring tools is helpful, but not required
• Recognize AC/DC drive hardware and functions
• Recognize AC/DC motor braking methods
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Preform pre-power and power-on checks
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
ABT-D100-TSG10
• Monitor and control a drive using the HIM
• Select a drive for basic applications
Software
98
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course is delivered at your facility and requires 230V, 3-phase power to operate the workstations. This course introduces concepts and techniques that will
assist students in successfully troubleshooting a PowerFlex DC drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex DC drive hardware and properly rewire the drive.
Students will learn to diagnose and correct specific faults. Throughout this course, students will have the chance to use a variety of troubleshooting tools, including: LCD
HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using the
PowerFlex DC drive. This course can be taken as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other courses in the PowerFlex AC and DC drives curriculum for
further skills development.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for troubleshooting PowerFlex DC drives
• Identify PowerFlex DC drive hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Locate and modify PowerFlex DC drive parameters using the A3 LCD HIM, the A6
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
LCD HIM (optional), and DriveExplorer software
• Knowledge of basic DC motor and drive fundamentals through the completion of
• Clear PowerFlex DC drive alarms and faults
the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101), Fundamentals of
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex DC load, environmental faults, and drive equipment
AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/WBT1PACK), or
malfunctions
equivalent experience
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex DC drive
• Apply DC drive and motor fundamentals (optional review)
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Prepare for PowerFlex DC drive troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20P-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
2 Days
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
99
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
CDD163
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
POWERFLEX DC DRIVE TROUBLESHOOTING
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive.
Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700 drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental, and
equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer, and DriveExecutive software to clear faults and alarms.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting PowerFlex 700 vector
• Replace and rewire drive hardware
control drives
• Configure drive parameters using LCD HIM, DriveExplorer, and
PREREQUISITES
DriveExecutive software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Upload and download drive data
• Working knowledge of electricity and electrical/industrial safety
• Troubleshoot and clear drive alarms
• Completion of the Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based
• Clear drive faults
training (ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
• Troubleshoot drive load and environmental faults
• Troubleshoot drive equipment malfunctions
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Troubleshooting Guide ABT-20B-TSJ20
This course is intended for maintainers. Some topics may be similar to topics
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
covered in course CCA161.
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
Networks
CEUs 0.7
Condition Monitoring
1 Days
Visualization
CCA163
Software
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
AUTOMAX MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
RE0520
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to provide students with a general understanding of AutoMax hardware and to acquire the necessary skills to interrogate the AutoMax processors for
information needed to troubleshoot the system. Students will be provided an opportunity to monitor and load an AutoMax processor and to locate the necessary points for
voltage measurements. After completing this course, students will understand AutoMax hardware in order to perform basic troubleshooting.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals who are responsible for the installation, maintenance, and repair of
• AutoMax concepts
AutoMax systems
• Hardware discussion
PREREQUISITES
• AutoMax executive
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configuration
• Familiarity with test equipment and drive systems
• PC task
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Basic language
(including PPE requirements and safe practices)
• Control block language
• Knowledge of basic DC motor and drive fundamentals through the completion
of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101), Fundamentals
of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/WBT1PACK), or
equivalent experience
Visualization
POWERFLEX 700S PHASE II
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
PFX700S2-LD
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC drive.
Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental,
and equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software to clear faults and alarms. After each
demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700S drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for starting up, configuring, maintaining, and
• Understand PowerFlex 700S Phase II high-performance AC drive hardware
troubleshooting PowerFlex 700S Phase II drives
• Configure parameters using the LCD HIM
PREREQUISITES
• Configure drive parameters using DriveExecutive and DriveExplorer software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure motor control options
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Select speed feedback options
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
• Upgrade communications module firmware
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/
• Configure a gear-in application
WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
• Configure Synchlink™ communications
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex 700S Phase II high-performance AC drive
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Install and configure a ControlNet communications adapter
• Install and configure an EtherNet communications adapter
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20D-DRG71
Software
100
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 750-Series (PowerFlex
753 or PowerFlex 755) drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 750-Series drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will learn to diagnose specific
faults. Throughout the course, students will have the chance to use a variety of maintenance and troubleshooting tools, including the A6 LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and
DriveExecutive software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting
• Locate PowerFlex 750-Series drive hardware
PowerFlex 750-Series drives
• Locate and modify PowerFlex 750-Series drive data using the A6 HIM and
PREREQUISITES
drive software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Clear PowerFlex 750-Series drive alarms and faults
• Working knowledge of electricity and safety practices
• Perform predictive maintenance using PowerFlex 750-Series parameters
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 750-Series load/environmental faults and
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/
equipment malfunctions
WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
Visualization
ABT-20G-DRG70
CCA137
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
COURSE PURPOSE
This course prepares students to re-install 1336 PLUS II drive hardware components, make changes to the setup, and troubleshoot drive malfunctions. Students will
troubleshoot and repair a 1336 PLUS II drive, learning how to help decrease the downtime of equipment. Students will have the opportunity to maximize 1336 PLUS II drive
investments by taking advantage of the vast networking options and learning how to configure a 1336 PLUS II drive to communicate on various networks.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to replace, startup, maintain, and troubleshoot a
• Prevent electrostatic damage to drive components
1336 PLUS II drive
• Replace and wire drive hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Perform drive pre-power and power-on checks
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Modify drive parameters using the Human Interface Module (HIM)
• Experience using electrical measuring tools (e.g., multimeter, megger,
• Locate, monitor, and modify drive parameters using DriveTools™ and
oscilloscope, etc.)
DriveExplorer software
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
• Startup, troubleshoot, and repair a drive
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training course
• Configure communications
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
• Identify and monitor drive malfunctions
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
CATALOG #
ABT-D500-TSJ50
ABT-D500-TSJ51
ABT-1336F-TSJ20
ABT-1336SF-TQR90
ABT-1336SF-DRG70
Condition Monitoring
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
DriveTools32 Software Procedures Guide
DriveExplorer Software Procedures Guide
1336 PLUS II AC Drive Troubleshooting Guide
1336 PLUS and PLUS II AC Drive Parameters Quick Reference Guide
1336 PLUS and PLUS II AC Drive Documentation Reference Guide CD
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
101
Software
1336 PLUS™ II MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CATALOG #
Motion Control
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
Reference Guide CD
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 1.4
Safety
2 Days
Networks
CCA183
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
POWERFLEX 750-SERIES MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL CONFIGURATION AND STARTUP
CCA161
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring and starting up a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive.
Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters. The instructor will demonstrate how to install and commission
one or more of the following communications adapters: remote I/O, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, and ControlNet. Then, students will practice these tasks during hands-on
exercises using the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software. This course is designed as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other
PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up
• Configure drive parameters using DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software
PowerFlex 700 vector control drives
• Configure drive parameters using an LCD HIM
PREREQUISITES
• Startup a drive, upload and download drive data
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Control drive operation
• Working knowledge of electricity and safety practices
• Install and configure a EtherNet/IP communications adapter
• Completion of the AC/DC Motor and Drive Fundamentals course (CCA101),
• Optional: Install and configure a DeviceNet, ControlNet, and remote I/O
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training course
communications adapter
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS ON CONTROLNET
CCA164
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course introduces students to techniques and instructions that will assist them in starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive and commissioning it on a ControlNet network.
Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet communications adapter. Students will learn to configure a
ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drives
• Configure Vector Control drive parameters using an LCD HIM
• Configure Vector Control drive parameters using DriveExplorer and
PREREQUISITES
DriveExecutive software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Upload and download PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive data
• Working knowledge of electricity and safety practices
• Startup a PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
• Install and configure a PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive ControlNet
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training course
communications adapter
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
• Configure an offline ControlNet network
• Go online to a ControlNet network
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Enter scheduled ControlNet I/O data connections for Logix5000 controllers
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick
• Enter ControlNet messages for Logix5000 controllers
Reference Guide
ABT-20AB-TQR90
• Control PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive operation
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
This course is intended for programmers. Some topics may be similar to topics
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
covered in course CCP173.
Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ50
Software
102
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, given a wired PowerFlex 750-Series drive (PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755) and AC motor, students will be able to startup the drive and
configure drive parameters to meet application needs. Throughout the course, students will have the chance to use a variety of hardware and software tools, including the
A6 LCD HIM, DriveExecutive software, and DriveExplorer software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a
PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to configure and startup PowerFlex 750-Series drives
• Verify PowerFlex 750-Series drive installation
PREREQUISITES
• Locate and modify PowerFlex 750-Series drive data using the A6 HIM and
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
drive software
• Working knowledge of electricity and safety practices
• Configure EtherNet/IP communications adapter for a PowerFlex 750-Series drive
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
• Startup a PowerFlex 750-Series drive
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
• Interpret PowerFlex 750-Series control block diagrams
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
• Control PowerFlex 750-Series drive operation
Visualization
ABT-20G-DRG70
CCA184
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, given a PowerFlex 750-Series drive (PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755) that has been successfully started up, students will be able to integrate
their drive into a system that includes Logix5000 controllers and PanelView Plus terminals running FactoryTalk View ME software. Throughout the course, students will have
the chance to use a variety of hardware and software tools, including the A6 LCD HIM, Logix Designer software, and FactoryTalk View ME software. After each demonstration,
students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 753 or PowerFlex 755 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to add PowerFlex 750-Series drives to an Integrated
• Add a PowerFlex 750-Series drive to a Logix Designer project
Architecture system
• Locate and modify PowerFlex 750-Series data using Logix Designer software
PREREQUISITES
• Integrate a PowerFlex 750-Series drive with a Logix5000 controller
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add PowerFlex 750-Series faceplates to a FactoryTalk View ME application
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Operate a PowerFlex 750-Series drive in an Integrated Architecture system
(including PPE requirements and safe practices)
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Completion of the PowerFlex 750-Series Startup & Configuration course (CCA182)
• Knowledge of Logix5000 system fundamentals and basic programming skills
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
through one or more of the following methods::
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20G-DRG70
Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Fundamentals course (CCP146)
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
- Logix 5000 software computer-based and/or web-based training
- Equivalent experience programming Logix5000 control systems
• Previous experience with FactoryTalk View ME software is suggested, but
not required
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
103
Motion Control
POWERFLEX 750-SERIES CONFIGURATION FOR AN
INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM
CATALOG #
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
This course is intended for programmers. Some topics may be similar to topics
covered in course CCA183.
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
Reference Guide CD
Condition Monitoring
• Create a DeviceLogix program in a PowerFlex 750-Series drive
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CEUs 1.4
Safety
2 Days
Networks
CCA182
Software
POWERFLEX 750-SERIES CONFIGURATION AND STARTUP
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS ON DEVICENET
CCA162
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to communicate on
an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, such as browsing the
network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. Students will learn about scanner module configuration and input and output mapping.
This course is designed as a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 vector control drives to
• Connect a drive to a DeviceNet network
communicate on a DeviceNet network
• Commission a node on a DeviceNet network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure drive and adapter parameters using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files for the PowerFlex 700 vector control drive
• Working knowledge of electricity and safety practices
• Configure a 1756-DNB module to communicate with a PowerFlex 700 vector
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
control drive using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training course
• Map PowerFlex 700 vector control drive inputs and outputs to a 1756-DNB
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience
module using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Completion of the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
course (CCA161) is recommended, but not required
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ50
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
POWERFLEX DC DRIVE CONFIGURATION AND STARTUP
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
CDD161
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course is delivered at your facility and requires 230V, 3-phase power to operate the workstations. This course introduces concepts and techniques that will
assist students in successfully starting up and configuring a PowerFlex DC drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex DC drive hardware and verify proper drive
wiring. Students will learn to perform startup tasks. Throughout this course, students will have the chance to use a variety of startup and configuration tools, including:
LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using the
PowerFlex DC drive. This course can be taken as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other courses in the PowerFlex AC and DC drives curriculum for
further skills development.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for starting up and configuring PowerFlex DC drives
• Identify PowerFlex DC drive hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Configure PowerFlex DC drive parameters using the A3 LCD HIM, the A6 LCD
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
HIM (optional), and DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Prepare for a PowerFlex DC drive startup
• Knowledge of basic DC motor and drive fundamentals through the completion of
• Apply power to a PowerFlex DC drive
the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101), Fundamentals of AC
• Tune the PowerFlex DC drive current regulator and speed regulator
and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/WBT1PACK), or
• Commission a PowerFlex DC drive using drive software
equivalent experience
• Install and Commission an EtherNet/IP adapter
• Control PowerFlex DC drive operation
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Apply DC drive and motor fundamentals (optional)
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20P-DRG70
Software
104
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 1.4
CCA171-LD
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides fundamental concepts of AC/DC drive and motor operation to enable effective startup of PowerFlex 400 drives within the HVAC market. This course
provides students with information related to applications, proper drive selection, and sizing as well as various installation considerations. Students will learn how to
recognize PowerFlex 400 drive hardware and properly program and troubleshoot the drive as part of a typical startup service. Throughout this course, students will use the
LCD HIM and DriveExplorer software to program and monitor various drive parameters. After each demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that
offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 400 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Individuals who will be conducting startup of PowerFlex 400 drives for
topics and tasks:
HVAC applications
• Basic drive and motor technology
PREREQUISITES
• PowerFlex 400 and configured product overview
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• General programming and bypass lab
• Previous experience working with AC Drive technology
• Application specific features overview and labs
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Installation and application considerations
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
• DriveExplorer software overview
or Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
• Network communications overview
(ePass/WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
• Start up registration procedure
• Relate product features to application needs
• Verify proper installation of the drive
• Effectively program the drive
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
105
Motion Control
1 Day
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
POWERFLEX 400 AC DRIVE FIELD STARTUP
FOR HVAC APPLICATIONS
Visualization
IntelliCENTER support services
Setup a ControlLogix chassis with DeviceNet and Ethernet
Map devices to a DeviceNet scanner
PLC Programs for IntelliCENTER
Condition Monitoring
•
•
•
•
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides the concepts, knowledge, and tools necessary to design, specify, install, troubleshoot, and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC. During the course,
students will employ control and communication architectures by solving sample architecture problems presented in class. Students will learn to use various software tools
associated with DeviceNet MCCs, such as RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software in addition to MCC start-up, maintenance, and replacement. The last day focuses on
network configuration, mapping of scanners, and PLC programming in a DeviceNet MCC system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Control engineers, electrical technicians, and system integrators who will be involved
in designing, installing, and using IntelliCENTER/DeviceNet MCCs
• Understand basics of DeviceNet and NetLinx
• RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, EDS files
PREREQUISITES
• Search for EDS files
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• DeviceNet media in CENTERLINE MCCs
• Familiarity with PLC programming software
• Add MCC units and sections to IntelliCENTER software
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Replace a device/auto-device and node recovery options
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
2 Days
Safety
CCI106-LD
Software
INTELLICENTER AND DEVICENET™ CONFIGURATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 400/70/700/753 AC DRIVE FIELD
STARTUP FOR WATER WASTEWATER APPLICATIONS
CCA177
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course provides students with fundamental concepts of AC drive and motor operation to enable effective startup of PowerFlex 400, PowerFlex 70 EC
(enhanced control), PowerFlex 700 VC (vector control), and PowerFlex 753 drives for Water Wastewater applications. The course provides information related to applications,
proper drive selection, and sizing as well as various installation considerations and troubleshooting practices. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 400, 70,
700, and 753 drive hardware and properly program and troubleshoot the drive as part of a typical startup. Throughout the course, students will use the various LCD HIMs,
DriveExplorer software, DriveExecutive software, and DriveObserver™ software to program and monitor various drive parameters. After each demonstration, students will be
given an exercise that offers hands-on practice using PowerFlex 400, PowerFlex 700 VC, and/or PowerFlex 753 drives.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals responsible for starting up PowerFlex drives in Water Wastewater
• Basics of drive and motor control theory (review)
applications
• PowerFlex 400/70/700/753 product overview
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Students should also be able to perform the following tasks:
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Apply drive installation best practices
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
• Monitor and modify PowerFlex drive parameters using the HIM and software
or Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
• Program PowerFlex drives
(ePass/WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
• Set up a PowerFlex drive to communicate over Ethernet
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex drive over Ethernet
Visualization
POWERFLEX 700S PHASE II HIHP MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING (AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
PFX700S2-HIHP-LD
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP AC
drive. Students will learn installation, start-up, maintenance and troubleshooting skills as well as how to recognize PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP drive hardware for frame
sizes 9…12, and the concepts of HiHP drives. Students will completely disassemble and then reassemble a Frame 9 and Frame 10 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for starting up, configuring, maintaining, and
• Understand
troubleshooting PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP drives
- AC motors
PREREQUISITES
- Drive basics
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- Types of motor control
• Completion of the AC and DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
- AC characteristics & rectification
or equivalent experience
• Invert DC to AC power
• Identify PowerFlex 700S phase II HiHP AC drive hardware
• Configure parameters using the LCD HIM
• Understand high horsepower drive concepts
• Recognize Frame 9, Frame 10, Frame 11, and Frame 12 power structures
• Disassemble and reassemble PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP Frame 9 and
Frame 10 AC drives
• Install and start a PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP AC drive
• Maintain and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP AC drive
Software
106
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 70 AC drive. Students will
learn how to recognize PowerFlex 70 drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental, and equipment faults.
Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software to clear faults and alarms. After each demonstration, students will
be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 70 drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting PowerFlex 70 drives
• Replace and rewire drive hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Configure drive parameters using the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer &
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
DriveExecutive software
• Working knowledge of electricity and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Upload and download drive data
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
• Troubleshoot and clear drive alarms
or Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training (ePass/
• Clear drive faults
WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
• Troubleshoot drive load and environmental faults
• Troubleshoot drive equipment malfunctions
• Maintain and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 70 drive
CATALOG #
CCA165
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, given a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive that has been successfully started up and configured, students should be able to add their drive to
an EtherNet/IP network that includes Logix5000 controllers or PanelView Plus terminals running FactoryTalk View ME software. Throughout the course, students will have
the chance to use a variety of hardware and software tools, including: A3 LCD HIM; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and drive configuration software (DriveExecutive,
Connected Components Workbench). After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using a PowerFlex 700 vector control
drive in tandem with a CompactLogix controller and/or PanelView Plus terminal.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for commissioning PowerFlex 700 vector control drives on an
• Add a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project
EtherNet/IP network
• Import PowerFlex 700 vector control drive control code into a Studio 5000 Logix
PREREQUISITES
Designer project
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical/industrial safety
• Create new PowerFlex 700 vector control drive control code in a Studio 5000 Logix
• Completion of the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup course
Designer project
(CCA161) or equivalent experience
• Synchronize data and test PowerFlex 700 vector control drive operating modes
•
Knowledge
of Logix5000 system fundamentals and basic programming skills
• Configure PowerFlex 700 vector control drive peer-to-peer communications
through one of the following methods:
- Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
Programming course (CCP151)
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
- Completion of available RSLogix 5000/Studio 5000 software computer-based
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
and/or web-based training
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20B-DRG70
- Equivalent on-the-job experience
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
107
Motion Control
CEUs 0.7
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
1 Day
Condition Monitoring
POWERFLEX 700 VECTOR CONTROL
COMMUNICATIONS OVER ETHERNET/IP™
Visualization
ABT-20A-DRG70
Software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
1 Day
Safety
CCA159LD
Networks
POWERFLEX 70 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 755 FLOOR MOUNTED DRIVES:
PRE-INSTALLATION PLANNING
VC-PF755H-01
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will help students plan for the successful installation of PowerFlex 755 floor-mounted, frame 8 and larger (300 Hp (200 kW) and above) drives. Students will
explore common drive pre-installation topics including specific wiring, mounting, fusing, and option card installation considerations for floor-mounted PowerFlex 755 units.
During this course, students will use a variety of available technical documents and tools to help them prepare for installation situations unique to these drives.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for installing Frame 8 and larger PowerFlex 755 drives
• Interpret and verify floor mounted drive catalog numbers
PREREQUISITES
• Prepare for frame 8 and larger drive mounting
• Knowledge of safe electrical practices
• Verify drive option card locations
• Prior experience working with AC drives
• Plan for floor mounted drive
• Experience with wall-mounted (frame 1…7) PowerFlex 750-series drives is
• Fusing and wiring
helpful, but not required
• Plan floor mounted drive integration with a motor control center
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A computer and phone
Visualization
POWERFLEX 523/525 DRIVES WITH POWERFLEX 525
DRIVE KIT: COMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAMMING
VC-PF523P
Virtual
Classroom
(2) 90-min Sessions
CEUs 0.3
Motion Control
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to program drive parameters for a drive application. This course will teach students how to create a custom parameter
group based upon drive applications. Throughout this course, the instructor will cover a range of topics from establishing communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via
a USB connection and EtherNet/IP network to testing parameters of a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the HIM.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have drive programming experience but are new to PowerFlex
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via a USB connection
component-class drives
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 525 drive via an EtherNet/IP network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the Startup Wizard in Connected
• Knowledge of AC/DC drive fundamentals and drives programming experience
Components Workbench™ software
• Basic working knowledge of safe electrical practices including, but not limited to:
• Create a CustomView parameter group
- Understanding electricity, how it works, and the dangers involved in working
• Edit and test parameters using the HIM
with electricity
- Identifying hazardous conditions
- Adhering to all safety regulations
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• PowerFlex 525 drive kit (shipped prior to class)
• A computer and phone
• Connected Components Workbench software must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Software
108
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
POWERFLEX 7000C LIQUID-COOLED MEDIUM VOLTAGE DRIVE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
CAN7000C
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with techniques needed to facilitate operation and maintenance of the medium voltage (MV) PowerFlex 7000C drive. Emphasis is on hardware
familiarity, programming procedures, and troubleshooting. Upon completion of this course, students should be able to adopt proper safety measures while working on MV
equipment, recognize proper drive and motor operation, understand the significance of all the key parameters, and troubleshoot drive malfunctions. Students should also be
able to remove and replace power components of the PowerFlex 7000C adjustable frequency AC drive.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Engineers, technicians, and electrical maintenance persons engaged in the operation
and maintenance of PowerFlex 7000C drives.
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
PREREQUISITES
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical and industrial
safety (including PPE requirements and safe practices)
• Comprehensive knowledge of electrical principles and circuits
• Practical experience using a multimeter, ammeter and oscilloscope
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Condition Monitoring
Curriculum Note:
Do not take this course and course CAN7000. The first 3.5 days are the same.
109
Software
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the
following topics:
• MV products and liquid-cooled
• Labs:
system overview
- Device replacement
• PF7000 drive topology
- Resistance checks
• Power components
- Control voltage checks
- Classic and ForGe control
• Safety training (LOTO)
board checks
• Power supplies (classic and ForGe)
- Review classic and ForGe drawings
• PF7000 classic and ForGe
- HMI PV550 / PV1000
control boards
- Uploading drive setup and
• Voltage and current monitoring
control data
(classic and ForGe)
• Drive cooling system and operation
- Downloading firmware
• Maintenance and troubleshooting
• PF7000C features and parameters
• Heat exchangers
• Chill block and thermostatic
valve replacement
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will provide students with techniques needed to facilitate operation and maintenance of the medium voltage (MV) PowerFlex 7000 Drive. Emphasis is on
hardware familiarity, programming procedures, and troubleshooting. Upon completion of this course, students should be able to adopt proper safety measures while working
on MV equipment, recognize proper drive and motor operation, understand the significance of all the key parameters, and troubleshoot drive malfunctions. Students should
also be able to remove and replace power components of the PowerFlex 7000 adjustable frequency AC drive.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the
Engineers, technicians, and electrical maintenance persons engaged in the operation
and maintenance of PowerFlex 7000 drives (frames A and B).
following topics:
• MV products overview
• Labs:
PREREQUISITES
• PF7000 drive topology
- Device replacement
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical and industrial
• Power components
- Resistance checks
safety (including PPE requirements and safe practices).
• Safety training (LOTO)
- Control voltage checks
• Comprehensive knowledge of electrical principles and circuits
• Power supplies (classic and ForGe)
- Classic and ForGe control
• Practical experience using a multimeter, ammeter and oscilloscope
• PF7000 classic and ForGe
board checks
control boards
- Review classic and ForGe drawings
- HMI PV550 / PV1000
• Voltage and current monitoring
Curriculum Note:
- Uploading drive setup and
(classic and ForGe)
This course covers PowerFlex 7000 drives frame A and B. For PowerFlex 7000C
control data
• Drive cooling system and operation
drives, take course CAN7000C which covers everything in this course plus
- Downloading firmware
• Maintenance and troubleshooting
liquid-cooled drives (frame C).
Safety
CEUs 2.5
Networks
3.5 Days
Visualization
CAN7000
Motion Control
POWERFLEX 7000 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DRIVE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
ControlLogix/Studio
ControlLogix/
5000 Logix
RSLogix
Designer
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CENTERLINE MCC WITH INTELLICENTER SOFTWARE
COMMISSIONING ON AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK
CCI108
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, given a newly installed CENTERLINE MCC with IntelliCENTER software, students should be able to produce an operational motor control system
over an EtherNet/IP network. Throughout the course, students will work with a number of hardware and software products, including IntelliCENTER software; E300™ and
E3 Plus™ electronic overload relays; PowerFlex 525 and PowerFlex 40 variable speed drives; Stratix 5700 industrial Ethernet switches; Logix5000 controllers and the Studio
5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View software. Students will be introduced to a variety of tools they can use to ensure proper functioning of a motor control
system. This course also shows how CENTERLINE MCCs interact with other parts of a control system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: System engineers and/or other individuals responsible for starting the operation of a
• Verify connections between CENTERLINE MCC sections
CENTERLINE motor control center
• Implement an EtherNet/IP network topology for an MCC
PREREQUISITES
• Configure:
• Working knowledge of electricity, and knowledge of electrical and industrial
- Stratix 5700 EtherNet/IP switch settings
safety (including PPE requirements and safe practices)
- IntelliCENTER software preferences
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
- E300 and E3 Plus electronic overload relays
- PowerFlex 525 and PowerFlex 40 drive parameters
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Install IntelliCENTER software and data disks
• Modify CENTERLINE MCC lineup properties using IntelliCENTER software
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Add MCC components to a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
IntelliCENTER
Software
Procedures
Guide
ABT-MCC-TSJ50
• Enable automatic device configuration for a PowerFlex 525 drive in a
CENTERLINE MCC and IntelliCENTER Software
CENTERLINE MCC
Documentation Reference Guide
ABT-MCC-DRG70
• Add IntelliCENTER ActiveX controls to a FactoryTalk View application
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Configure and view IntelliCENTER energy software data
• Add documentation to an IntelliCENTER software database
• Modify MCC component spare parts lists in IntelliCENTER software
• Manage IntelliCENTER software databases
Motion Control
Drives
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Condition Monitoring
Software
110
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
111
Software
Condition Monitoring
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
This course contains many of the lessons in courses CCP299, CCP151, and CCV204
in an accelerated format. Do not take this course with the other three courses.
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot Studio 5000 applications that operate on a ControlLogix-based machine, FactoryTalk
View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on PanelView Plus terminals, Kinetix 6000 motion systems, and PowerFlex 40 drives. Students will have the opportunity to
develop and practice these skills by learning basic concepts and terminology used with ControlLogix hardware, PanelView Plus terminal, Kinetix 6000 systems, and PowerFlex
40 drives; Studio 5000 Logix Designer application; and FactoryTalk View ME application. Students will also learn to diagnose and troubleshoot problems with controller, I/O or
other hardware issues
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: OEMs who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix-based machine, but
• Tune a PID loop
• Assign an IP address to a computer
have little to no working experience with ControlLogix systems.
• Manage project files
• Connect a computer to a network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a trend chart
• Configure Ethernet/IP addresses
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Test a ladder diagram
• Download and go online
• Perform basic voltage and current checks
• Troubleshoot digital and analog
• Update firmware
• Read wiring diagrams
I/O modules
• Locate I/O tags and devices
• Modify application communications
• Locate and editing tag values
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Download runtime files
• Create and modifying project
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
• Configure display security, graphic
• Draft basic ladder logic
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
displays, and interactive controls
• Select ladder logic instructions
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
• Troubleshoot workstation problems
• Edit ladder logic online
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
• Interpret motion instructions
• Program timer, counter, math,
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
and indicators
compare, and move instructions
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Modify drive parameters
• Search for project components
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
• Force I/O and toggling bits
• Configure produced and
consumed data
Curriculum Note:
Safety
CEUs 3.5
Networks
5 Days
Visualization
OEM100
Motion Control
OEM: CONTROLLOGIX, FACTORYTALK VIEW ME, KINETIX 6000,
AND POWERFLEX 40 FUNDAMENTALS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Rockwell Automation
RSTrainer® CD-ROM Courses
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Computer-Based Training
Benefits
Safety
•
•
•
•
•
Eliminate travel costs
Lower overall training costs
Better knowledge retention
Improved performance
On-going access to instruction
Networks
Training is offered for the
following products:
• RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500,
and RSLogix 5000
• SLC 500
• RSLinx
• Hydraulics
• ControlLogix
• FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
• EtherNet/IP
Visualization
Motion Control
Minimum System Requirements
RSTrainer on a PC:
• Pentium® III-processor (or better)
• Windows 98SE, NT4, 2000, XP, Vista or 7
operating system
• 20 MB of available hard drive space
• 800 x 600 video resolution
• CD-ROM drive
• Windows compatible pointing device
• Sound card with speakers
Note: RSTrainer is not operable on a
MAC system
Saving Time and Money with
Computer-Based Training
Self-paced, self-directed, computer-based training courses
will help employees acquire and retain new skills at an
accelerated rate, giving them more time on the plant floor and
less time in a classroom.
Two purchasing options are available with RSTrainer
computer-based training:
Single-User Option
RSTrainer offers a single-user license and a single software
activation. This computer-based training product is designed so
that one person can use the program on one computer at one
time. With this option, the RSTrainer software can be installed
and activated on only one computer and not on a network.
Power Controls
(Drives & MCC)
Multi-User Option
Referred to as RSTrainer Enterprise Edition, this version can be
installed on a network and shared concurrently with multiple
users. RSTrainer Enterprise Edition ships with five user licenses
and software activation that permits five users to concurrently
access and use the RSTrainer software at any given time. This
computer-based training product is meant to be installed and
activated on a network server and it is designed to provide
greater flexibility with managing multiple users over a network.
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition is ideal for companies with a large
number of people to train.
Condition Monitoring
Software
112
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control Curriculum Map
PlantPAx
Process Automation System
INTEGRATE OR DESIGN
UNDERSTAND
On-Site
Only
Course
P
Process
Control
Fundamentals
PlantPAx Process
System Integration
Fuzzy Logic Design
and Development
PRS018 • 5 Days
PRS012 • 2 Days
EM-403 • 5 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
Instrumentation I
EM-400A • 1 Day
On-Site
Only
Course
Life Sciences
Application Suite
Configuration
Instrumentation II
EM-400B • 2 Days
PRS016 • 2 Days
PlantPAx System
Configuration
Fundamentals
PID Loop
Development
and Tuning
PRS013 • 4.5 Days
PRS010 • 1 Day
Vibration
Analysis
Fundamentals
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Function
Block Programming
CCP152 • 2 Days
Pulp and Paper
Application Suite
Configuration
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Project Development
PRS017 • 2 Days
CCP143 • 4 Days
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
EK-ICM101 • 3 Days
PlantPAx Process
System Troubleshooting
Vibration Analysis:
Level I
PRS015 • 4 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCV206-LD • 2 Days
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
CCP299 • 4.5 Days
EK-ICM201 • 3.5 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
114
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
AADvance Comprehensive
System Training
PRST9063LD • 3 Days
Stratix 5700 Switch
Configuration for an
EtherNet/IP Network
CCP179 • 2 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Programming
FactoryTalk View SE
Architecture
CCV207 • 4.5 Days
CCV205-LD • 2 Days
FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Basics
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
Structured Text/
Sequential Function
Chart Programming
PRS005-LD • 2 Days
CCP154 • 2 Days
Pavilion8 Modeling
and Analysis
PRS802 • 2 Days
Pavilion8 Integration
PRS803 • 2 Days
FactoryTalk Historian Site
Edition Configuration
and Data Collection
FactoryTalk VantagePoint
Configuration
and Reporting
RS-FTHSEC • 3.5 Days
FTVP • 3 Days
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
FactoryTalk
Batch Project Design
and Implementation
CCP711 • 1 Day
Pavilion8 Control
and Visualization
PRS804 • 4 Days
PRS101-LD • 5 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
Pavilion8 Basic Model
Predictive Control
Operations
AADvance Operation,
Maintenance,
and Troubleshooting
EtherNet/IP
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
NetLinx
System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PRS801 • 2 Days
PRST9064LD • 2 Days
CCP180 • 1 Day
CCP177 • 4 Days
Analytical
Measurement
EM-402 • 1 Day
Combination of DeviceNet, ControlNet
and EtherNet/IP Maintenance Topics
Combination Understand and
Maintain or Troubleshoot Level Course
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
115
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PID LOOP DEVELOPMENT AND TUNING
PRS010
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course enables students to develop an understanding of process control by allowing them to practice PID control methods. This course prepares students for further
process control classes with more specialized applications and design involvement. This course provides students with the skills needed to obtain a tuned process control loop
for typical applications. Students will create and develop a process model; calculate proportional, integral, and derivative gains; verify gains using ladder diagram; practice PID
programming in function block diagram and learn how to autotune typical PID loops.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to learn:
• Create a process reaction curve
• How to make basic PID design decisions
• Develop a process model
• How to program and configure PIDE instructions using function block diagram
• Determine the control action
• How to tune basic PID loops using manual methods and ladder diagram
• Configure program timing
• How to autotune
• Program simple PID loop using function block diagram
PREREQUISITES
• Calculate and verify PID gains
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
• Autotune a PID loop
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• ISA Process Control Fundamentals training or equivalent experience is
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
recommended but not required
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
•
Knowledge
of automation systems and experience using function block diagram
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
programming language or attending training (CCP152) is helpful but not required
Visualization
PLANTPAX® PROCESS SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PRS015
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn to troubleshoot equipment problems and failures in a PlantPAx process control system. Students will focus on these core areas: controller
applications and associated PlantPAx add-on instructions; HMI applications and associated PlantPAx faceplates. During the course, students will use the PlantPAx library of
add-on instructions and faceplates to isolate and diagnose problems with field devices, such as valves and motors, 4…20 mA analog instruments, HART and EtherNet/IP
networks, drives, motor control centers, redundant controller chassis, and client-server communication.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Technicians who have a background in process control but are new to PlantPAx
• Prepare equipment for restart
PREREQUISITES
• Isolate an HMI problem, a problem with a server, an I/O fault, a problem with a
• Basic knowledge of common process industry terms and components
field device, an alarm condition, or a non-alarm problem
• Hands-on experience with other process control systems
• Find Logix data online and I/O channel data
• Trace through function blocks
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Find I/O terminals for a device
PlantPAx
Process
System
Troubleshooting
Guide
ABT-P100-TSJ20
• Diagnose a discrete output or input problem
• Diagnose a problem with permissives, interlocks, and a device mode problem
• Bypass a device
• Diagnose an analog input or output problem
• Diagnose a module or EtherNet/IP problem
• Diagnose cause of a controller switchover
• Check the server status
• Ping a server or workstation
Software
116
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PRS012
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills to produce a fuzzy control system for a continuous process application. It introduces the range of options for fuzzy systems but
focuses on using fuzzy logic to adjust the gains of a PID loop to meet specific control requirements. Starting with a description of a process, students will decide if fuzzy
logic is the best control method. Students will design the fuzzy system, develop it in FuzzyDesigner software, and implement it in a Logix5000 controller. Students will use
FuzzyDesigner’s simulation, graphing, and online monitoring tools to validate the system against control requirements.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Drives
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who need to design, develop, or implement advanced process
control applications
PREREQUISITES
Ability to perform these Studio 5000 Logix Designer software skills:
• Entering and editing logic
• Downloading and going online
• Monitoring and editing data
• Prospective students can complete the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix Systems Fundamentals course (CCP146) to acquire the prerequisite
skills.
Process Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Decide when to use fuzzy logic
• Choose a fuzzy control scheme
• Identify input and output variables, terms, and membership parameters
• Write rules
• Choose a defuzzification method
• Create a FuzzyDesigner project
• Create ports and variables
• Enter terms and rules
• Chain rules
• Simulate execution of a fuzzy system
• Graph inputs and outputs
• Create, import, monitor, and change a fuzzy add-on instruction
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
FUZZY LOGIC DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an understanding of Logix Designer function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are provided to program
a Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to function block instructions and create and develop function block
diagram programs and routines.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Create a function block diagram
• Are responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000
• Program logical function block instructions
controllers using function block diagrams
• Program timer and counter function block instructions
• Use ActiveX controls in an operator interface, such as FactoryTalk View ME software
• Program analog function block instructions
PREREQUISITES
• Program device driver function block instructions
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Select timing modes in a function block instruction
• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory, including basic
• Program and monitor an RMPS (ramp/soak) function block instruction
loop control
• Control program flow using function block instructions
•
Completion
of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
• Program a PID loop using function block diagram
course
(CCP143)or
equivalent experience
• Develop an add-on instruction in function block diagram
• Program a totalizer function block instruction
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Tune a PID loop using ActiveX controls
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Networks
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
2 Days
Visualization
CCP152
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
117
Software
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAMMING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FOUNDATION™ FIELDBUS BASICS
PRS005-LD
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This skill and knowledge building course provides students with the necessary foundation to configure the 1788-EN2FFR linking device using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application. During this course students will be presented with FOUNDATION Fieldbus technology that incorporates the Rockwell Automation 1788-EN2FFR linking device
(EtherNet/IP to FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 device-level network). Students will gain hands-on experience in the tasks required to produce a functioning FOUNDATION Fieldbus
network, such as setting up and configuring the 1788-EN2FFR linking device using an add-on profile and the Logix Designer application; configuring and monitoring devices;
adding device description (DD) files; initializing a cascaded control loop; and integrating devices into a PlantPAx process control system. Additional material on function block
theory, device replacement, and test equipment will also be covered in this course.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Individuals who have little or no working experience with smart instrumentation or
topics and tasks:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Introduction to FOUNDATION Fieldbus • Interpret Fieldbus function blocks
PREREQUISITES
• Initialize a cascaded control loop
• Fieldbus basics
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Integrate devices into a PlantPAx
• Wire and install devices
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
process control system
• Recognize media components
Programming course (CCP151) and/or
• Replace a device
• Configure a 1788 EN2FFR
•
Completion
of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
• Gather diagnostic data
linking device
course
(CCP143)
• Configure and monitoring devices
• A basic understanding of process instruments and function block programming is
helpful, but not required
Visualization
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER LEVEL 4:
PHASEMANAGER PROJECT DESIGN
CCP711
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using the PhaseManager
feature. This course presents a tool that will help students effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize a Logix Designer project by identifying
control and equipment modules within application code.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to apply the S88 state model to Logix Designer projects for any
• Define equipment phases and state models in a Logix Designer project
Logix5000 controller
• Separate equipment phase code from equipment phase code
PREREQUISITES
• Test an equipment phase
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure a sequential function chart as an internal sequencer
• Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3: Project Development
course (CCP143) or advanced programming experience using Logix
Designer software
• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
Process Control
Software
118
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CEUs 3.2
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is intended for control engineers who have a background in process control – but are new to Rockwell Automation. This course introduces new students to the core
components of a PlantPAx process control system, including controllers, HMI, networks, and instrumentation devices. Students will look at the individual components and see
their relationships to the complete system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have a background in process control applications who are new
• Identify a PlantPAx system
to Rockwell Automation
• Locate ControlLogix components and organize ControlLogix data
PREREQUISITES
• Create and organize a new project
Basic knowledge of process control
• Configure device-level ring
• Program a function block diagram
• Configure PlantPAx AOI and devices using HART
JOB AIDS INCLUDED
CATALOG #
• Use tag placeholders
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
• Configure global objects and PlantPAx faceplates
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Create a graphic display, tag database, alarm, data log model, and trend
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
• Set up reporting
• Configure security
• Program and tune a PID loop
• Program considerations for applications and structured text
• Design an SFC
• Determine workstation layout
• Configure redundancy
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
119
Motion Control
4.5 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PRS013
Drives
PLANTPAX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FUNDAMENTALS
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to provide students with a complete overview of the design and implementation of a batch project using FactoryTalk Batch software. This includes an
introduction to batch processing and to the ANSI/ISA S88.01 Standard. FactoryTalk Batch system architecture, system operation, and system configuration are covered in detail.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Supervisors, operators, formulators, and engineers who will be involved with the
• Define batching and the S88 Standard
installation, setup, and operation of a FactoryTalk Batch system
• Work in FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk View
PREREQUISITES
• Define an area model from a P&ID
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Use FactoryTalk Equipment Editor
• Familiarity with S88 Batch Standard is helpful
• Translate a product definition into a recipe
• Configure the Factory Talk Recipe Editor including the basic mechanics, divergent
flow, class-based recipes, and enhanced unit binding
• Configure Batch Archiver and enhanced batch reporting
• Interface with the FactoryTalk Batch API and ActiveX controls
• Perform system administration tasks related to file structure, project folder,
and security
• Equipment Phase – FactoryTalk Batch Communications (phase design and
equipment phase instructions)
• Integrate manual phases and FactoryTalk Batch eProcedure
• Integrate material-based phases and the FactoryTalk Batch Material Manager
Networks
CEUs 3.5
Process Control
5 Days
Visualization
PRS101-LD
Software
FACTORYTALK BATCH PROJECT DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
LIFE SCIENCES APPLICATION SUITE CONFIGURATION
PRS016
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use a Rockwell Automation application suite to develop effective control applications for a PlantPAx process
automation system. The focus of this course will be on the life science industry and applications, including topics such as electronic signatures, alarming, audit logs, and
GAMP documentation. In this course, students will have the opportunity to create, configure, and develop working code to address a variety of application scenarios. Students
will experience the benefits of using a Rockwell Automation application suite through a combination of instruction and hands-on experience, which emphasize concepts,
common features, and functions.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain and/or troubleshoot a system which utilizes a
• Locate components of the application suite
Rockwell Automation application suite
• Recognize common functions/configuration options in the application suite
PREREQUISITES
• Program and configure Logix Designer and FactoryTalk View SE systems
• Completion of the PlantPAx Process System Configuration course (PRS013) or
• Recognize industry-specific functions
• Personal experience with process applications, ControlLogix systems and
• Select functions through configuration
programming, including basic ladder logic instructions, and FactoryTalk View SE
• Operate and troubleshoot
applications
• Locate reference material and access ongoing support
• Analyze and interpret application requirements
• Identify the repeatable portions of an application
• Determine the optimum use of the application suite for control applications
• Modify an application
• Coordinate, sequence, and manage equipment
PULP AND PAPER APPLICATION SUITE CONFIGURATION
PRS017
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use a Rockwell Automation application suite to develop effective control applications for a PlantPAx process
automation system. The focus of this course will be on the pulp and paper industry and applications. In this course, students will have the opportunity to create, configure, and
develop working code to address a variety of application scenarios. Students will realize the benefits of using a Rockwell Automation application suite through a combination
of instruction and hands-on experience, which emphasize concepts, common features, and functions.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to maintain and/or troubleshoot a system which utilizes a
• Locate components of the application suite
Rockwell Automation application suite
• Recognize common functions and configuration options in the application suite
PREREQUISITES
• Program and configure Logix Designer and FactoryTalk View SE systems
• Completion of the PlantPAx Process System Configuration course (PRS013) or
• Recognize industry-specific functions
• Personal experience with process applications, ControlLogix systems and
• Select functions through configuration
programming, including basic ladder logic instructions, and FactoryTalk View SE
• Operate and troubleshoot
applications
• Locate reference material and access ongoing support
• Analyze and interpret application requirements
• Identify the repeatable portions of an application
• Determine the optimum use of the application suite for control applications
• Modifying an application
• Coordinate, sequence, and manage equipment
Software
120
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PRS801
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PAVILION8® BASIC MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL OPERATIONS
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course introduces students to the core components of a PlantPAx process control system, including system sizing, process automation controllers, engineering and
operator workstations and process communication networks. During this course, students will focus on designing a PlantPAx system and learn to: architect and size a PlantPAx
system, develop standard process control and advanced process control strategies, create process control applications with the PlantPAx library of add-on instructions and
faceplates, and create new interactive displays for operator workstations including configuring alarming and security. This course includes the basic concepts of the following
components: software (Studio 5000 Logix Designer, Process System Estimator, FactoryTalk View SE, FactoryTalk AssetCentre, FactoryTalk Historian SE, FactoryTalk VantagePoint,
and Fuzzy Designer), networks (EtherNet/IP, HART, foundation Fieldbus, and Profibus PA), and modules (Controller, EtherNet, and Analog HART).
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: System Integrators who have a background in automated process control and
• Define system size with PlantPAx tools
Rockwell Automation products
• Monitor system loading
PREREQUISITES
• Configure PlantPAx process objects, Logix batch sequence manager, advanced
• Completion of the PlantPAx Process System Configuration course (PRS013) or
process control blocks, fuzzy logic, HART messaging, and HART faceplates
• Personal experience with process applications, ControlLogix systems and
• Manage and configure process devices
programming, including basic ladder logic instructions, and FactoryTalk View SE
• Record and report process information
applications
Safety
CEUs 3.5
CEUs 1.4
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
121
Software
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interact, use, and maintain their process control projects using the Pavilion8 Model Predictive Control (MPC) system.
Topics covered in this course are: managing MPC system applications; creating, modifying, and using Pavilion8 console views; interacting with Pavilion8 controllers (adjusting
objectives and tuning); maintaining and troubleshooting Pavilion8 controllers; interacting with and troubleshooting Pavilion8 RAE applications; and administering the
Pavilion8 console system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Operators, supervisors, plant managers, and engineers who are frequent users of an
• Introduce Pavilion8 MPC projects and solutions
installed Pavilion8 MPC system
• Use views
PREREQUISITES
• Tune and troubleshoot a controller
Exposure to the Pavilion8 MPC system through an existing MPC project, and
• Review maintenance
experience in process control is beneficial
• Introduce and troubleshoot Runtime Application Engine (RAE)
• Edit and build views
• Configure Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and their views
• Administer the console
• Manage applications
Motion Control
5 Days
Networks
PRS018
Drives
PLANTPAX PROCESS SYSTEM INTEGRATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PAVILION8 MODELING AND ANALYSIS
PRS802
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to develop inferential models and perform unit optimization using neural-network models. This course is usually
attended in conjunction with the Pavilion8 Integration course (PRS803). Topics covered in this course are: planning the project; collecting an appropriate set of historical data;
preconditioning the data (cut down times, filter, and create new variables); modeling physical systems using neural-networks; building a property predictor; optimizing unit
operations; and building sensor validation models.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Process engineers who are responsible for running steady-state VOA applications
• Outline modeling techniques and environment
online or modifying and extending existing models in online applications
• Process raw data
PREREQUISITES
• Analyze data
Completion of the Pavilion8 Basic Model Predictive Control Operations
• Create the dataset
course (PRS801)
• Build a nonlinear model
• Analyze and improve models
• Use the setpoints and what-ifs feature
• Build a sensor validation model and virtual online analyzer (VOA)
Visualization
PAVILION8 INTEGRATION
PRS803
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to deploy Pavilion8-based models and supporting calculations on-line. This course is usually attended in conjunction
with the Pavilion8 Modeling and Analysis course (PRS802). Topics covered in this course are: overview of the Runtime Application Engine (RAE); creating an on-line
application; configuring a project with the RAE project builder; implementing the RAE client-server architecture; performing detailed testing of communication links; and
connecting a RAE to a Distributed Control System (DCS).
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Outline Runtime Application Environment (RAE)
• Understand the Pavilion Data Interface (PDI)
• Use the application launcher
• Edit taglists
• Develop an online dataset
• Create an RAE project
• Configure and testing the project
• Run the project online
• Implement a Virtual Online Analyzer (VOA)
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Process engineers who are responsible for developing new steady-state VOA
applications or modifying and extending existing steady-state VOA applications
PREREQUISITES
• Completion of the Pavilion8 Modeling and Analysis course (PRS802)
• Basic knowledge of data historians and distributed control systems
Process Control
Software
122
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides an overview of AADvance hardware, software, and troubleshooting. The course consists of a mixture of lecture and hands-on lessons. Upon successful
completion of this course, students should be able to understand how AADvance operates as a fail-safe or fault tolerant controller; understand the configuration limits of the
system; navigate the workbench; monitor programs; lock/force I/O points; isolate faults to the module level by interpreting automatic fault indications; and hot-replace failed
modules without disrupting the systems or process.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting the AADvance system
• Recognize system architectures
PREREQUISITES
• Identify components
• General knowledge of programmable logic controllers (PLCs)
• Install and wire a system
• Background in industrial electronic control principles and practices
• Develop a program
• Download and monitor a project
• Update a running project
• Manage version source control
• Troubleshoot a system
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
123
Software
Process Control
Curriculum Note:
Do not take both PRST9063LD and PRST9064LD because they share similar content.
If you are responsible for designing, building, or programming an AADvance system,
take this course instead: AADvance Comprehensive System Training (PRST9063LD)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PRST9064LD
Motion Control
AADVANCE OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to develop and deploy model predictive control projects using the Pavilion8 Controller. Topics covered in this
course are: planning the Model Predictive Control (MPC) project; building a Virtual Online Analyzer (VOA) for control variable prediction; creating steady-state models
for optimization; planning and executing plant tests; conducting SISO and MIMO dynamic identification; tuning a non-linear dynamic controller; deploying the Pavilion8
controller using client-server architecture; performing detailed testing of communication links; and commissioning the MPC project.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Engineers who are responsible for developing MPC applications or modifying and
• Prepare the controller for online
• Outline model predictive control
extending existing MPC applications
deployment
• Review data requirements
PREREQUISITES
• Run the controller online
• Get and evaluate step test data
Completion of the Pavilion8 Integration course (PRS803)
• Put an example application online
• Identify linear dynamics
• Overview of visualizing controller
• Build nonlinear control models
• Combine steady state and dynamic
data and trends
models
• Review Pavilion8 engine and console
• Assemble the controller model
architecture
• Handle integrating models
• Configure an application in the
• Examine the objective function
console
• Tune the controller
• Troubleshoot an existing application
• Use the simulator
Safety
CEUs 2.8
Drives
4 Days
Networks
PRS804
PAVILION8 CONTROL AND VISUALIZATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PRST9063LD
AADVANCE COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM TRAINING
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides a comprehensive overview of AADvance hardware, software, and troubleshooting. Upon successful completion of this course, students should be able to
understand how AADvance operates as a fail-safe or fault tolerant controller; understand the configuration limits of the system; examine process I/O requirements and select
the appropriate hardware; design and assemble a complete system; use the Workbench to configure and program the system, including communication with external devices;
develop functions, function blocks and programs using standard IEC 61131 programming languages; make hardware expansions to an existing system; and isolate faults to
the module level by interpreting automatic fault indications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for designing, building, programming, and
• Map a binding between controllers
• Recognize system architectures
troubleshooting an AADvance system
• Manage version source control
• Identify components
PREREQUISITES
• Protect a project
• Install and wire a system
• General knowledge of programmable logic controllers (PLCs)
• Import and export elements
• Develop a program
• Background in industrial electronic control principles and practices
• Archive and restore a project
• Simulate and test a project
• Configure OPC communication
• Download and monitor a project
• Troubleshoot a system
• Create and use functions and
Curriculum Note:
• Develop a project
function blocks
Do not take both PRST9063LD and PRST9064LD because they share similar
content. If your responsibilities are limited to maintaining and troubleshooting the
• Update a running project
AADvance system, take this course instead: AADvance Operation, Maintenance, &
Troubleshooting (PRST9064LD)
Visualization
No Time for Class?
Motion Control
Learn Any Time, Any Place, and at Any Pace!
Self-paced training courses are delivered via the
web at Rockwell Automation University Online.
Rockwell Automation University Online
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/self-paced
Your benefits include:
Drives
• Unlimited refresher training opportunities
for one year from date of purchase.
You can repeat courses as many times
as needed.
• Easy budgeting and purchasing with
package offerings.
Process Control
Call 440-646-3434 (option 7) or contact your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor for more information.
Software
124
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Condition Monitoring
Condition Monitoring
Condition Monitoring Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
CERTIFICATIONS
Vibration
Analysis
Fundamentals
Vibration
Analysis:
Level l
Vibration
Analysis:
Level ll
Vibration
Analysis:
Level lll
EK-ICM201 • 3.5 Days
EK-ICM261 • 3.5 Days
EK-ICM301 • 3.5 Days
Optional Exam
Optional Exam
Optional Exam
Last Half Day of Class
Last Half Day of Class
Last Half Day of Class
EK-ICM101 • 3 Days
Time
Waveform
Analysis
EK-ICM281 • 2 Days
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
XM System
Fundamentals
EK-ICM165 • 2 Days
Emonitor
Basic
Enpac
Applications
Emonitor
Advanced
EK-ICM141 • 4 Days
EK-ICM162 • 3 Days
EK-ICM221 • 4 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
126
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Dynamic
Balancing
EK-ICM121 • 3 Days
Optional Exam
Last Half Day of Class
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
127
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
VIBRATION ANALYSIS FUNDAMENTALS
EK-ICM101
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed for the new user of vibration analysis or predictive maintenance instrumentation or for the individual that desires to become more familiar with the
basics of vibration. The relationship between the mechanical condition of machinery and vibration is presented. This background helps show how vibration detection and
analysis can be used in a cost-effective program to identify machinery problems and schedule repairs to avoid costly machine downtime.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics
Maintenance supervisors, mechanics, technicians, engineers or analysts involved in
and tasks:
the maintenance or operation of plant machinery
• Introduction to vibration technology, vibration analysis, and dynamic balancing
PREREQUISITES
• Characteristics of vibration
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Relate vibration frequency, amplitude, and phase to machine condition
Networks
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Review of severity charts
Differences between displacement, velocity, and acceleration
Instruments for vibration detection and analysis
Transducer selection and mounting methods
Calculate trial and correction weights
Identify the most common machinery problems
Implement a predictive maintenance program
Visualization
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: LEVEL I
EK-ICM201
3.5 Days
CEUs 2.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
The fundamental information necessary to implement and operate a successful predictive maintenance program is presented in this seminar. Vibration basics and the
relationship between vibration and machinery condition are reviewed. Proven techniques for specifying meaningful overall and spectrum band alarm limits for a wide
variety of machinery are presented. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment. Case histories are used extensively
throughout the course to emphasize the practical application of the material. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in the maintenance or
• Characteristics of vibration and review of severity charts
operation of plant machinery
• Relate time waveform and vibration frequency
PREREQUISITES
• Digital vs. analog overall vibration measurement
• 6 months or more of field experience
• Vibration transducer overview and selection criteria
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101), or
• Role of spike energy, HFD, and shock pulse and alarm levels
similar, course
• Vibration signature analysis to diagnose machine problems
• How to track rolling element bearing health
• Methods for specifying spectral alarm band levels and frequencies
• Common pitfalls in vibration measurements
Condition Monitoring
128
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CEUs 2.5
COURSE PURPOSE
More in depth coverage and focused demonstration of many of the techniques presented in the Vibration Analysis: Levels I and II courses (EK-ICM201 & EK-ICM261) are
presented in this advanced course. In this advanced course, several powerful techniques, including high frequency envelope signal analysis, time waveform, and deflection
shape analysis, are presented to increase the effectiveness of experienced vibration analysts. The analysis of high speed, low speed, and variable speed machinery is presented
with consideration of the special transducer and instrumentation requirements of these applications. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of
this course. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in the maintenance or
• Introduction to motor current spectral analysis
operation of plant machinery
• Time waveform analysis
PREREQUISITES
• How to analyze low, high, and variable speed machines
• 18 months or more of field experience
• How to evaluate and communicate the achievements of your plant’s condition
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level II (EK-ICM261), or similar,
monitoring program
course is recommended
• How to, and how not to, create effective narrow-band spectral alarm envelopes
• Proper use of high-frequency demodulated and enveloped spectra
• Analysis of DC motors and Operating Deflection Shape (ODS)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
129
Motion Control
3.5 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
EK-ICM301
Drives
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: LEVEL III
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is designed to advance the knowledge base of vibration analysts having one to three years of experience. The course begins with a brief review of Vibration
Analysis: Level I course (EK-ICM201) topics and then moves to more in-depth applications of the illustrated vibration diagnostic chart. Advanced alarm setting techniques
based on statistical analysis are explained for both overall and band alarms. Advanced measurement techniques including natural frequency testing and high frequency
envelope signal analysis are covered. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’
vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in the maintenance or
• Data acquisition and FFT processing for reliable spectral analysis
operation of plant machinery
• Introduction to natural frequency test methods
PREREQUISITES
• Vibration diagnostics using phase analysis and cascade diagrams
• 12 months or more of field experience
• Vibration signature analysis using the illustrated vibration diagnostic chart
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 (EK-ICM201), or similar, course
• Introduction to Narrowband Envelope (statistical) alarms
• Introduction to isolation and damping
• Refine overall and band alarm levels using proven statistical methods
Safety
CEUs 2.5
Process Control
3.5 Days
Networks
EK-ICM261
Condition Monitoring
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: LEVEL II
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
DYNAMIC BALANCING
EK-ICM121
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Identifying and effectively correcting balance problems are the focus of this course. The course begins by defining unbalance and explaining the benefits of properly balanced
rotating machinery. Various methods of solving unbalance problems including single-plane, two-plane, and multi-plane techniques are presented. Each of these solution
methods is taught for both in place field balancing and balancing machine applications. Balancing tolerances and setting specifications for rotor balance are also presented.
An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals who:
• Introduction to dynamic balancing
• Have involvement in balancing and machine reliability
• Use of phase to determine the difference between unbalance and problems that
• Need to learn how to balance or currently do balancing work either on a balancing
resemble unbalance
stand or in the field
• Rigid vs. flexible rotors
• Specify balancing tolerances or design machines
• Critical speed/resonance
• Are involved in any way with the maintenance of machinery
• Single-plane balancing
PREREQUISITES
• Two-plane and multi-plane balancing techniques
There are no prerequisites for this course, but previous balancing experience is
• Dividing and combining correction weights
helpful and completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101), or
• Balancing overhung rotors
similar, course is recommended
• Factors affecting field balancing
• Recommended tolerances
• Use balancing machines
• Weight removal and flat stock conversion charts
TIME WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
EK-ICM281
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course emphasizes the use of time waveform data to accurately identify a wide range of vibration phenomena not easily detected using spectral data. Real-world case
histories are used to demonstrate how time waveform analysis can identify problems likely missed by standard spectral analysis, as well as to confirm results of spectral
analysis. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Experienced analysts who have a thorough understanding of vibration fundamentals
• Introduction to Time Waveform Analysis (TWA)
and want to better use this important diagnostic tool
• Time Waveform benefits and fundamentals
PREREQUISITES
• Setup parameters for TWA
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level ll (EK-ICM261), or similar, course
• Interpretation of Time Waveform data
• 9 to 12 months of experience with vibration spectral analysis is recommended
• Natural frequency testing
• Time synchronous averaging
• Case histories utilizing Time Waveform Analysis
Condition Monitoring
130
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CEUs 2.8
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is geared towards those users of Emonitor who have been using it for less than one year and is designed to put students on the fast track to success using Emonitor.
Students will become familiar with the features and operation of Microsoft Windows and Emonitor. Instruction on the basics of installation, database set-up, and loading/
unloading data collectors guide students through the process of gathering machinery information. Interpreting this information using a variety of plots and reports is then
covered, helping students put their system to work solving machinery problems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Anyone who is new to Emonitor and must use it either daily to complete their duties
• Building a database
or only occasionally to look up data, run reports, or act as a system administrator
• Adding machines, locations, and measurements
PREREQUISITES
• Creating, saving, and using lists
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Using templates and editing existing databases
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101), or similar, course
• Loading and unloading
• Importing data
• Creating custom plots
• Using plots and reports with word processors
• Overview of Windows and Emonitor
• Plot overview and options
• Create reports
• Alarm setup and options
• Overview of frequency items
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
131
Motion Control
4 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
EK-ICM141
Drives
EMONITOR® BASIC
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of XM systems and terminology. This course introduces students to XM system
components and functionality. Students will have an opportunity to use the XM Serial Configuration Utility and RSMACC™ software to perform various software tasks. In
addition, students will be introduced to vibration fundamentals and will have an opportunity to configure proximity probes and accelerometers connected to XM modules.
Connecting non-vibration measurement devices to the appropriate XM module will be discussed.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics
Individuals who have little or no working experience with XM systems
and tasks:
PREREQUISITES
• Introduction to vibration technology
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Characteristics of vibration
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals course (EK-ICM101)
• Overview of RSLinx
is recommended
• Introduction to RSMACC
• Configure XM modules through RSMACC and XM serial configuration utility
• Set-up measurements and alarms for XM systems
• Overview of each XM module
• Use of the XM440 master relay module
• Communicate through the XM500
Safety
CEUs 1.4
Process Control
2 Days
Networks
EK-ICM165
Condition Monitoring
XM® SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
EMONITOR ADVANCED
EK-ICM221
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course helps the established user increase their efficiency and their overall program effectiveness using Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare. In-depth coverage of the program
provides students with the information they need to customize operations for specific machine applications. Set-up of advanced measurements and custom templates tailor
the database to fit difficult machine applications. Customized reporting and plotting allows students to design program output that is most readily understood within their
plant. The statistical alarming capabilities are covered thoroughly in this course, providing students with the most powerful tool for efficient use of overall, band, and
narrow-band spectral alarms.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Established users of Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare who have one or more years of
• Measurement options and advanced list options
experience using the product
• Special measurements
PREREQUISITES
• Load/unload and data import review
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Detailed plotting
• One year or more experience with Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare
• Custom reports and plots
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 (EK-ICM201), or
• Overlay, linking and locking
similar, course
• Statistical alarms and outlier detection
• Spectral band and narrow-band alarming
• Configuration and use frequency items
Visualization
ENPAC® APPLICATIONS
EK-ICM162
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course covers the full range of operations of the Enpac 1200 and Enpac 2500, from basic to advanced, providing excellent information for beginning or experienced Enpac
users. Basic operations including loading, unloading, and collecting overall and spectrum data are presented, as well as advanced measurement techniques, such as time
waveform collection, time synchronous averaging, phase measurement, and spike energy spectrum collection. The Enpac two-plane balancing and two-channel applications
are covered in this course.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals who use the Enpac and would like to learn more about the instrument’s
• Enpac operating program and setup options
data collection and vibration analysis capabilities
• Route configuration and data collection options
PREREQUISITES
• Transfer of data between the Enpac and Emonitor
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101), or
• Off route data collection and transfer to Emonitor
similar, course
• Time Synchronous measurements
•
Completion
of the Emonitor Basic course (EK-ICM141) is recommended
• Cross channel phase
• 3 to 6 months of experience with the Enpac 1200 or Enpac 2500 is recommended
• Two-channel measurements
• ESP and spike energy overview
• Phase measurements
• Balancing with the Enpac
Condition Monitoring
132
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Software
Software
Software
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Software
Rockwell Automation software courses address
today’s diverse plant information needs, such as:
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
• Production management – real-time coordination
across plant-wide production processes
• Data management – tools and methods used
for collecting, transforming, and integrating
production information
• Asset management – optimizing maintenance
and plant operations to improve resource
availability
• Performance and visibility – offering a window
into the process so plant personnel can make
better decisions
Networks
Visualization
Real-time exchange of information between
manufacturing and the rest of your company is
critical for making business decisions that improve
responsiveness, increase productivity, and reduce
costs. With Rockwell Automation software courses,
you can learn how to integrate your factory floor.
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE NUMBER COURSE NAME
COURSE LENGTH
FTAC
FactoryTalk AssetCentre System Design and Implementation
3 Days
RS-MSSQLB
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk Introduction
2 Days
FTM
FactoryTalk Metrics Configuration
3 Days
RS-RSMACC
RSMACC Installation and Configuration
3 Days
RS-FTTM
FactoryTalk Transaction Manager
3 Days
RS-RSTS101-LD
RSTestStand™ Enterprise Project Development
2 Days
RS-FTHSEC
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Configuration and Data
Collection
3.5 Days
FTVP
FactoryTalk VantagePoint Configuration and Reporting
3 Days
VBAFTVSE
Microsoft VBA Configuration with FactoryTalk View SE
Applications
4 Days
FactoryTalk Energy Metrixs Software Configuration in an
Energy Monitoring System
2 Days
FTEM
134
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Software
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RS-MSSQLB
Motion Control
MICROSOFT SQL SERVER FOR FACTORYTALK INTRODUCTION
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the skills required to use FactoryTalk AssetCentre software to maximize their control system investment and manage assets effectively.
Throughout the course, students will learn how to design a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system, install and configure the software, secure access to the control system, track users’
actions, manage asset configuration files, provide backup and recovery of operating asset configurations, and troubleshoot their system using FactoryTalk AssetCentre. The
instructor will demonstrate how to perform all of the tasks covered in this course. Students will then be given an opportunity to practice these tasks using a procedures guide
and a VMware® image designed to imitate a real production facility.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to securely and centrally manage automation production
• Establish a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system architecture
environments using FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
• Identify:
PREREQUISITES
- Assets, files, and an organization scheme for a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- Basic additional software requirements for a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system
• Knowledge of your production environment
• Install the required software for a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system
• Configure asset tree organization in FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
• Add and configure assets
• Backup and restore critical files
• Archive files and manage archive files
• Configure disaster recovery
• Find a system event using FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
• Plan security for a FactoryTalk AssetCentre system
• Configure basic FactoryTalk security in the FactoryTalk directory
• Configure system and product policy security in the FactoryTalk directory
• Configure security within FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
• Troubleshoot a system using FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
Networks
CEUs 2.1
CEUs 2.1
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
135
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the technical skills required to implement a database solution with Microsoft SQL Server client/server database management system.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who will use FactoryTalk software as the database solution for projects
• Describe the elements of Microsoft SQL server and the Transact-SQL language
used in conjunction with Microsoft SQL Server client/server database management
• Describe and configure the data storage architecture of SQL server
system
• Create and manage files, file groups, databases, tables, and transaction logs
PREREQUISITES
• Enforce data integrity using constraints, defaults, and rules
• Experience using the Microsoft Windows NT® server network operating system
• Create and maintain indexes
• Completion of a basic programmable controller course
• Write queries that retrieve and modify data using joins and subqueries
• Create views of data
Drives
3 Days
Visualization
FTAC
Drives/MCC
FACTORYTALK ASSETCENTRE SYSTEM DESIGN
AND IMPLEMENTATION
Software
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FACTORYTALK METRICS CONFIGURATION
FTM
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
FactoryTalk Metrics is a complete, windows-based solution for the analysis of time-series process and production data. FactoryTalk Metrics provides a set of tools to analyze
the performance of production assets. FactoryTalk Metrics provides a performance rating, based on the widely used Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) model, for every
production asset. The OEE metric provides a simple way to quickly determine if a production asset is performing adequately. In this course, students will learn to use the
reporting, graphing, and querying functionality that make FactoryTalk a complete and very easy-to-use solution for data collection and analysis.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Engineers and plant managers who need to collect, analyze, and report PLC data
topics and tasks:
PREREQUISITES
• Introduction to MSSQL for FactoryTalk Metrics
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Create a FactoryTalk Metrics database and user
• Basic understanding of Allen-Bradley PLC processors
• Configure a system DSN
• Knowledge of basic client/server database concepts is recommended, but
• Install FactoryTalk Metrics software
not required
• Administrate FactoryTalk Metrics
•
Familiarity
with basic networking concepts is strongly recommended, but
• Create FactoryTalk Metrics plant model
not
required
• Configure FactoryTalk Metrics
• Knowledge or experience with Microsoft SQL Server is helpful
- Workcell
- Performance parameter events
- Workcell schedules
- Fault metrics
- Reports
• Create FactoryTalk Metrics reports and filters
• Use FactoryTalk Metrics import/export
• Using report expert
RSMACC INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
RS-RSMACC
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
The purpose of this course is to provide students with fundamental information on the RSMACC software package, to include planning an RSMACC system, installation,
configuration, and change management. This course provides information on installation and configuration of network health server components and network health
diagnostic scheduler components. Students will receive hands-on practice using the various RSMACC components in live lab networked environments.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Plan an RSMACC system
• Have recently purchased an RSMACC system
• Install RSMACC server components on server machine
• Have systems installed and wish to upgrade their knowledge of Change
• Configure RSMACC server
Management, Network Health, Condition Monitoring, or AAM Components
• Start and complete RSMACC server configuration
PREREQUISITES
• Install RSMACC client components on client machine
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure RSMACC client machine
• Basic understanding of databases
• Plan, install, and configure RSMACC change management
• Plan, install, and configure RSMACC network health components
• Install and configure network health diagnostic scheduler components
Condition Monitoring
136
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Software
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with a working knowledge of the RSTestStand Enterprise control systems simulation software. Upon completion of this course, students will
gain the skills to create, validate, troubleshoot, and tune RSTestStand Enterprise Projects using RSTestStand simulation software. This course provides hands-on practices to
reinforce the tasks involved in designing, testing, and implementing an effective simulation model of a machine and/or process. From creating and running project models
and run-time scenarios to animating scenes and binding actions to resources, students will have the opportunity to fully understand the capabilities of RSTestStand Enterprise
simulations and the benefits of this virtual modeling process with regard to start-up time, design flaw identification, problem resolution, and end-user training.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for designing, starting up, installing, and
• Create a project model
troubleshooting automation control systems and equipment
• Create and modify resources
PREREQUISITES
• Build operator consoles and create a connection diagram
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Simulate and validate a project model
• Basic understanding of PLC processors or completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and
• Create run-time scenarios
RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Create, animate, and control scenes
• Knowledge of basic VB scripting concepts
• Create and run a Part Flow Model and bind actions to resources
• Familiarity with basic OPC and detailed understanding of RSLinx software
• Build logical views
is recommended
• Troubleshoot and tune RSTestStand Enterprise projects using productivity tools
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
137
Motion Control
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RS-RSTS101-LD
Drives
RSTESTSTAND ENTERPRISE PROJECT DEVELOPMENT
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn about configuring FactoryTalk Transaction Manager in a Microsoft SQL Server environment. Students will also work with FactoryTalk Services
Platform and Transaction Manager components. Students will bind processor datapoints to SQL database fields using the FactoryTalk graphic interface. Upon completion of
this course, students will be able to: create, modify, save, restore, and delete single-computer and distributed FactoryTalk configurations; edit a running transaction that use
the bind transaction result option; understand the concepts for creating transactions; understand the reasons for handshaking with the control system; and configure and use
the update object.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Engineers, plant managers, and maintenance personnel who use PLC data to
• Edit a running FactoryTalk Transaction Manager application
manage or maintain plant processes
• Configure a unidirectional transaction with bind transaction result
PREREQUISITES
• Understand handshaking errors and data/loss results
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Recognize FactoryTalk Transaction Manager built-in functions
• Experience with SQL database software
• Configure math functions minimum maximum and average
• Configure advance functions
• Configure FactoryTalk Transaction Manager
- Insert stored procedures
- Update object
- XML import/export
- Trigger and storage options
- Error logging
- On high scan trigger
- Stored procedures
• Move a FactoryTalk Transaction Manager application
Networks
CEUs 2.1
Process Control
3 Days
Visualization
RS-FTTM
Condition Monitoring
FACTORYTALK TRANSACTION MANAGER
Software
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FACTORYTALK HISTORIAN SITE EDITION
CONFIGURATION AND DATA COLLECTION
RS-FTHSEC
3.5 Days
CEUs 2.5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will provide students with an overview of the various FactoryTalk Historian tools for collecting data. Students will learn how to configure a FactoryTalk Historian Site
Edition system and how to use Microsoft Excel to create and modify FactoryTalk Historian tags. During the course, students will learn how to apply exception and compression
to filter data to be archived. Students will be given an opportunity to compare the use of Polled versus Advised data collection modes and learn about data buffering, layers/
methods of redundancy, archive management and backup. Upon completion of the course, students will have gained exposure to the many aspects of the FactoryTalk
Historian system and be able to install and configure FactoryTalk Historian to collect data.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be knowledgeable about the following Field engineers, MPS, pre-sales consultants, and support individuals who need to
topics and tasks:
install and configure FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition for data collection
• FactoryTalk Historian tag types
PREREQUISITES
• Work with digital states
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Backfill data into FactoryTalk Historian server
• Understand Historian tags and use Excel tag configurator, exception & compression • Completion of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or knowledge of common ControlLogix
• Buffer disturbed FTLD interface data
terminology and the ability to program and interpret basic ladder logic
• Configure event trigger, event framing, performance equations/totalizers, interface
instructions in Logix Designer software
redundancy, and buffering
• Use BatchView
• Use and display audit information
• Schedule backups of Historian data
• Use FactoryTalk VantagePoint, health points, performance monitor tags, archive
management tools, FactoryTalk View SE to display Historian data and server collective
FACTORYTALK VANTAGEPOINT CONFIGURATION AND REPORTING
FTVP
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn various tools to analyze and display data using FactoryTalk VantagePoint and/or VantagePoint EMI. The course covers how to use the analysis
and reporting tools to create trends, Excel reports, and dashboards. Students will have an opportunity to use the Portal and configure it to display content in various ways. The
course also focuses on extending the model in the product and configuring security. Upon completion of the course, students will be able to utilize many tools and techniques
for the display, analysis and reporting of data using FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Developers or engineers who will work with FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI
• Create a FactoryTalk connector
applications and need to view, analyze, and create reports
• Create and publish trends and VantagePoint Excel reports
PREREQUISITES
• Create and use types and type reports in VantagePoint
Experience with:
• Pass parameters to reports using hyperlinks
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008
• Create composite and dashboard reports
• Microsoft Office Excel 2010
• Use incuity tags for data entry, calculated tags, and status indicators
• ControlLogix and FactoryTalk products and terminology
• Customize the VantagePoint portal
• Create and use a Microsoft SQL server database connector
• Use VantagePoint security
• Import ControlLogix structures
138
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Software
CEUs 1.4
COURSE PURPOSE
With FactoryTalk EnergyMetrix, students can capture, analyze, store, and share energy data across their entire enterprise using a simple Web browser. This makes it easy to
distribute the knowledge they need to optimize energy consumption, which can help improve productivity while lowering energy costs. This course provides students with
an understanding of FactoryTalk EnergyMetrix. This course also shows students how to navigate the FactoryTalk EnergyMetrix Web interface and understand the information it
contains; use FactoryTalk EnergyMetrix software to provide standard and customized reports of energy usage and costs; and configure all the components of an EnergyMetrix
software installation.
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Managers, engineers, and technical specialists who need to configure FactoryTalk
EnergyMetrix software in order to solve on-going, energy-related challenges
• Create:
• Log in
- Billing
- A multi• Load profiles
PREREQUISITES
reports
purpose
• View standard reports
• Basic understanding of three-phase electric power
- A system
report using
• Generate billing reports
• Basic understanding of Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture products,
configuration
grid & charts
• Configure an application and a
networks, and software
- Reports
derived tag
• Basic understanding of PowerMonitor products
• Use ChartsPlus and ReportsPlus
• Create a new domain and group
• Basic understanding of internet server applications, Microsoft SQL Server and
• Back up EnergyMetrix database
• Set up a:
.NET scripting
- Manual meter • Shrink a transaction log
- Device
• Run reports automatically
- Alarm
- Meter and
- Custom page • Copy devices and meters
meter tags
- Personalized
- Simple rate
start page
schedule
- Role and
privileges
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
139
Motion Control
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FTEM
Drives
FACTORYTALK ENERGYMETRIX™ SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
IN AN ENERGY MONITORING SYSTEM
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
In this course, students will learn to develop and implement Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) procedures or subroutines within a FactoryTalk View SE project. The course
covers VBA concepts, an overview of the VBA language, the FactoryTalk View SE software object model, and the creation, modification, and execution of VBA procedures
from within FactoryTalk View SE software. Students will learn the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel, Word, and Access object models. Interacting with these object models
from within the FactoryTalk View SE VBA procedures will allow students to create applications that perform such tasks as creating and printing Word documents or Excel
spreadsheets with charts, and reading and writing to Access database files.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Engineers who wish to implement VBA procedures within their FactoryTalk View SE
• Configure VBA within a FactoryTalk View SE project
projects to meet application requirements
• Configure UserForms and events in FactoryTalk View SE VBA
PREREQUISITES
• Debug tools and error handling in VBA
• Familiarity with the Windows XP user interface and FactoryTalk View SE software
• Trigger a command on a client from an HMI server
• Familiarity with processors
• Access the FactoryTalk View SE object model from an external
automation controller
• Control Microsoft Excel, Word, and Access with VBA
• Configure OPC automation with VBA
• Configure a trend object
Safety
CEUs 2.8
Process Control
4 Days
Networks
VBAFTVSE
Condition Monitoring
MICROSOFT VBA CONFIGURATION WITH
FACTORYTALK VIEW SE APPLICATIONS
Software
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Instructor-Led Training
In a World of Technology, Your People Make the Difference
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Take Advantage of the
Rockwell Automation Difference
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Improving human performance and
overall profitability begins with your
investment in instructor-led training
Motion Control
Drives
Achieving your peak manufacturing performance
requires a blend of technologies and processes driven
by highly trained employees. Rockwell Automation
instructor-led training delivers just that. Factory-trained
instructors understand your production issues and bring
a broad range of hands-on experience and product
expertise from a variety of industries and manufacturing
environments. Because our instructors are well-versed
in implementing products across various environments,
you can be certain that the crucial knowledge will
transfer to your plant floor.
• Subject-Matter Expertise – our technologies,
our curriculum
• Experienced Technical Instructors–
real-world experience and product expertise
• Course Materials – award-winning,
student materials for classroom use and
ongoing review
• Pre- and Posttesting – testing to quantify
knowledge transfer and to demonstrate a
return on investment
• Workstations – factory simulation tools for
experiential learning
• Job Aids – procedures and troubleshooting
tools for quicker and accurate performance
and problem-resolution of the plant floor
• International Association for Continuing
Education and Training – authorized
provider status offers valuable CEUs for
professional development
Process Control
Rockwell Automation ensures that your employees
receive training that is job task relevant for your
needs — students are trained on what they need to
accomplish and be able to perform. Task based training
requires active participation in the classroom because
tasks build upon each other and increase in complexity,
resulting in practice that guarantees effective job
performance after the training is completed.
Condition Monitoring
140
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
Virtual Classroom
Virtual Classroom Curriculum Map
UNDERSTAND
SAFETY STANDARDS
Machine Functional
Safety and ISO 13849
System Design:
Risk Assessment
NFPA 70E 2015 Arc Flash Awareness
VC-SFT10615
(4) 90-min. Sessions
VC-MFSISO-01
120-min. Session
PROGRAM OR DESIGN
Also
Available
in Spanish
Also
Available
in Spanish
Ladder Logic Basics
with CompactLogix
Starter Workstation
VC-LLB
(5) 120-min. Sessions
FactoryTalk
ViewPoint
Implementation
Machine-Level
Design Optimization:
Drive and Motor Selection
VC-FTVIEW-01
90-min. Session
VC-MLDO-01
90-min. Session
Machine-Level
Design Optimization:
Networks, Controller,
and I/O Selection
VC-MLDO-02
120-min. Session
Machine Level Design
Optimization Bundle:
VC-MLDO
MAINTAIN OR TROUBLESHOOT
PowerFlex 755 Floor
Mounted Drives:
Pre-Installation Planning
Micro850
Installation, Wiring,
and Troubleshooting
with Micro850 Workstation
VC-PF755H-01
120-min. Session
VC-M850
(5) 120-min.
n.
Sessions
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
142
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
POINT I/O
Implementation
Choosing an
EtherNet/IP Network
Topology and Configuring
the Network in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer Project
Adding Drives
and Configuring
Axes for Control Over an
EtherNet/IP Network in a Studio
5000 Logix Designer Project
Commissioning
Axes for Control Over an
EtherNet/IP Network Using
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
VC-CCN300-01
120-min. Session
VC-CCN300-02
120-min. Session
VC-CCN300-03
120-min. Session
Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP Bundle:
VC-CCN300B
VC-PIO
120-min. Session
PowerFlex 523/525
Drives with
PowerFlex 525 Drive Kit:
Communications and
Programming
VC-PF523P
nss
(2) 90-min. Sessions
Includes Hardware Kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
143
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Virtual Classroom
LADDER LOGIC BASICS WITH
COMPACTLOGIX STARTER WORKSTATION
VC-LLB
Virtual
Classroom
(5) 120-min. Sessions
CEUs 1.0
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to write and test basic ladder logic code and how to employ common programming strategies and best practices. Students will learn how
to select and program bit, timer, counter, compare, and move instructions. Examples and labs will use Studio 5000 Logix Designer and a CompactLogix controller; however, the
general ladder logic concepts covered in this course are applicable to most common programmable controllers.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Beginning programmers or individuals who are required to edit ladder logic
• Review basic logic flow
PREREQUISITES
• Convert scenarios to if – then statements
A general knowledge of automation, including the general purpose of a controller,
• Convert if – then statements to simple rungs
data, and I/O; and the purpose of common devices like push buttons, pilot lights,
• Enter ladder logic into software
limit switches, relays, contractors, and solenoids is required
• Download a project
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• Monitor the ladder logic
• Tie the alias to an existing address
• A computer and phone
• Apply bit instructions and common ladder logic strategies
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer (version 21) must be installed and activated. The
• Select a class of instruction categories
virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
• Select and integrate timers and counters
installation of the software if students do not have it.
• Select and integrate compare and move instructions
• CompactLogix starter workstation (shipped prior to class)
• Combine compare with move instructions
Visualization
MACHINE FUNCTIONAL SAFETY AND ISO 13849
SYSTEM DESIGN: RISK ASSESSMENT
VC-MFSISO-01
Virtual
Classroom
120 Min. Session
CEUs 0.2
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course teaches students to use a structured risk assessment process based on ISO 13849. Students will learn how to identify the hazards of a machine, estimate the level
of risk, and choose risk reduction techniques. During the exercises, students will make their decisions using the terms and rating system from ISO 13849. As students work
through the process, they will build documentation that they can use throughout the lifecycle of their machines.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Design engineers, maintenance managers, or people in health and safety roles
• Define the scope of the risk assessment
PREREQUISITES
• Identify the hazards
Experience with the design, development, maintenance, or supervision of
• Determine the risk level of each hazard
industrial automation systems is required
• Identify potential risk reduction techniques
• Choose risk reduction techniques
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• Write a risk assessment report
A computer and phone
Condition Monitoring
Software
144
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Virtual Classroom
(4) 90 Min. Sessions
CEUs 0.15 each
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students to assess arc flash hazards and act to mitigate them by selecting appropriate PPE and determining shock protection and arc flash boundaries.
Students will learn how to use NFPA 70E 2015 and approach boundary calculation methods to determine approach boundaries. This course provides some of the key
requirements necessary to become a “qualified” person as defined in OSHA 1910.269, 332, 333, and NFPA 70E, such as: determining approach distances; being capable of
using special precautionary techniques, PPE, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools; receiving safety training to recognize and avoid hazards.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals required to work in accordance with NFPA 70E or who will be exposed to
• Determine appropriate PPE
work areas designated by an arc flash boundary
• Determine thermal and shock boundaries
PREREQUISITES
• Perform bolted fault arc flash calculations
• Experience distinguishing exposed live parts from other parts of
• Perform arc fault calculations
electrical equipment
• Determining nominal system voltage of exposed live parts
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• Skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical
• A computer and phone
equipment and installations
• A calculator must be available for Session 2
• A scientific calculator must be available for Session 3 and Session 4
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Virtual
Classroom
Safety
VC-SFT10615
Networks
NFPA 70E 2015–
ARC FLASH AWARENESS
VC-MLDO-01
90 Minutes
CEUs 0.15
COURSE PURPOSE
This course covers best practices for architecting control solutions for machines. The instructor will show students how to size and select drives and motors and then they will
practice these tasks with an example application. The design tools and best practices covered in the course aim to optimize and reduce build time with machine-level design.
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers and OEMs who design machine-level control applications
PREREQUISITES
There are no prerequisites for this course; however, experience with designing
machine-level control applications is helpful
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a motion profile, a mechanism, and transmissions
• Select a motor and drive
Motion Control
Virtual
Classroom
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
145
Software
Condition Monitoring
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Motion Analyzer software, version 6.1, must be installed and activated. The virtual
classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary installation
of the software if students do not have it.
Process Control
MACHINE-LEVEL DESIGN OPTIMIZATION:
DRIVE AND MOTOR SELECTION
Visualization
Students can use the calculator found in Microsoft Windows>Programs>Accessories
for all sessions.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Virtual Classroom
MACHINE-LEVEL DESIGN OPTIMIZATION:
NETWORKS, CONTROLLER, AND I/O SELECTION
VC-MLDO-02
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course covers best practices for architecting control solutions for machines. The instructor will show students how to size and select control platforms and machine-level
networks and then they will practice these tasks with an example application. The design tools and best practices covered in the course aim to optimize and reduce build time
with machine-level design.
Safety
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Select network topology/components and a controller and I/O
• Add devices to the network
• Verify network loading
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers and OEMs who design machine-level control applications
PREREQUISITES
There are no prerequisites for this course; however, experience with designing
machine-level control applications is helpful
Networks
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Integrated Architecture Builder software, version 9.1, must be installed
and activated. The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to
obtain a temporary installation of the software if students do not have it.
Visualization
VC-FTVIEW-01
FACTORYTALK VIEWPOINT IMPLEMENTATION
Virtual
Classroom
90 Minutes
CEUs 0.15
Motion Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to monitor their FactoryTalk View ME projects in a web browser. This course will also show students how to create a new FactoryTalk View
ME web application and connect to an existing FactoryTalk View ME web application via Ethernet from a PanelView Plus.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to monitor installations from any remote location with
• Verify client requirements
Internet access, but without FactoryTalk View ME software
• Verify server requirements
PREREQUISITES
• Create a new ME web application
Experience using FactoryTalk View ME software and PanelView Plus programming
• Connect to an existing ME web application
is required. Specifically, students must know how to create .apa files and download
• Troubleshoot common integration problems
files to PanelView Plus terminals
Process Control
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
A computer and phone
Condition Monitoring
Software
146
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ADDING DRIVES AND CONFIGURING AXES FOR
CONTROL OVER AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK
IN A STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER PROJECT
Visualization
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
VC-CCN300-02
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an Ethernet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Choose a network topology
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Choose network components
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a network
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
• Add the motion group and axes
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
Safety
CEUs 0.2
CEUs 0.2
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
147
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an Ethernet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Add drives
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Configure axes
PREREQUISITES
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Motion Control
120 Minutes
Drives
Virtual
Classroom
Networks
VC-CCN300-01
Process Control
CHOOSING AN ETHERNET/IP NETWORK TOPOLOGY AND
CONFIGURING THE NETWORK IN A STUDIO 5000
LOGIX DESIGNER PROJECT
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Virtual Classroom
COMMISSIONING AXES FOR CONTROL OVER AN
ETHERNET/IP NETWORK USING THE
STUDIO 5000 LOGIX DESIGNER APPLICATION
VC-CCN300-03
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to choose an EtherNet/IP network topology and components, configure controllers and axes, and add Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755
drives for control over an Ethernet/IP network. This course will also show students how to start up the network, run hook up tests, autotune axes, and test axes with motion
direct commands.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who design and develop motion control applications and who will be
• Start up an EtherNet/IP network
working with drives controlled over an EtherNet/IP networks
• Test hardware
PREREQUISITES
• Autotune axes
Experience developing motion control applications and working with
• Test axis performance
Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
Networks
TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer software (version 21) must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Visualization
POWERFLEX 523/525 DRIVES WITH POWERFLEX 525
DRIVE KIT: COMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAMMING
VC-PF523P
Virtual
Classroom
(2) 90-min Sessions
CEUs 0.3
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to program drive parameters for a drive application. This course will teach students how to create a custom parameter
group based upon drive applications. Throughout this course, the instructor will cover a range of topics from establishing communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via
a USB connection and EtherNet/IP network to testing parameters of a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the HIM.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who have drive programming experience but are new to PowerFlex
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 523/525 drive via a USB connection
component-class drives
• Establish communications with a PowerFlex 525 drive via an EtherNet/IP network
PREREQUISITES
• Configure a PowerFlex 523/525 drive using the Startup Wizard in Connected
• Knowledge of AC/DC drive fundamentals and drives programming experience
Components Workbench software
• Basic working knowledge of safe electrical practices including, but not limited to:
• Create a CustomView parameter group
- Understanding electricity, how it works, and the dangers involved in working
• Edit and test parameters using the HIM
with electricity
- Identifying hazardous conditions
- Adhering to all safety regulations
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• PowerFlex 525 drive kit (shipped prior to class)
• A computer and phone
• Connected Components Workbench software must be installed and activated.
The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a temporary
installation of the software if students do not have it.
Software
148
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
(5) 120-Min. Sessions
CEUs 1.0
COURSE PURPOSE
After completing this course, students should be able to install and wire Micro850 controllers, plug-in and expansion I/O modules, power supplies, and I/O devices. This course
will teach students how to troubleshoot basic controller and power supply problems. Throughout this course, the instructor will cover a range of topics from understanding the
basics of control systems and wiring, to installing I/O devices and identifying common Micro850 problems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are new to controllers and need to install and wire Micro850
• Install a Micro850 controller, a power supply, I/O devices, and plug-in and
system components
expansion I/O modules
PREREQUISITES
• Wire a Micro850 controller and a power supply
Basic working knowledge of safe electrical practices including but not limited to:
• Wire I/O devices to a Micro850 controller
• Understanding electricity, how it works, and the dangers involved in working
• Ensure proper electrical connection of I/O devices
with electricity
• Isolate the cause of a fault or failure condition
• Identifying hazardous conditions
• Troubleshoot a Micro850 controller and power supply
• Adhering to all safety regulations
• Resolve common controller and power supply faults
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• Micro850 workstation (shipped unassembled, prior to class)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
149
Motion Control
Virtual
Classroom
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Virtual Classroom
VC-M850
Drives
MICRO850 INSTALLATION, WIRING, AND
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH MICRO850 WORKSTATION
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will help students plan for the successful installation of PowerFlex 755 floor-mounted, frame 8 and larger (300 Hp (200 kW) and above) drives. Students will
explore common drive pre-installation topics including specific wiring, mounting, fusing, and option card installation considerations for floor-mounted PowerFlex 755 units.
During this course, students will use a variety of available technical documents and tools to help them prepare for installation situations unique to these drives.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals responsible for installing Frame 8 and larger PowerFlex 755 drives
• Interpret and verify floor mounted drive catalog numbers
PREREQUISITES
• Prepare for frame 8 and larger drive mounting
• Knowledge of safe electrical practices
• Verify drive option card locations
• Prior experience working with AC drives
• Plan for floor mounted drive
• Experience with wall-mounted (frame 1…7) PowerFlex 750-series drives is
• Fuse and wire
helpful, but not required
• Plan floor mounted drive integration with a motor control center
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A computer and phone
Safety
CEUs 0.2
Process Control
120 Minutes
Condition Monitoring
Virtual
Classroom
Networks
VC-PF755H-01
Software
POWERFLEX 755 FLOOR MOUNTED DRIVES:
PRE-INSTALLATION PLANNING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Virtual Classroom
VC-PIO
POINT I/O IMPLEMENTATION
Virtual
Classroom
120 Minutes
CEUs 0.2
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This course will teach students how to implement a POINT I/O system from determining the quantity and type of I/O needed to testing your system. This course will also show
students how to calculate power requirements and decide whether an expansion power supply will be needed. Students will also add and configure an Ethernet adapter and
I/O modules in a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project.
Safety
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Size a POINT I/O control system
• Set the EtherNet/IP address of an Ethernet adapter
• Configure POINT I/O control system components in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer project
• Test POINT I/O control system components
Networks
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
• A computer and phone
• The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application (version 21) must be installed and
activated. The virtual classroom invitation will provide details on how to obtain a
temporary installation of the software if students do not have it.
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Control engineers who design and develop control applications and who will be
working with POINT I/O system components over an EtherNet/IP™ network
PREREQUISITES
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer experience or one of the following courses:
- Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting (CCP299)
- Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1: CompactLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting (CCP298)
• Knowledge of Ethernet fundamentals
• Knowledge of safe electrical practices
• Knowledge of electrical principles such as voltage, current, and power
Visualization
Self-Paced Course!
Modular Programming for Machine Applications
Motion Control
In this self-paced course, you are guided by a technical
expert who will provide you with knowledge to produce
a software design specification for a machine or line of
machines. The specification will follow modular programming
guidelines and you will follow the technical expert through
video and audio instructions.
Drives
Process Control
By using a modular approach to your software design,
your software becomes much easier to reuse from project
to project. As your base of modular code increases, your
development time decreases. And, the quality of the code
increases each time you refine and re-use it.
Student kit includes:
Condition Monitoring
•
•
•
•
Software
150
Training DVD
Modular programming design guide
PackML state model worksheet
Related job aids and technical
documentation on disk to assist
you with modular programming
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
To purchase: Catalog #ABTMODPROG
Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales office, or call 440-646-3434 (option 7).
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Craft Skills and Mechanical Concepts
CRAFT SKILLS AND MECHANICAL CONCEPTS
ELECTRICAL
Craft skills and mechanical courses are available only as private, on-site classes, unless otherwise noted.
MAINTAIN
Basic Electricity - DC
EM-101 • 5 Days
Basic AC/DC
Concepts
EM-101A • 5 Days
Electrical Print Reading
EM-102 • 10 Days
EM-103 • 3 Days
AC and DC
Generator Theory
Industrial Electronics
Transformers
Motor Theory
EM-200 • 5 Days
EM-201 • 3 Days
EM-202 • 3 Days
Instrumentation I
Instrumentation II
Valves and
Valve Actuators
Analytical
Measurement
EM-400A • 1 Day
EM-400B • 2 Days
EM-401 • 5 Days
EM-402 • 1 Day
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
152
Basic Electricity- AC
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in US
EM-203 • 2 Days
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in Canada
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Test Equipment
Wiring
Batteries
Conduit Bending
EM-104 • 3 Days
EM-105 • 3 Days
EM-106 • 1 Day
EM-108 • 3 Days
Motor Control
DC Cranes and Controls
Basic Digital Circuits
EM-204 • 5 Days
EM-205 • 3 Days
Electrical
Troubleshooting
and Motor Control
EM-303 • 5 Days
EM-206 • 5 Days
Process Control
Fundamentals
Industrial Electrical
Controls Fundamentals
Fundamentals
of Electricity
EM-403 • 5 Days
MFG213 • 4 Days
MFG244 • 1 Day
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Basic Mathematics
GEN-001 • 5 Days
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
153
ELECTRICAL TRACKS
MOTORS - AC
Electric Safety and Lockout
SAF-001 • 1 Day
Electric Safety and Lockout
SAF-001 • 1 Day
Electric Safety and Lockout
SAF-001 • 1 Day
Basic Electricity - DC
EM-101 • 5 Days
Basic Electricity- AC
EM-102 • 10 Days
Electrical Print Reading
EM-103 • 3 Days
Electrical Print Reading
EM-103 • 3 Days
Electrical Print Reading
EM-103 • 3 Days
Test Equipment
EM-104 • 3 Days
Test Equipment
EM-104 • 3 Days
Test Equipment
EM-104 • 3 Days
Instrumentation I
EM-400A • 1 Day
Wiring
EM-105 • 3 Days
Wiring
EM-105 • 3 Days
Instrumentation II
EM-400B • 2 Days
Motor Theory
EM-202 • 3 Days
Motor Theory
EM-202 • 3 Days
Valves and Valve Actuators
EM-401 • 5 Days
AC and DC Generator Theory
EM-203 • 2 Days
Electrical Troubleshooting and Motor
M t Control
C t l
EM-206 • 5 Days
Analytical Measurement
EM-402 • 1 Day
Process Control Fundamentals
EM-403 • 5 Days
Electrical Troubleshooting
ti
EM-206 • 5 Days
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in US
154
INSTRUMENTATION
MOTORS - DC
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in Canada
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
The Electrical Tracks are specialty areas that you can study within the
Craft Skills and Mechanical Concepts Curriculum.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
155
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICAL CONTROLS FUNDAMENTALS
MFG213
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the knowledge and skills required to install, maintain and troubleshoot machine controls. At the completion of this course, students will be
able to: define the safety considerations that must be observed when installing, checking, or locking out electrical equipment; define uses and functions of input and output
devices, relays, and motors; demonstrate the reading of schematic diagrams and logic; define an open and short condition and perform voltage and current measurements;
demonstrate the proper use of the following test equipment in lab to measure voltage, current, resistance and continuity: VOM, DVM, Multi-meters, continuity tester, and amp
probe; approximate secondary voltage, secondary current, and primary current of a transformer when given its turns ratio, primary voltage and secondary load; identify the
proper wiring configurations of a control transformer’s primary current for 240V and 480V operation; and approximate a transformer’s maximum primary current for 480V
operation, using the nameplate information.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Individuals who are responsible for installing, maintaining, and troubleshooting of
• Basic machine control systems and
• Electrical fundamentals and safety
electromechanical machine controls
build circuits
• Input and output devices
PREREQUISITES
• Distribution
• Disconnect devices
Familiarity with basic electricity
• Circuit troubleshooting
• Contactors
• Grounded and ungrounded
• Multimeter use
control circuits
• Logic devices
• Schematic, logic and ladder diagrams
Visualization
BASIC ELECTRICITY — DC
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-101
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides information on the basic concepts of DC electricity and magnetism, including electrostatics, basic circuit concepts, and measurement of electrical
quantities and associated numerical concepts, Ohm’s Law, practical circuits, electromagnetism, and electrical measurements. There are hands-on exercises for device operation
and simple circuit construction and analysis.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Define electrical terms and basic circuit constructs (resistance, voltage,
PREREQUISITES
and current)
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List electrical safety requirements
• Distinguish conductors and insulators
• Explain electrical energy production and how electricity is derived from atoms
• Construct simple circuits
Curriculum Note:
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course EM-101A in a
• State, define, and apply Ohm’s Law to electrical circuits
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
• Calculate and measure electrical quantities in simple circuits and electrical power
in series and parallel resistive circuits
• Apply Kirchhoff’s Law to electrical circuits and scientific notation and prefixes to
electrical quantities
• Construct series and parallel circuits, and measure applicable electrical quantities
• Apply the properties of magnetism and electromagnetism to
electrical components
• Calculate voltage, current, resistance, and power in voltage dividers
• Describe the properties of conduction in liquids and gasses
Software
156
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
EM-101A
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides information on the basic concepts of AC electricity, including AC waveforms, electrical measurements, resistance, inductance, capacitance, impedance,
multi-phase circuits, and transformer action. There are extensive hands-on exercises to construct, evaluate, and troubleshoot AC circuits.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Differentiate AC components
PREREQUISITES
• Generate sine waves and power for distribution
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Determine peak, average, and RMS values
• Locate peak, average, and RMS values on waveforms
• Apply resistors to AC circuits
Curriculum Note:
• Determine voltage and current relationships in AC circuits and complex
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course EM-101A in a
reactive circuits
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
• Determine characteristics of inductors, inductive circuits, capacitors, and
capacitive circuits
• Explain voltage and current transients in inductive and capacitive circuits
• Apply transformers to circuits
• Transmit power
• Distribute power
• Determine Delta and Wye transformer and electrical systems
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Safety
Networks
CEUs 7
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
157
Motion Control
10 Days
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-102
Process Control
BASIC ELECTRICITY — AC
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides information on the basic concepts of electricity and magnetism, including basic circuit concepts, and measurement of electrical quantities and associated
numerical concepts, Ohm’s Law, practical circuits,electromagnetism, and electrical measurements. There are hands-on exercises for device operation and simple circuit
construction and analysis.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: I&C technicians, electricians, and electrical technicians
• Distinguish conductors and insulators
PREREQUISITES
• Observe electrical safety precautions
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Define electromotive force/voltage, basic electrical laws, frequency, period,
and wavelength
• Explain current flow
Curriculum Note:
• Describe the properties of resistance
This course contains many of the lessons in courses EM-101 and EM-102 in a
• Construct series circuits, parallel circuits, and resistive circuits
consolidated five-day format. Do not take all three courses.
• Generate sine waves
• Calculate sine wave voltage, current values, and power/resistance in AC circuits
• Observe AC phase relationships
• Use inductance and capacitance in AC circuits
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
CEUs 3.5
Condition Monitoring
5 Days
Software
BASIC AC/DC CONCEPTS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ELECTRICAL PRINT READING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-103
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with the basic understanding of electrical prints and components associated with electrical print reading, and the ability to interpret simple
ladder logic diagrams used for PLC programming. There are hands-on exercises for print reading.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians, but is also used for cross-training of mechanical
• Distinguish electrical print types and uses
maintenance technicians
• Recognize print organization and layout
PREREQUISITES
• Interpret print symbology and conventions, block diagrams, loop diagrams, and
There are no prerequisites for this course
ladder logic layout
• Outline one-line diagrams
• Analyze circuits and logic circuits
• Read P&ID drawings
• Recognize and diagram ladder logic symbols
Networks
Visualization
TEST EQUIPMENT
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-104
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the four categories of testing, safety precautions associated with testing, and the use and care of different test equipment to
include Doble test sets, megohmmeter function and operation, and various applications for thermography and infrared scanning. There are hands-on exercises for inspection
and use of given test equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Categorize electrical tests
PREREQUISITES
• Recognize test equipment types
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Interpret ammeter readings
• Use oscilloscopes, megohmmeters, and Doble testers
• Evaluate waveforms with an oscilloscope and infrared images
• Measure insulation resistance
• Perform high potential tests, thermography, and infrared testing
• Apply predictive maintenance basics
Condition Monitoring
Software
158
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
WIRING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-106
1 Day
Safety
Networks
CEUs 0.7
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
159
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with industrial batteries, Universal Power Supplies (UPS), battery and UPS function, battery and
UPS design, battery maintenance, storage and transportation, installation and removal, and potential faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Define battery characteristics
PREREQUISITES
• Distinguish primary and secondary batteries
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List types of lead-acid batteries and battery applications
• Interpret battery system terminology
• Follow standards and code requirements
• Apply charging and discharging methods
• Use “maintenance-free” batteries
• Recognize overcharging
• Prevent thermal runaway
Motion Control
BATTERIES
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the wiring requirements, material identification, and the installation and splicing of wiring. There are hands-on exercises for
wiring installation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Describe the electrical characteristics of conductors, semiconductors,
PREREQUISITES
and insulators
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Differentiate construction material characteristics
• Select cable jackets
• Recognize cable types and characteristics
• Utilize proper installation methods
• Pull wire and cable
• Splice low and medium voltage wires
• Apply cable and wire terminations
• Install and connect terminal board
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
CEUs 2.1
Drives
3 Days
Process Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-105
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CONDUIT BENDING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-108
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the calculating and making conduit bends. There are hands-on exercises for bending and installing conduit.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Distinguish conduit types and functions
PREREQUISITES
• Recognize materials and their uses in conduit application
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Interpret conduit data
• Bend rigid conduit (IMC)
• Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit
• Follow fill and spacing requirements
• Apply conduit cutting methods
• Ream and thread conduit
• Calculate bend radius
• Follow support requirements
• Offset bending
Visualization
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-200
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the function and circuit analysis of power supplies, amplifiers, integrators, comparators, and oscillators. There are hands-on
exercises for wiring, and analyzing the various circuits.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, and I&C technicians
• Explain diode operations and LED operation methods
PREREQUISITES
• Use diodes in circuits
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Compare diode types
• Differentiate NPN and PNP bipolar transistors and rectifier types
• Filter rectified waveforms using capacitive, choke, multiple section, pi, and RC
input filters
• Divide voltage using series and parallel voltage dividers
• Use Zener diodes as regulators, current dividers, and opto-electronic devices
• Regulate and multiply voltage
• Apply SCRs to circuits, varistors, and integrated circuits
• Bias and test transistors
• Wire transistor circuits for amplification
Software
160
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
TRANSFORMERS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-202
3 Days
Safety
Networks
CEUs 2.1
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
161
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the principles of operation associated with motors and motor components, including AC/DC theory of operation (torque,
pullout torque, and slip).
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Explain motor theory
PREREQUISITES
• Define motor terminology
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Wire motor connections
• Apply motor control methods
• Test direction and speed controls
• Identify replacement considerations
• Recognize special maintenance requirements
• Perform rotating machinery maintenance and testing
• Troubleshoot and repair
Motion Control
MOTOR THEORY
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with transformers (transformer function, design, maintenance, faults, and inspecting/testing).
There are hands-on exercises for transformer wiring and installation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Explain induction and transformer action
PREREQUISITES
• Distinguish transformer types
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Describe transformer components
• Detail three-phase circuits
• Wire single-phase and three-phase configurations
• Interpret nameplate data
• Follow safety precautions
• Change taps
• Size transformers
• Perform maintenance and inspections
• Identify transformer malfunctions
• Troubleshoot and repair transformers
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
CEUs 2.1
Drives
3 Days
Process Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-201
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
AC AND DC GENERATOR THEORY
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-203
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with generators, generator function, generator design, three phase voltage, and load sharing.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Define generator terms
PREREQUISITES
• Explain generator theory
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Describe AC and DC generator construction and operation
• Apply the effects of armature reaction to generator operation
• Share loads between generators
• Differentiate between stationary and rotating armature generators
• Perform generator maintenance
Networks
Visualization
MOTOR CONTROL
EM-204
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with AC and DC motor fundamentals, motor control fundamentals, control of motor starting, and
motors and motor controllers. The lessons cover a wide range of topics such as motor enclosures, nameplate data, AC motors, DC motors, magnetic contactors, control circuits,
Wye-Delta starters, speed controllers, AC/ DC machine maintenance, and motor control circuit maintenance.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Explain AC motor theory
PREREQUISITES
• Describe contacts
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Distinguish relays, contactors, and motor starters
• Identify pilot devices
• Interpret motor control device symbols
Curriculum Note:
• Construct basic, reversing, and advanced motor control circuits
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course EM-206 in a
• Troubleshoot acceleration circuits and basic, reversing, time delay, soft-start, and
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
advanced motor control circuits
• Accelerate motors using motor controllers
• Perform maintenance inspections
• Use time delays in motor control circuits
Software
162
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
DC CRANES AND CONTROLS
CEUs 2.1
Safety
Networks
Visualization
EM-206
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
163
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with systematic troubleshooting of instrumentation systems. Students will use practical application
of troubleshooting techniques in exercise scenarios.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Explain troubleshooting philosophy
PREREQUISITES
• Apply basic troubleshooting methods, motor controls fundamentals, and root
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
cause analysis
• Use the 7 step troubleshooting method
• Distinguish contactors, switches, and contacts
Curriculum Note:
• Determine motor controls diagnosis and repair
This course contains many of the lessons in courses EM-204 and GEN-003 in a
• Control AC motors
consolidated five-day format. Do not take all three courses.
• Inspect rotating AC machinery
• Use customized troubleshooting techniques
• Troubleshoot motor control circuits and intermittent failures
Motion Control
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING AND MOTOR CONTROLS
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the function and troubleshooting of DC crane controls.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians
• Detail power circuits
PREREQUISITES
• Trace control circuits and reversing-plugging control
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Operate series and shunt motors
• List crane hoist controls
• Describe hoist points 1-5 and off-position dynamic braking
• Troubleshoot hoist direction
• Explain crane lowering and limit switch controls, time limit acceleration, and
condenser timing
• Define lowering principles and dynamic lowering
• Identify collector bars and shoes
• Troubleshoot lowering direction and bridge control, trolley control, and
bridge/trolley circuits
• Utilize knife switches
• Use voltage drop acceleration
Drives
3 Days
Process Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-205
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
BASIC DIGITAL CIRCUITS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-303
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on basic digital electronics concepts, gates, circuits, flip-flop based circuits, and troubleshooting techniques. There are
hands-on exercises for circuit construction.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, or I&C technicians
• Use alternative number systems, integrated circuit families, and counters
PREREQUISITES
• Interpret boolean expressions
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Read digital signal diagrams
• Express binary data
• Apply logic gates
• Create truth tables
• Derive logic equations
• Detail flip-flop circuits
• Wire encoders and decoders
• Address registers
• Explain RAM characteristics
• Troubleshoot digital circuits
Visualization
INSTRUMENTATION I
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-400A
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course serves as introductory to provide students with a basic understanding of the fundamentals of measurement. The course will explain the various methods used to
measure: pressure, temperature, flow, and pH. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain these functions and how they can be used in process control.
Drives
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks:
• Explain the characteristics of a process
• Define measurement
• Differentiate direct and inferred measurements
• Determine accuracy and calibration
• Apply pressure, temperature, flow, and pH measurement methods
• Use consistency measurement methods
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, or I&C technicians
PREREQUISITES
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
164
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
INSTRUMENTATION II
CEUs 1.4
CEUs 3.5
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
165
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the types of valves and actuator used as control elements, valve components, and valve applications. There are hands-on
exercises for equipment setup and evaluation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, or I&C technicians
• Describe valve functions and actuator construction
PREREQUISITES
• List valve parts and positioner types and construction
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Explain valve construction
• Differentiate valve types
• List advantages and disadvantages of valve types
• Discuss valve actuators
• Troubleshoot actuators and positioners
• Use position feedback
• Perform process troubleshooting
Motion Control
5 Days
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-401
Process Control
VALVES AND VALVE ACTUATORS
Visualization
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with fundamental information on the concepts associated with the various measurement instruments used in process control. The lessons cover
a wide range of topics such as measurement methods, pressure measurement devices, temperature measurement devices, flow measurement devices, level measurement
devices. Upon completion of this course, the participants will be able to explain the function, design, and operation of these instruments and they function in process control.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Instrument technicians
• Explain instrument loop basics
PREREQUISITES
• Use temperature, level, flow, pressure, weight and force, and
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
conductivity and pH Devices
• Apply actuators
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
2 Days
Safety
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-400B
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ANALYTICAL MEASUREMENT
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-402
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated the operation and calibration of analytical sensors. Upon completion of this course, students will
be able to explain the function, and calibration of sensors and instruments for conductivity, pH, ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential), and selected optical and combustion
product measuring equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, or I&C technicians
• Describe properties of matter and electrodes
PREREQUISITES
• Define electrolytes
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Explain pH definition and properties
• Use pH measurement methods
• Differentiate acids and bases
• Make ORB measurements
• Perform conductivity measurements
• List factors affecting fluid chemistry
Visualization
PROCESS CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
EM-403
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the fundamentals of process control and PID loop tuning. Lessons include characteristics of process, criteria for loop
response, and controller tuning methods. This course introduces advanced control methods including cascade and feed forward control methods. There are extensive hands-on
exercises for process measurements, controller setup, and process tuning.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Electrical maintenance technicians, electronic technicians, or I&C technicians
• Define characteristics of the process
PREREQUISITES
• Differentiate manual versus automatic control
Understanding of electrical theory and electrical systems
• Use two position control
• Apply proportional control
• Explain integral (reset) control
• Use derivative (rate) control
• Apply proportional plus integral plus derivative control schemes
• Use controller tuning methods
• Apply advanced control methods
Condition Monitoring
Software
166
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Software
167
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
Motion Control
Visualization
Networks
Safety
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
CRAFT SKILLS AND MECHANICAL CONCEPTS
MECHANICAL
Craft skills and mechanical courses are available only as private, on-site classes, unless otherwise noted.
MAINTAIN
System Problem Solving
and Troubleshooting
Basic Mathematics
Scaffolding
GEN-001 • 5 Days
GEN-002 • 2 Days
Power Transmission Clutches
Power Transmission Belt Drives
Power Transmission Chain Drives
Power Transmission Gearing
MM-201 • 1 Day
MM-202 • 1 Day
MM-204 • 1 Day
MM-205 • 1 Day
Shaft and Coupling
Alignment
Pipefitting
Seals and Packing
Pumps and
Pump Repair
MM-302 • 5 Days
MM-303 • 1 Day
MM-301 • 5 Days
GEN-003 • 1 Day
Measurement and Tools
MM-101 • 3 Days
MM-304 • 3 Days
Pipe Welding
WE-103 • 25 Days
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
168
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in US
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in Canada
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Introduction to Bearings
and Lubrication
Mechanical
Print Reading
MM-103 • 2 Days
MM-105 • 3 Days
Lubrication
Bearings
Mechanical Crane
Inspections
Fans, Blowers
and Compressors
MM-206 • 3 Days
MM-207 • 3 Days
MM-208 • 2 Days
MM-209 • 3 Days
Hydraulics and
Pneumatics
Industrial Electricity and
Electronics for Mechanics
Mechanical Concepts
Structural Welding
MM-400 • 5 Days
MM-403 • 5 Days
MM-500 • 5 Days
WE-101 • 25 Days
Rigging
MM-102 • 2 Days
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Combustion
MM-106 • 3 Days
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
169
MECHANICAL TRACKS
LUBRICATION
AND BEARINGS
PUMPS
POWER
TRANSMISSON
Introduction to Bearings and Lubrication
i
MM-103 • 2 Days
Introduction to Bearings and Lubrication
i
MM-103 • 2 Days
Introduction to Bearings and Lubrication
i
MM-103 • 2 Days
Lubrication
MM-206 • 3 Days
Bearings
MM-207 • 3 Days
Power Transmission - Clutches
MM-201 • 1 Day
Bearings
MM-207 • 3 Days
Shaft and Coupling Alignment
MM-301 • 5 Days
Power Transmission - Belt Drives
MM-202 • 1 Day
Mechanical Concepts
MM-500 • 5 Days
Seals and Packing
MM-303 • 1 Day
Power Transmission - Chain Drives
MM-204 • 1 Day
Pumps and Pump Repair
MM-304 • 3 Days
Power Transmission - Gearing
MM-205 • 1 Day
Mechanical Concepts
MM-500 • 5 Days
Bearings
MM-207 • 3 Days
Shaft and Coupling Alignment
MM-301 • 5 Days
Mechanical Concepts
t
MM-500 • 5 Days
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in US
170
Offered as Open
Enrollment Course in Canada
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
HYDRAULICS
AND PNEUMATICS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Mechanical Print Reading
MM-105 • 3 Days
Mechanical Print Reading
MM-105 • 3 Days
Pumps and Pump Repair
MM-304 • 3 Days
Electrical Print Reading
EM-103 • 3 Days
Hydraulics and Pneumatics
MM-400 • 5 Days
System Problem Solving
and Troubleshooting
GEN-003 • 1 Day
The Mechanical Tracks are specialty areas that you can study within the
Craft Skills and Mechanical Concepts Curriculum.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
171
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
BASIC MATHEMATICS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
GEN-001
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with basic algebra, basic geometry, measurements, and basic trigonometry.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical and electrical maintenance technicians
• Explain numbers and number systems
PREREQUISITES
• Perform whole number operations and algebraic operations
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Calculate fractions and mixed numbers
Safety
• Use polynomials, percentages, measurements and conversions, trigonometry
functions, and square roots
• Calculate with exponents and bases
• Measure angles and polygons
• Calculate perimeter, area, and volume
• Apply geometry
Networks
Visualization
SCAFFOLDING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
GEN-002
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with procedures, precautions, and limitations for safely erecting and/or dismantling fabricated
frame scaffolding. There are hands-on exercises for erecting scaffolding.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical maintenance technicians
• Setup base section
PREREQUISITES
• Build support structure
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Utilize access
• Use fall protection
• Install platform
• Use falling object protection
• Keep it upright
• Avoid electrical hazards
• Discuss case reports
Condition Monitoring
Software
172
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
SYSTEM PROBLEM SOLVING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
GEN-003
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Safety
Networks
MM-101
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
Visualization
MEASUREMENT AND TOOLS
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with systematic troubleshooting.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
Maintenance technicians
• Explain troubleshooting philosophy
PREREQUISITES
• Use documentation
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Apply the 7 step and 5 step method
• Use, modify, and create, flowcharts
• Effect diagnosis and repair
Curriculum Note:
• List common I&C problems
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course EM-206 in a
• Shop and field testing
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
• Create customized troubleshooting
• Troubleshoot intermittent failures
• Perform root cause analysis
• Utilize cause and effect diagrams
• Explore troubleshooting scenarios
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
173
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the proper use of measuring tools to make basic linear and angular measurements, hand tools, and power tools.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Define applicable terminology
PREREQUISITES
• Specify accuracy and tolerances
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Utilize standards
• Apply proper vernier scale use and torque techniques
Curriculum Note:
• Use sensors and transducers , dial calipers, micrometers, mechanical indicators,
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
torque wrenches and extensions, hand tools, and portable power tools
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
• Explain torque theory
• Identify proper torque values
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
RIGGING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-102
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts and principles associated with rigging equipment, its use, inspection, planning and proper selection of rigging
equipment. There are hands-on exercises used to familiarize students with equipment selection and safety when tasked with rigging a given load.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Define rigging terms
PREREQUISITES
• Recognize rigging hazards
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Use wire rope
• Proper sling usage
• Perform sling inspections
• Use hoists properly
• Utilize beans and clamps
• Apply lightning protection
• Use rigging hardware, winches, jacks, rollers, and skids
• Plan and inspect rigging equipment
• Interpret and using hand signals
• Estimate weight
Visualization
INTRODUCTION TO BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-103
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with bearings, bearing function, bearing design, bearing maintenance, installation and removal,
expected load and wear patterns, bearing faults, and lubrication. There are hands-on exercises for bearing removal and installation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Explain the basic principles of lubrication and concepts behind forces and stress
PREREQUISITES
• Understand bearing design
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List the basic requirements of any bearing
• Perform various clearance checks on anti-friction and friction bearings
• Check interference fits
• Heat bearings
Curriculum Note:
• Cold mount roller bearings
This course contains many of the lessons in courses MM-206 and MM-207 in a
• Describe the basic lubricant and the makeup of lubricants
consolidated two-day format. Do not take all three courses.
• Define viscosity and use of viscosity terms
• Use boundary/thin film lubrication
• Apply bearing grease
• Recognize lubricant contaminants
• Grease bearings
Software
174
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
MECHANICAL PRINT READING
CEUs 2.1
CEUs 2.1
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
175
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the theory of combustion, associated equipment applied to combustion, safety, and related safety issues associated with
combustion. There are hands-on exercises for inspection and identification of equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Explain the theory of combustion and coal preheating
PREREQUISITES
• Break down flame structure
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Correlate the relationship between heat, temperature, and specific heat
• Apply the concept of fuel/air ratio
• Measure percent CO2, O2, and combustibles
• List general types of burners and the various control valves, blowers, regulators,
and switches associated with various burners
• Differentiate the three modes of heat transfer
• State the heat transfer rates
Motion Control
3 Days
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-106
Process Control
COMBUSTION
Visualization
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with an understanding of information found on mechanical drawings and prints, provides the participant with the ability to understand and
identify components, and how to identify dimensions of tapered and machined surfaces. There are hands-on exercises for print reading.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Interpret title block information, drawing properties, and dimensions
PREREQUISITES
• Recognize line types
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Read screw heads and fastener information
• Identify surface types
• Use numbering systems
• Check revision control
• Locate drawings
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
3 Days
Safety
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-105
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
POWER TRANSMISSION — CLUTCHES
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-201
1 Day
CEUs 1.4
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with clutches, clutch function, clutch design, clutch maintenance, installation and removal, and
basic clutch faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Describe clutch functions
PREREQUISITES
• Explain torque transfer
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List clutch types
•
•
•
•
•
Identify overrunning clutches
Understand centrifugal clutches
Install and inspect clutches
Perform clutch maintenance
Apply repair and replacement considerations
Networks
Visualization
POWER TRANSMISSION — BELT DRIVES
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-202
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with belt drives, belt drive function, belt drive design, belt drive maintenance, installation and
removal, and belt drive faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Explain pulley functions and positive drives
PREREQUISITES
• Describe torque transfer, flat belts, and v-belts
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List pulley types
• Compare belt drives
• Distinguish variable speed methods
• List advantages and disadvantages of different types of belt arrangements
• Apply belt inspection methods
Curriculum Note:
• Demonstrate alignment checks
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
• Perform pulley maintenance and belt installation and setup
Condition Monitoring
Software
176
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
POWER TRANSMISSION — CHAIN DRIVES
CEUs 0.7
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with chain drives, chain drive function, chain drive design, chain drive maintenance, installation
and removal, and chain drive faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• List chain drive functions
PREREQUISITES
• Describe power transfer
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Distinguish chain drive types
• Perform chain drive alignment and inspection
• Install and setup chain drives
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
1 Day
Safety
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-204
POWER TRANSMISSION — GEARING
MM-205
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
Visualization
Networks
Curriculum Note:
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
177
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with gears, gear function, gear backlash, gear lubrication, and gear ratios.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• List gear functions
PREREQUISITES
• Define gear terminology
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Describe gear arrangements and gear backlash
• List gear arrangement advantages and disadvantages
• Explain shaft orientation and power transfer
• Demonstrate inspection methods
Curriculum Note:
• Calculate gear ratios
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
• Perform lubrication of gears and gear setup and measurement
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
LUBRICATION
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-206
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with lubrication, lubrication properties, lubrication testing, lubricant contaminants, and
gear lubrication.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Describe the principle of lubrication
PREREQUISITES
• Explain lubricant characteristics
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Lubricate transmissions, engines, gears, and gearboxes
• Select bearing lubricants
• Apply lubricant application methods
• Perform coupling lubrication and lubricant testing
• Identify equivalent lubricants
Curriculum Note:
• Handle new and used lubricants
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-103 in a
• Follow lubrication analysis programs
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Visualization
BEARINGS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-207
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with bearings, bearing function, bearing design, bearing maintenance, installation and removal,
expected load and wear patterns, and bearing faults. There are hands-on exercises for bearing removal and installation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Define force, stress, and friction
PREREQUISITES
• Explain bearing terminology and bearing design
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Describe bearing materials
• Distinguish friction and anti-friction bearings
• Apply lubrication methods and preload considerations
• Perform clearance checks, wear analysis, and failure analysis
• Demonstrate bearing mounting
• Set tapered roller bearings
• Use fixed and float bearings
Curriculum Note:
• Remove roller bearings
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-103 in a
• Reduce bearing failures
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Condition Monitoring
Software
178
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
MECHANICAL CRANE INSPECTIONS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-208
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with air systems, air system functions, air system design, air system maintenance, installation and
removal, and air system faults.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• List the principles of operation
PREREQUISITES
• Apply fan laws and routine maintenance practices
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Differentiate fan types and operation
Process Control
Describe the design of blowers
Use positive displacement and axial flow blowers
Perform blower inspection and maintenance
Define compressibility
Distinguish compressor types and operating characteristics
Perform compressor inspection and maintenance
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
179
Software
Condition Monitoring
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-209
Drives
FANS, BLOWERS, AND COMPRESSORS
Visualization
Networks
Safety
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the mechanical inspection of Electrical Overhead Travel (EOT) Cranes.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Define EOT crane terms
PREREQUISITES
• List EOT crane hazards
Knowledge of Electrical Overhead Travel (EOT) crane operations
• Operate cranes safely
• Determine inspection frequency
• Perform daily, monthly, and new crane inspections
• Repair EOT crane
• Use remote control cranes
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
SHAFT AND COUPLING ALIGNMENT
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-301
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the importance of proper alignment and alignment methods, cause of misalignment and how to correct for error such
as soft foot and thermal growth using dial indicators, and coupling alignment using dial indicators and lasers where applicable. There are hands-on exercises for shaft and
equipment alignments.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Recognize symptoms of misalignment
PREREQUISITES
• Identify causes of misalignment
There are no prerequisites for this course
• List effects of misalignment and advantages/disadvantages of
alignment methods
• Use alignment tools, alignment methods, dial indicators, and jackshafts
• Identify and correct soft foot
• Perform elevation and horizontal moves
Curriculum Note:
• Recognize and compensate for thermal growth
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
• Align with multiple feet and couplings
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Visualization
PIPEFITTING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-302
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the codes and standards, types of piping and associated components, specifications, and fitting and supporting techniques.
There are hands-on exercises for bending fitting and installing pipe.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Interpret codes and standards
PREREQUISITES
• Define terminology
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Use safe work practices, basic pipefitting tools, welded connections, flanges,
and pipe hangers
• Read piping drawings
• Apply bending techniques and tubing joints
• Distinguish metal piping types and tubing versus piping
• Recognize non-metallic piping
• Bend tube
Curriculum Note:
• Make threaded connections
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
• Prepare and fit joints
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Condition Monitoring
Software
180
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
SEALS AND PACKING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-303
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
PUMPS AND PUMP REPAIR
MM-304
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
Visualization
Networks
Safety
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on identification and installation of packing and mechanical seals and their applications. There are hands-on exercises for
removing and installing packing and mechanical seals.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Explain the functions of packing
PREREQUISITES
• Describe packing glands
Understanding of mechanical theory and mechanical systems
• Perform packing replacement
• Distinguish mechanical seal types
• List advantages and disadvantages of mechanical seals
• Inspect seals and packing
• Troubleshoot causes of seal and packing failure
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
181
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with pumps and pump application, operation, hazards, troubleshooting and repair common
problems, and explains how to draw and label simple pump curves. There are hands-on exercises for inspection and repair of pumps and its associated equipment.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Define pump terminology
PREREQUISITES
• Explain centrifugal pump laws
Understanding of mechanical theory and mechanical systems
• List rotating equipment and pump hazards
• Explain centrifugal pump and positive displacement pump operation
• Describe centrifugal pump components
• Distinguish pump classifications
• Recognize cavitation and net positive suction head
Curriculum Note:
• Troubleshoot a centrifugal and positive displacement pump
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
• Perform a pump inspection
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS
MM-400
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with pneumatics and hydraulic systems, fluid principles, system design, and schematic symbology.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• List the advantages of hydraulics and pneumatics
PREREQUISITES
• Discuss hydraulic and pneumatic components
Understanding of mechanical theory and mechanical systems
• Disassemble, clean, inspect, and reassemble a hydraulic and/or pneumatic
control valve
• Operate a hydraulic and/or pneumatic cylinder using a given medium
• Operate multiple hydraulic cylinders using a hydraulic medium
Curriculum Note:
• Operate a pneumatic cylinder or multiple pneumatic cylinders using a
Many of the lessons in this course are consolidated in course MM-500 in a
pneumatic medium
condensed format. Do not take both courses.
Networks
Visualization
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRONICS FOR MECHANICS
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
MM-403
5 Days
CEUs 3.5
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on basic electricity and electronic concepts and devices. There are hands-on exercises for component and circuit operation.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Describe electrical basics and 3-phase systems
PREREQUISITES
• Distinguish conductors and insulators
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Explain the properties of magnetism
• Define electromotive force
• Calculate current, resistance and voltage
• Describe the effects of capacitors and inductors on circuits
• Calculate values for resistors, capacitors, and inductors in AC and DC circuits
• Construct AC and DC circuits
• Describe the effects of diodes, transistors, and SCRs on solid-state circuitry
• Connect PLC inputs and outputs
• Interpret PLC program instructions
Condition Monitoring
Software
182
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
MM-500
STRUCTURAL WELDING
WE-101
25 Days
CEUs 17.5
Motion Control
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on the concepts associated with plant maintenance, operation, hazards, troubleshooting and repair common problems. There
are hands-on exercises for inspection and repair of equipment associated with this program.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• List safety precautions
PREREQUISITES
• Use precision measurement tools
Understanding of mechanical theory and mechanical systems
• Fasten and torque
• Explain the proper use and maintenance of bearings
• Describe power transmission and Hyd/Pne systems
• Perform belt and chain drive, gear/gearbox, and pump maintenance
• Describe pump construction and operation
Curriculum Note:
• Describe conveyor system maintenance
This course contains many of the lessons in courses MM-101, MM-103, MM-202,
• Explain fan and blower maintenance
MM-203, MM-204, MM-205, MM-207, MM-301, MM-302, MM-304, and MM-400 in
• Perform shaft and coupling alignments
a consolidated five-day format. Do not take all courses.
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
CEUs 3.5
Safety
5 Days
Networks
MECHANICAL CONCEPTS
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
183
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on basic welding and welding techniques. There are hands-on exercises and bend test to verify competency.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical technicians
• Use fusion welding, resistance welding, filler rods, and electrodes
PREREQUISITES
• Use oxyfuel and arc welding processes, SMAW, GMAW, and GTAW
Understanding of mechanical theory and mechanical systems
• Perform different kinds of welds: groove, fillet, plug, slot, spot, and seam
• Use two methods of protecting yourself against the fumes and gases associated
with welding
• List personal protective equipment required when welding
• Prep for bend test
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PIPE WELDING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
WE-103
25 Days
CEUs 17.5
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Safety
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides students with information on SMAW pipe welding. There are extensive hands-on exercises for welding.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should be able to perform the following tasks: Mechanical maintenance technicians
• Use fusion welding, resistance welding, filler rods, and electrodes
PREREQUISITES
• Detail oxyfuel and arc welding processes: SMAW, GMAW, and GTAW
There are no prerequisites for this course
• Use different kinds of welds: groove, fillet, plug, slot, spot, and seam
• Apply two methods of protecting yourself against the fumes and gases associated
with welding
• Use the personal protective equipment required when welding
• List advantages of welded pipe joints to bolted or screwed connections
• Discuss examples of the uses of preheating and post-heating in pipe welding
• Prep for bend test
Networks
Visualization
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICITY
MFG244
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
COURSE PURPOSE
This course provides basic electricity knowledge to the novice. Basic electricity theory is explored identifying component operations in energized and de-energized states. The
course includes safety fundamentals and safe operation awareness.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this course, students should understand the following topics:
All personnel needing to know basic electricity theory
• Input Devices
• Fundamental concepts and terms
PREREQUISITES
- Sensors
- Atoms, charge, valence electrons
There are no prerequisites for this course
- Switches
- What is electrical current?
- Mechanical operators
- Voltage, resistance/impedance
- Electronic operators
- Ohm’s & Kirchoff’s laws
• Output devices
- Conductors, insulators
- Lamps, pilot lights
- Semi-conductors
- Solenoids
• Sources of electricity
- Electromechanical relays
- DC & AC electricity
- Electric motors
- AC power generations &
- Disconnect devices
distribution
- Electrical power consumption costs • Use of multimeter
• Arc flash hazards
- Transformers & power supplies
• Government regulations
• Wiring devices
- OSHA
- Switches
- NEC
- Terminal strips
• Personal protective equipment (PPE)
- Connectors
- Circuit breakers
- Fuses
- GFCIs
184
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Industrial
Leadership Skills
Industrial Leadership Skills
Industrial Leadership
Individual and Bundled Courses
Accountability and Delegation
ILEAD-001 • 1 Day
Communicate with Clarity
ILEAD-003 • 1 Day
Feedback: Giving and Receiving
ILEAD-004 • 1 Day
Coaching for Performance
ILEAD-005 • 1 Day
Problem Solving and Decision Making
ILEAD-006 • 1 Day
Conflict Management
ILEAD-007 • 1 Day
Leading T.E.A.M.work
ILEAD-008 • 1 Day
Hiring: Right Person Right Job
ILEAD-009 • 1 Day
Mentoring
ILEAD-010 • 0.5 Day
Project Management
ILEAD-011 • 1 Day
Foundational Leadership Skills Bundle
ILEAD-012 • 4 Days
Enhanced Leadership Skills Bundle
ILEAD-013 • 4 Days
Accountability and Delegation
ILEAD-001 • 1 Day
Problem Solving and Decision Making
ILEAD-006 • 1 Day
Communicate with Clarity
ILEAD-003 • 1 Day
Conflict Management
ILEAD-007 • 1 Day
Feedback: Giving and Receiving
ILEAD-004 • 1 Day
Leading T.E.A.M.work
ILEAD-008 • 1 Day
Coaching for Performance
ILEAD-005 • 1 Day
Hiring: Right Person Right Job
ILEAD-009 • 1 Day
186
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ACCOUNTABILITY & DELEGATION
COURSE PURPOSE
Every function and activity that takes place in an organization involves some form of direct or indirect communication. The success of these functions and activities directly
depends on the ability of the people in the organization to communicate effectively. This course focuses on the process of creating open communication that increases
rapport and productivity. Most people in organizations take steps to work toward “being a better communicator.” In this course, students will identify concrete steps and
processes that will truly help them improve their communications skills. Once these concepts are identified, they will then practice these skills during several role-play and
group activities, which will add more depth and solidify their learning. The course begins with an activity where participants work in groups to identify both effective and
ineffective communication elements. They will also consider and discuss the impacts of both. It is during this activity that students gain a better understanding of the need
to communicate effectively during every interaction. They then are introduced to a five-step process for creating open and effective communication. This process is the
foundation for the course, as students will be working through each of the five steps for the rest of the session. Students begin by working in small groups to identify barriers
in the workplace that prevent the communication process from flowing smoothly. At the end of the session, students will revisit these barriers with solutions gained through
the course content and learning. Next, they will each take a communication assessment that will help pinpoint both areas of strength and improvement in their personal
communication skills. After taking a personal look at skills, students will then examine their communication as a group by working through a difficult challenge as a large
group. Effective communication is required for success in this challenge. Students gain experiential insight as to where the gaps in skills hurt their opportunity for success
and where their strengths in communication as a group helped to move them forward. In the second half of the course, students explore concepts to improve their
communication skills, and then immediately apply those concepts through small-group activities and role plays. Through these activities, students learn to identify the goal of
a message, create assertive statements, ask for and receive feedback, and utilize strong questioning and listening skills. They will apply their newly acquired skills and concepts
to an actual message they need to deliver. Writing effective e-mail messages and delivering messages upwards to leadership is included.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Create assertive statements
• Describe the five steps to creating open communication
• Apply open-ended questioning techniques to increase two-way communication
• Assess communication skills and identify areas of strength and development
• Determine the most appropriate method for sharing messages
• Use active listening skills to improve rapport and productivity in the working
• Demonstrate the appropriate nonverbal skills to enhance communication
environment
with others
• Respond effectively when receiving feedback
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
CEUs 0.7
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
187
Motion Control
1 Day
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-003
Process Control
COMMUNICATE WITH CLARITY
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course teaches the skills and explains the attitude that is necessary for creating an accountable organization while also providing managers with the skills to effectively
delegate work to others. In today’s business climate, it is more important than ever for team members to hold themselves accountable; organizations depend on individuals
and teams to implement actions that align with the values, competencies, and strategies of the organization. These values, competencies, and strategies must be
demonstrated by every member on a daily basis. While the term “accountability” is commonly heard, there is often a great deal of confusion about what this word means
and to whom it applies. Delegation is an overlooked and undervalued tool that managers can use to complete an ever-increasing list of work responsibilities. There is often
confusion about the true meaning and nature of delegation. In discussing the definition, students begin to realize that delegation is about assigning meaningful tasks that can
challenge employees and provide them with opportunities to build their skills. They recognize many benefits to delegation. However, there are many barriers as well. Certain
patterns in thoughts and beliefs may hinder managers from delegating as often as they should.
OBJECTIVES
After completing the Delegation portion this course, students will be able to:
After completing the Accountability portion of the course, students will be able to:
• Define delegation
• Define accountability, responsibility, and empowerment
• Break your personal barriers to delegation
• Rate yourself and your team on the Power Meter
• Apply situational leadership to delegation
• Discuss the Account-Able Choice
• Decide the tasks to delegate and the tasks to keep
• Identify obstacles to being accountable
• Determine the right person to whom to delegate the task
• Apply a three-step model to ask self-accountability questions
• Plan and conduct a four-step delegation meeting
• Speak the language of empowerment and accountability
• Follow up on a delegated task
• Apply a five-step model to create accountability in others
• Obtain the results you expect from a delegated
Industrial
Leadership Skills
CEUs 0.7
Condition Monitoring
1 Day
Software
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-001
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
FEEDBACK: GIVING AND RECEIVING
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-004
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Industrial
Leadership Skills
Networks
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
This course teaches the skills that are necessary to both give and receive constructive and positive feedback in a way that maintains relationships and increases performance.
Feedback opens the door to discussion and problem solving, and it is essential to personal growth and development. When feedback is given constructively, the receiver of
the feedback is more likely to listen non-defensively and take appropriate action. It is important for learners to discover that the receiver of feedback has equal responsibility
in creating a comfortable interaction between the giver and receiver. Students begin the course by defining feedback and identifying why it is so hard to give. The answer
identified in class will be a surprise and will begin to develop the learners’ awareness of how to provide feedback. Next, students become involved in a role play using a
realistic scenario. During this scenario, students are assigned roles and will then provide feedback as either supervisor to employee, or peer to peer. The objective is to explore
how to approach individuals when giving feedback; it is a fun but significant learning exercise about what style of feedback people most want from others. An important
influence technique in giving feedback of any kind is the ability to speak from the standpoint of observation versus judgment, and use effective language that reflects the
appropriate standpoint. Students will learn this important technique using lecture, video, and practice. Two models are provided in the material for students to use as they
begin to learn and practice the skills. One model provides a four-step process for giving constructive feedback; a three-step model is also demonstrated and used for providing
positive feedback. After these models are taught, students engage in a robust skills practice activity. One of the most challenging aspects of giving constructive feedback is
anticipating and responding to the reaction of the receiver. In this activity, students learn methods and techniques for handling situations when the receiver gives a negative
response. Students conclude the session by learning the equally important, but sometimes forgotten, skill of effectively receiving feedback. During the What Would You Say?
activity, students explore appropriate responses to a variety of feedback scenarios.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Define feedback
• Apply steps to giving constructive feedback
• Identify guidelines for giving feedback
• Apply steps to giving positive feedback
• Demonstrate the ability to use observation versus judgment • Apply guidelines for receiving feedback
COACHING FOR PERFORMANCE
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-005
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
Have you ever wondered how to increase the effectiveness of your team? How to attract and retain the best talent? How to fully engage your employees? Successful
organizations create environments in which people can achieve their potential through guidance, assistance, and support. Coaching is a skill that can be utilized to create that
environment and to support team members in ways that allow them to contribute to their fullest. When coaching becomes an integral part of doing business, employees are
engaged; this results in greater productivity and the retention of top talent. This course provides students with the tools to coach effectively, and it enables the performance
improvement of all team members. Coaching is often confused with teaching or giving feedback. Students start the course by exploring the true definition of coaching and
how it differs from other forms of communication. Coaching is an investment of time and effort; students discuss the many benefits that can be achieved from using this
skill in the workplace. They also identify several opportunities to coach in their work environment. Questioning and listening skills are central to effective coaching, so time
will be spent learning and practicing these skills. This course allows for several practice opportunities. Students engage in mini-coaching sessions, using actual coaching
opportunities that they have identified. They learn and use a four-step process to help them plan and structure their coaching sessions for maximum benefit. Some coaching
opportunities are difficult, so students discuss and practice effective techniques to overcome difficult situations that may arise. Students end the session by developing a
strategy for personal continuous coaching development, which they then share with a partner. This strategy will help ensure that their coaching skills continue to grow,
thereby increasing the skills and productivity of their team members.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Identify the benefits of coaching
• Apply the four-step GROW Model to coach direct reports and peers
• Follow a three-stage Leader as Coach Model
• Respond effectively to difficult situations using one of five techniques
• Identify coaching opportunities with direct reports and peers
• Implement an action plan for formal and informal follow-up
• Solicit the ideas of others using effective questioning skills
• Provide reinforcement and developmental feedback to direct reports
and peers on a day-to-day basis
• Apply active listening skills
Software
188
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PROBLEM SOLVING AND DECISION MAKING
COURSE PURPOSE
Conflict is an inevitable dynamic in the work environment. Unfortunately, it usually carries a negative connotation. Conflict, in and of itself, is neither “good” nor “bad”. What
makes a conflict situation productive or destructive is the way in which issues and information are analyzed, approached, and communicated. Successful teams and managers
have the ability to not only address but utilize differences in a way that increases the overall strength of the team. This course teaches the skills and perspectives that are
necessary to effectively manage conflict. Most people view conflict as being highly personal in nature. In this course, students will explore the true definition of conflict, and
how this definition can help them better analyze and understand a challenging situation or person. They will also examine the role of personal power and how it influences
the level and outcome of a conflict. Next, students complete the Thomas-Kilmann Conflict Mode Instrument. Through this instrument, they will gain insight into their preferred
mode of conflict management. They will also gain exposure to, and a better understanding of, the preferred approaches of others in a conflict situation. Working in small
groups, they will then explore the best approaches to different types of conflicts, and discuss how their preferred approach can be adapted to best manage the situation. Next,
students will be introduced to the Stop, Yield Go Model for conflict resolution. This is a three-step process that they can use to keep their approach and communication focused
and on track so that the conflict is resolved in a productive manner. Students will identify a conflict situation that they are currently experiencing or anticipate experiencing
in the near future. They will then work through the conflict using the three steps. In each step, students will be engaging in activities and discussions regarding the following
topics: assertive language techniques, the power of inquiry and advocacy, and how to effectively manage difficult responses. Students will view a video that demonstrates
assertive language techniques. Working with a partner, students will obtain additional feedback and insight into the management of their conflict situation. This will provide
students with a detailed and complete action plan that they can implement immediately.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Apply techniques to managing emotions during conflict
• Define conflict
• Explain assumptions and their effect on conflict
• Recognize the five styles of conflict resolution and how to best adapt your style
• Use active-listening skills to improve the working environment
and approach to a conflict situation
• Apply assertive language techniques to express your needs and respect the
• Understand your preferred style of conflict resolution
• Apply the Stop, Yield, Go Model to collaborative conflict resolution
needs of others
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
CEUs 0.7
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
189
Motion Control
1 Day
Drives
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-007
Process Control
CONFLICT MANAGEMENT
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Employees in any organization find themselves solving problems on a daily basis. The ability to identify the problem, pinpoint the true cause and identify a workable solution
is essential for personal, professional, and organizational success. In this course, students will learn to identify problems proactively, correctly state identified problems,
identify the most likely cause, and determine innovative solutions. They are also asked to bring a current work problem to class and to be prepared to have fun with problem
solving! Students begin the course by working in small groups to solve a problem. During the debrief, they discuss challenges and successes in the process they used to
resolve the problem. In this discussion, they identify a problem as being the gap between the current state and the desired state. They also discuss and identify barriers to
effective problem solving and their role in overcoming those barriers. Similar small problems are introduced periodically during the day to challenge students’ thinking and
keep it fresh. In the next segment of the course, students are introduced to a six-step problem-solving process. Using a case study based on an actual problem, they will work
step-by step in small groups and apply the process to the case study. While working through these steps, they will learn multiple tools that they can use to identify causes and
solutions in an efficient and effective manner back in the workplace. Once they have had an opportunity to use the tools and the six-step process, students will then apply
their learning and the tools to an actual problem that they need to solve. Engaging in this activity allows them to see how powerful and practical the process and tools can be
in helping them resolve real issues. Students conclude the session by engaging in individual action planning
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Define your role in problem solving
• Select appropriate tools to effectively problem-solve
• Identify barriers to effective problem solving
• Coach mistakes without commanding or criticizing
• Apply a six-step problem-solving process
Industrial
Leadership Skills
CEUs 0.7
Condition Monitoring
1 Day
Software
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-006
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
LEADING T.E.A.M.WORK
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-008
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Industrial
Leadership Skills
COURSE PURPOSE
Most of the time when you hear the term team, it’s about a group of people who get together to complete a special project. This course is about creating a team environment
with the people with whom you work with each day. The team environment that you create can and will contribute to a positive and productive work group. In this course,
participants will learn techniques for translating team goals into individual goals, empowering all team members to participate, encouraging collaboration amongst team
members, and monitoring the team’s progress using structured tools and process.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Identify telltale signs that the T.E.A.M.work within your team needs attention
• Apply techniques to encourage collaboration amongst all team members
• Apply techniques to translate goals to individual team members
• Discuss techniques to monitor the team’s environment and to make adjustments
• Apply techniques to empower all team members to participate
• Describe how stereotyping of team members affects the team environment
Networks
Visualization
HIRING: RIGHT PERSON RIGHT JOB
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-009
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
Given today’s business realities, it is more important than ever for organizations to utilize their resources wisely. In any organization, selecting the right person for the right
job is a challenge. When the challenge is met, turnover is low, morale and productivity are high, and great customer service is provided. This course is designed to provide
information and skills to assess, build, and conduct high-quality selection interviews in order to decide on the right person for the right job. Participants begin the course by
discussing the impact of poor hiring decisions, including the cost of turnover. They then are introduced to a four-step interviewing process that consists of assessing the job
requirements, building the interview questions, conducting the interview, and deciding on the right candidate. Throughout this process, participants will utilize their own
organization’s hiring practices, competencies, and value behaviors, which will allow for greater transfer of the skills when the participant needs to apply them in their work
environment. The building of questions is a key skill that participants gain from this course. They explore different types of questions, from traditional to behavior-based, and
learn which questions elicit specific responses. Participants then learn to create behavior-based questions that are directly relevant to the job requirements. They also learn
and practice how to ask important follow-up questions. Participants will be able to witness these skills and behaviors demonstrated in the video, “More Than a Gut Feeling.”
Participants then discuss what needs to happen during the actual interview, including the need to maintain a legal line of questioning. They also examine common interview
errors and ways to avoid them. Finally, participants have a chance to practice their new skills by preparing and conducting a mock interview for a position that they may
actually need to fill.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Recognize the importance of selecting the right candidate
• Identify job competencies and value behaviors for an open position
• Calculate the cost of turnover
• Create behavior-based interview questions
• Explain the organization’s hiring process
• Conduct an effective selection interview
• Decide on the best candidate
• Apply a four-step interviewing process
Software
190
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
MENTORING
0.5 Day
CEUs 0.4
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
191
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
Effective management of projects is essential in today’s ever-changing business environment. This one-day program will help participants gain a broad understanding of the
basic core concepts of the project management process. Each stage of the project life cycle will be explored. Approaches that aid the project manager to complete the project
on time and within budget will be identified and discussed. All the elements of project management, as prescribed by the Project Management Institute®, will be reviewed
using interactive lecture and class exercise.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Apply interpersonal and communication skills that are critical to project execution
• Describe the definition of a project
and stakeholder/team management including conflict management, team
• Explain the difference between Program Management and Project Management
motivation and techniques to effectively lead a cross functional; cross
• Apply project selection and portfolio management techniques to align projects
organizational team
with an organization’s business strategy
• Monitor and control projects including managing integrated change control and
• Define the quadruple constraints of Project Management
obtaining project status
• Manage customer requirements, develop project boundaries and define project
• Implement a formal project closing process including project reports and
success criteria
lessons learned
• Understand all aspects of project planning including scope development and
planning, scheduling, staffing, budgeting, communication management, risk
management, quality management and vendor/ procurement management
Motion Control
CEUs 0.7
Process Control
1 Day
Condition Monitoring
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-011
Software
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Visualization
Networks
COURSE PURPOSE
Mentoring is one way in which to transfer expertise and knowledge to new workers. Mentoring has been proven to reduce turnover and increase employee satisfaction. This
course provides an opportunity for a mentor and their protégé to work together, and learn about each other and how to work effectively together. Worksheets are provided
to allow mentors and protégés to learn about one another, identify interaction guidelines, and set mentoring goals. Participants will discuss and practice the components of
being an effective mentor and protégé.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Define your role and responsibilities as a mentor or protégé in the
• Set and manage expectations for the mentoring relationship
mentoring process
• Listen with openness and understanding
• Understand the phases of mentoring and the activities in each phase
• Provide supportive feedback
• Understand your mentor’s or protégé’s interaction style
• Coach mistakes without commanding or criticizing
Industrial
Leadership Skills
(AVAILABLE ON-SITE ONLY)
ILEAD-010
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ILEAD-012
FOUNDATIONAL LEADERSHIP SKILLS
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
Industrial
Leadership Skills
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
COURSE PURPOSE
Sound leadership skills are the foundation for success in industrial manufacturing environments. The exercise of effective leadership practices has been found to enhance
work environments that contribute to engaged employees and high performance. This course offers five foundational leadership skills that new supervisors must develop
in order to successfully build and maintain strong relationships with employees, which in turn increases employee productivity. The course combines the concepts of
communication, feedback, coaching, accountability and delegation to create a 4-day foundational leadership skills course for new and emerging supervisors and managers.
The first element of the course, communication, focuses on the process of creating open communication that increases rapport and productivity. Most people in
organizations take steps to work toward “being a better communicator.” In this course, participants will identify concrete steps and processes that will truly help them
improve their communications skills. Once these concepts are identified, they will then practice these skills during several role-play and group activities, which will add
more depth and solidify their learning.
This course element, feedback, teaches the skills that are necessary to both give and receive constructive and positive feedback in a way that maintains relationships
and increases performance. Feedback opens the door to discussion and problem solving, and it is essential to personal growth and development. When feedback is given
constructively, the receiver of the feedback is more likely to listen non-defensively and take appropriate action.
Coaching is a skill that can be used to create an environment in which people can achieve their potential through guidance, assistance, and support and to support team
members in ways that allow them to contribute to their fullest. When coaching becomes an integral part of doing business, employees are engaged; this results in greater
productivity and the retention of top talent. This course provides participants with the tool to coach effectively, and it enables the performance improvement of all team
members.
The accountability portion of the course teaches the skills and explains the attitude that is necessary for creating an accountable organization. In today’s business climate, it
is more important than ever for team members to hold themselves accountable; organizations depend on individuals and teams to implement actions that align with the
values, competencies, and strategies of the organization. These values, competencies, and strategies must be demonstrated by every member on a daily basis.
Delegation is an overlooked and undervalued tool that managers can use to complete an ever-increasing list of work responsibilities. This course provides managers with
the skills to effectively delegate work to others. There is often confusion about the true meaning and nature of delegation. In discussing the definition, participants begin
to realize that delegation is about assigning meaningful tasks that can challenge employees and provide them with opportunities to build their skills. They recognize many
benefits to delegation.
OBJECTIVES
After completing Communication portion of course, students will be able to:
• Create assertive statements
• Describe the five steps to creating open communication
• Apply open-ended questioning techniques to increase two-way communication
• Assess communication skills and identify areas of strength and development
• Use active listening skills to improve rapport and productivity in the
• Determine the most appropriate method for sharing messages
working environment
• Demonstrate the appropriate nonverbal skills to enhance communication
• Respond effectively when receiving feedback
with others
Drives
After completing the Feedback portion of the course, students will be able to:
• Define feedback
• Identify guidelines for giving feedback
• Demonstrate the ability to use observation versus judgment
Process Control
After completing the Coaching portion of the course, students will be able to:
• Identify the benefits of coaching
• Follow a three-stage Leader as Coach Model
• Identify coaching opportunities with direct reports and peers
• Solicit the ideas of others during a coaching session using effective
questioning skills
• Apply active listening skills during a coaching session
Condition Monitoring
After completing the Accountability portion this course, students will be able to:
• Define accountability, responsibility, and empowerment
• Rate yourself and your team on the Power Meter
• Discuss the Account-Able Choice
• Identify obstacles to being accountable
Software
After completing the Delegation portion this course, students will be able to:
• Define delegation
• Break your personal barriers to delegation
• Apply situational leadership to delegation
• Decide the tasks to delegate and the tasks to keep
192
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
• Apply steps to giving constructive and positive feedback
• Apply guidelines for receiving feedback
•
•
•
•
Apply the four-step GROW Model to coach direct reports and peers
Respond effectively to difficult situations using one of five techniques
Implement an action plan for formal and informal follow-up
Provide reinforcement and developmental feedback to direct reports and peers
on a day-to-day basis
• Apply a three-step model to ask self-accountability questions
• Speak the language of empowerment and accountability
• Apply a five-step model to create accountability in others
•
•
•
•
Determine the right person to whom to delegate the task
Plan and conduct a four-step delegation meeting
Follow up on a delegated task
Obtain the results you expect from a delegated
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ILEAD-013
•
•
•
•
After completing the Teamwork portion of the course, students should be able to:
• Identify telltale signs that the TEAMwork within your team needs attention
• Apply techniques to translate goals to individual team members
• Apply techniques to empower all team members to participate
• Apply techniques to encourage collaboration amongst all team members
• Discuss techniques to monitor the team’s environment and to make adjustments
• Describe how stereotyping of team members affects the team environment.
Identify job competencies and value behaviors for an open position
Create behavior-based interview questions
Conduct an effective selection interview
Decide on the best candidate
Condition Monitoring
After completing the Problem Solving and Decision Making portion this course, students should be able to:
• Define your role in problem solving
• Select appropriate tools to effectively problem-solve
• Identify barriers to effective problem solving
• Coach mistakes without commanding or criticizing
• Apply a six-step problem-solving process
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Industrial
Leadership Skills
Process Control
After completing the Conflict Management portion of the course, students should be able to:
• Apply techniques to managing emotions during conflict
• Define conflict
• Explain assumptions and their effect on conflict
• Recognize the five styles of conflict resolution and how to best adapt your style
• Use active-listening skills to improve the working environment
and approach to a conflict situation
• Understand your preferred style of conflict resolution
• Apply assertive language techniques to express your needs and respect the
• Apply the Stop, Yield, Go Model to collaborative conflict resolution
needs of others
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
Motion Control
OBJECTIVES
After completing Hiring portion of course, students should be able to:
• Recognize the importance of selecting the right candidate
• Calculate the cost of turnover
• Explain the organization’s hiring process
• Apply a four-step interviewing process
Visualization
COURSE PURPOSE
Effective leaders consistently seek to learn, change and grow by enhancing their leadership skills. In fact, leading in organizations requires learning, changing and the ability
to adapt to and address the dynamic trends that often affect our internal and external environments. Strong leadership requires the agility to enhance their leadership skills
and work environments in order to engage employees and produce high performance. This course offers five enhanced leadership skills that new supervisors must develop
to successfully build and maintain strong relationships with employees generating synergy between employees. This, in turn, increases employee productivity. The course
combines the concepts of hiring, teamwork, conflict management, and problem solving & decision making to create a 4-day enhanced leadership skills course for new and
emerging supervisors and managers.
Given today’s business realities, it is more important than ever for organizations to utilize their resources wisely. In any organization, selecting the right person for the right
job is a challenge. When the challenge is met, turnover is low, morale and productivity are high, and great customer service is provided. This course is designed to provide
information and skills to assess, build, and conduct high-quality selection interviews in order to decide on the right person for the right job.
Most of the time when you hear the term team, it’s about a group of people who get together to complete a special project. This course is about creating a team
environment with the people with whom you work with each day. The team environment that you create can and will contribute to a positive and productive work group.
In this course, participants will learn techniques for translating team goals into individual goals, empowering all team members to participate, encouraging collaboration
amongst team members, and monitoring the team’s progress using structured tools and process.
Conflict is an inevitable dynamic in the work environment. Unfortunately, it usually carries a negative connotation. Conflict, in and of itself, is neither “good” nor “bad”.
What makes a conflict situation productive or destructive is the way in which issues and information are analyzed, approached, and communicated. Successful teams and
managers have the ability to not only address but utilize differences in a way that increases the overall strength of the team. This course teaches the skills and perspectives
that are necessary to effectively manage conflict. Most people view conflict as being highly personal in nature. In this course, participants will explore the true definition of
conflict, and how this definition can help them better analyze and understand a challenging situation or person. They will also examine the role of personal power and how
it influences the level and outcome of a conflict.
Employees in any organization find themselves solving problems on a daily basis. The ability to identify the problem, pinpoint the true cause and identify a workable
solution is essential for personal, professional, and organizational success. In this course, participants will learn to identify problems proactively, correctly state identified
problems, identify the most likely cause, and determine innovative solutions. They are also asked to bring a current work problem to class and to be prepared to have fun
with problem solving!
Craft Skills &
Mechanical Concepts
CEUs 2.8
Drives
4 Days
193
Software
ENHANCED LEADERSHIP SKILLS
Training Services
Don’t Delay Getting the Training You Need. Enroll Now!
Call 440-646-3434
(option 7)
E-mail training requests to:
[email protected]
To view course schedules, go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
194
1
19
4
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
www.
ww
w.ro
r ckwellllau
a tomati
tio
on
o
n.ccom
o /s
/ser
ervi
vice
ce
es/
s training
Publicat
Publication
tio
i n GM
GMST
GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ST10
ST
10-C
10
-CA0
-C
A001K-EN-P
Silver Courses
Silver Courses
Silver Courses
Silver Courses
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Rockwell Automation silver courses provide
training for legacy or specialized automation
products that are not typically included in
the Rockwell Automation Training Services
national course schedule. As private classes
held either at a Rockwell Automation training
facility or on-site at your own facility, you can
schedule these courses by contacting your local
Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley
distributor. Minimum class size is eight students
and the maximum is twelve students.
COURSE
NUMBER COURSE NAME
CAN801
COURSE
LENGTH
Silver Courses
Silver Courses
Visualization
Motion Control
Medium Voltage Starter/SMC™ Flex/
Synchronous Starter Operation & Maintenance
3.5 Days
CCA124
1336 FORCE™ Maintenance & Troubleshooting
3 Days
CCA132
1336 IMPACT™ Troubleshooting
1 Day
CCA133
1336 IMPACT Start-Up
1 Day
CCA134
1336 FORCE Start-Up
3 Days
CCA135
1336 IMPACT Communications
1 Day
CCA138
1336 IMPACT Programming
1 Day
CCA156
Medium Voltage 1557 Drive Maintenance
3.5 Days
CCA190
ArmorStart® Distributed Motor Controller
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 Day
CDD131
1395 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting
3 Days
CCN183
1394 and GML™ Commander Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
4 Days
CCN184
1394 and GML Commander Programming
4.5 Days
CCP710
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Troubleshooting
2 Days
CCPS66
SLC 500 to PanelView 550/600 Terminal
Communications
2 Days
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Conversion
1 Day
CCV202
Drives
CCN191-LD Ultra™ 3000 Programming
1 Day
EK-ICM161 Datapac® Applications
3 Days
REO521
4 Days
AutoMax DC Drive Distributed Power System
Process Control
RS-FTHMEC FactoryTalk Historian ME Configuration and
Data Collection
2 Days
SAF-SEM
1 Day
Machine Safety Seminar
Condition Monitoring
Software
196
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Computer-Based
Training
Computer-Based Training
Computer-Based Training Curriculum
CONTROLLOGIX/RSLOGIX 5000
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000 Software Project Configuration
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000 Software Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software - Bundle
9393-RSTL5KENE /
9393-RSTL5KENF
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
9393-RSTLKPRJENF
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
9393-RSTLKOFFENF
9393-RSTLX5KON
9393-RSTLKONENF
Project Configuration
Offline Programming
Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000 Software Motion
RSTrainer for
ControlLogix
Fundamentals
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
9393-RSTLKMOTENF
9393-RSTCLX
9393-RSTCLXENF
NETWORKS
RSTrainer for
EtherNet/IP Communications
and Diagnostics
RSTrainer for
EtherNet/IP Bundle
9393-RSTENETAENE /
9393-RSTENETAENF
9393-RSTENET2ENE
9393-RSTENET2ENF
Hardware and IP Addressing
Communications
and Diagnostics
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View Machine
Edition - Applications
and Displays
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View Machine
Edition - Drawing
Objects
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View Machine
Edition - Interactive
Objects
9393-RSTVMEPT1
9393-RSTMEPT1ENF
9393-RSTVMEPT2
9393-RSTMEPT2ENF
9393-RSTVMEPT3
9393-RSTMEPT3ENF
RSTrainer for
EtherNet/IP - Hardware
and IP Addressing
9393-RSTENET1ENE
9393-RSTENET1ENF
RSTrainer for
RSLinx Software
9393-RSTLINX
9393-RSTLINXENF
VISUALIZATION
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View Machine
Edition Bundle
9393-RSTVMEALL /
9393-RSTMEALLENF
Applications and Displays
Drawing Objects
Interactive Objects
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
198
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC/RSLOGIX 500
RSTrainer for
SLC 500 Programming
Fundamentals
RSTrainer for
SLC 500 Hardware Fundamentals
9393-RSTSLCHENE
9393-RSTSLCHENF
9393-RSTSLCPENE
9393-RSTSLCPENF
RSTrainer for SLC 500
Fundamentals Bundle
9393-RSTSLCALENE /
9393-RSTSLCALENF
Hardware Fundamentals
Programming
Fundamentals
Also
Available
in Spanish
*FESE/*FESF
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 Software Offline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 Software Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 Software Documenting
and Searching
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500
Software Bundle
9393-RST500ALENE /
9393-RST500ALENF
9393-RST500OFENE
9393-RST500OFENF
9393-RST500ONENE
9393-RST500ONENF
9393-RST500DSENE
9393-RST500DSENF
Offline Programming
Online Monitoring
Documenting and Searching
PLC/RSLOGIX 5
HYDRAULICS
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5 Software
RSTrainer for
Hydraulics
9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTLX5ENF
9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTHYDENF
ADDITIONAL PRODUCTS
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition for
Student Manager
9393-RSTSMGRENF
Modular
Programming for
Machine Applications
RSTrainer licensing options:
• Single license (node-locked)
• 5 concurrent licenses
(Enterprise Edition)
Self-Study Training Kit
9393-MODPROG
Self-Study Training Kit
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
199
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSTRAINER® FOR ETHERNET/IP –
HARDWARE AND IP ADDRESSING
9393-RSTENET1ENE
9393-RSTENET1ENF*
5 Hours
COURSE PURPOSE
This computer-based training course covers the fundamentals of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) hardware and IP addressing. During this course, students will
learn how to design and optimize an EtherNet/IP network and configure an EtherNet/IP driver and IP addresses for EtherNet/IP devices. Helpful animations, background
information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
Computer-Based
Training
OBJECTIVES
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Design EtherNet/IP networks
• Configure an EtherNet/IP communications driver using RSLinx
• Ping an IP address
• Configure and modify EtherNet/IP addresses using BOOTP-DHCP server
and RSLinx software
• Configure and modify EtherNet/IP addresses using RSLogix 5000 software
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
RSTRAINER FOR ETHERNET/IP –
COMMUNICATIONS AND DIAGNOSTICS
INTENDED AUDIENCE
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing EtherNet/IP networks
• Are interested in optimizing EtherNet/IP networks, configuring communications,
and configuring EtherNet/IP addresses
PREREQUISITES
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-N300-TSJ50
ABT-N300-DRG70
9393-RSTENET2ENE
9393-RSTENET2ENF*
5 Hours
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This computer-based training course explains the concepts of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) communications and diagnostics. During this course, students
will learn how to establish EtherNet/IP connections, send messages, and perform basic networking diagnostics. Helpful animations, background information, answers to
frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for setting up communications over an EtherNet/IP network
• Configure an Ethernet/IP module in a local and remote chassis
• Are interested in understanding how to send messages over an EtherNet/IP
• Configure digital and analog I/O modules in a chassis
network, and perform basic networking diagnostics
• Modify module parameters
PREREQUISITES
• Add a controller to an I/O configuration
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Produce and consume data over an Ethernet/IP network
• Communicate between multiple controllers on an Ethernet/IP network using an
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
MSG instruction
• Configure the 9300-8EDM Ethernet diagnostic module
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Obtain computer IP addresses
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
• Access diagnostic information using a web browser
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Software
200
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
5 Hours
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition applications and displays. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME. Students will learn how to work with default graphic displays, configure application-wide settings, configure
RSLinx Enterprise, and work with tags in an application. Helpful animations, background information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference
materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME applications
• Work with applications
• Are interested in configuring application-wide settings, configuring RSLinx
• Identify main window components
Enterprise software, and working with tags in an application
• Use the application explorer and default graphic displays
PREREQUISITES
• Create a new display
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Use the startup editor
• Define project settings
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Configure security and language options
FactoryTalk View ME
• Use direct-reference tags in an application
and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
• Create new HMI tags
• Use HMI tags
9393-RSTVMEPT2
9393-RSTMEPT2ENF*
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
201
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition drawing objects in graphic displays. This course is part of a
series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME. Students will be introduced to a variety of basic graphic objects and learn how to modify their properties,
animate them, and arrange them on the displays. Students will learn how to use objects from the Graphic Library. Helpful animations, background information, answers to
frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME applications
• Understand drawing objects
• Are interested in learning about basic drawing objects
• Understand object properties
PREREQUISITES
• Arrange objects
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add objects from the graphic library
• Use the object explorer
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Animate drawing objects
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Motion Control
5 Hours
Condition Monitoring
RSTRAINER FOR FACTORYTALK VIEW
MACHINE EDITION (ME) – DRAWING OBJECTS
Computer-Based
Training
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
9393-RSTVMEPT1
9393-RSTMEPT1ENF*
Software
RSTRAINER FOR FACTORYTALK VIEW
MACHINE EDITION (ME) – APPLICATIONS AND DISPLAYS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSTRAINER FOR FACTORYTALK VIEW
MACHINE EDITION (ME) – INTERACTIVE OBJECTS
9393-RSTVMEPT3
9393-RSTMEPT3ENF*
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Computer-Based
Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition interactive objects. This course is part of a series of e-Learning courses
designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME. Students will learn how to work interactive and advanced objects in graphic displays as well as create and configure data logs, trends,
and alarms. Helpful animations, background information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of
knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME applications
• Add advanced features to interactive
• Create and configure:
• Are interested in learning about interactive objects
objects
- Push buttons
PREREQUISITES
• Create parameter files and tag
- Indicators
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
placeholders
- Display objects
• Test displays and applications
- Control list selectors, gauges,
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Use faceplates in an application
and graph objects
FactoryTalk View ME
- Display navigation objects
and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
- Local message displays
- Data logs
- Trends
- Alarms
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
RSTRAINER FOR CONTROLLOGIX FUNDAMENTALS
9393-RSTCLX
9393-RSTCLXENF*
20 Hours
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive computer-based training course teaches students the core tasks required when working with a ControlLogix control system. This course provides an overview
of the Logix5550®, Logix5555®, and Logix5563® controllers, I/O modules, communications modules, and motion modules. Students will learn how to navigate through
RSLogix 5000 software and learn about the four RSLogix 5000 programming languages. Through demonstrations, students will learn about the various settings and options in
the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example control applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Are users of the Rockwell Automation ControlLogix family of programmable
• ControlLogix overview
controllers who need refresher training
• RSLogix 5000 software overview
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of the Rockwell Automation
• Chassis and power supplies
ControlLogix family of programmable controllers and RSLogix 5000 software
• Controllers
PREREQUISITES
• I/O, communications, and motion modules
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Module configuration (connections, module configuration)
• Tag structures (digital, analog, DeviceNet, DH/RIO)
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Programming (languages, project file, numbering systems)
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Software
202
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
5 Hours
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and
produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the
required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 control systems who need
• Identify main window components
refresher training
• Configure the display
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Navigate through the software
PREREQUISITES
• Create and manage project files
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Configure a controller
• Organize tasks, programs, and routines
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Configure a local I/O module
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
• Produce and consume tags
Studio
5000
and
Logix5000
Procedures
Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Export and import tags
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
9393-RSTLKOFFENF*
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
203
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and
produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through the demonstrations, students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and
see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 control systems who need
• Enter and edit ladder logic elements
refresher training
• Configure ladder logic display options
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Enter and edit function block diagrams
PREREQUISITES
• Configure function block diagram display options
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Enter and edit structured text
• Completion of the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
• Configure the structured text display
(9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF or WBT1PACK) e-Learning training
• Create, deploy, and manage an add-on instruction
course
or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended
• Verify project components
• Search and replace text
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Create a cross reference list
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Motion Control
5 Hours
Condition Monitoring
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE –
OFFLINE PROGRAMMING
Computer-Based
Training
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
9393-RSTLKPRJENF*
Software
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE –
PROJECT CONFIGURATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE –
ONLINE MONITORING
9393-RSTLX5KON
9393-RSTLKONENF*
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Computer-Based
Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is part of a series of e-Learning
courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to establish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and
identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the
required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 control systems who need
• Establish communications
refresher training
• Monitor status
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Identify and correct faults
PREREQUISITES
• Program ladder logic online
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
(9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF or WBT1PACK)
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
(9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF or WBT1PACK)
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE – MOTION
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
9393-RSTLKMOTENF*
5 Hours
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is part of a series of e-Learning
courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to configure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through step-bystep demonstrations. Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 control systems who need
• Define a typical RSLogix 5000 motion control system
refresher training
• Compare axis control modules
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Configure the servo modules
PREREQUISITES
• Configure the controller
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add and configure a SERCOS servo drive axis
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
• Add and configure an analog servo drive axis
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
• Understand the motion instruction tag structure
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
• Compare immediate and synchronous instructions
(9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF or WBT1PACK)
• Test and tune an axis
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
• Use motion direct commands
(9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF or WBT1PACK)
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
(9393-RSTLX5KON/9393-RSTLKONENF or WBT1PACK)
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Software
204
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
20 Hours
RSTRAINER FOR SLC 500 - HARDWARE FUNDAMENTALS
Computer-Based
Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 5 project. This course provides information on how to install, configure,
and navigate through RSLogix 5 software. Students will learn how to transfer an RSLogix 5 project from a computer to the processor, document ladder logic, and monitor data.
Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following topics and tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5 Software who need refresher training
• Work with RSTrainer software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5 software
• Install RSLogix 5 software
PREREQUISITES
• Screen layout, navigation, and help
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Offline programming (new project, ladder logic editing, database documentation,
reports, backup utilities)
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Online programming (communications, diagnostics: searching and data
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
table monitoring)
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ22
• Upload/download and go online
PLC-5
Documentation
Reference
Guide
CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 5 SOFTWARE
9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTLX5ENF*
9393-RSTSLCHENE
9393-RSTSLCHENF*
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
205
Drives
Software
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Condition Monitoring
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the core hardware of SLC 500 control systems. The course provides an overview of the SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, and
SLC 5/04 programmable controllers, concepts, and terminology. Students will learn about chassis, power supplies, and processors. This course presents information about the
SLC 500 communication options, discrete and analog I/O modules, and hardware configuration.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation SLC 500 processors who need refresher training
• Channel 0
• SLC 500 family
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of the SLC family of processors and
• Battery
• Chassis
RSLogix 500 software
• Power supplies
• Memory module
PREREQUISITES
• Processor overview
• Communication options
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Status indicators
• Discrete and analog I/O modules
• Keyswitch
• Hardware configuration
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Channel 1
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Motion Control
5 Hours
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSTRAINER FOR SLC 500 - PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS
9393-RSTSLCPENE
9393-RSTSLCPENF*
7 Hours
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches students the core programming concepts of SLC 500 control systems. Students will learn about memory organization,
addressing, ladder logic concepts, and the SLC 500 operating cycle. Students will learn about memory organization, addressing, ladder logic concepts, and the SLC 500
operating cycle. This course provides an overview of RSLogix 500 software. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Computer-Based
Training
OBJECTIVES
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Memory organization
• Addressing (address types, indexed and indirect addressing)
• RSLogix 500 software overview
• Numbering systems
• Ladder logic programs
• Operating cycles
• Status file
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE –
OFFLINE PROGRAMMING (ALSO AVAILABLE IN SPANISH)
INTENDED AUDIENCE
Individuals who:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation SLC 500 processors who need refresher training
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of the SLC family of processors and
RSLogix 500 software
PREREQUISITES
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
9393-RST500OFENE
9393-RST500OFENF*
5 Hours
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches students the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project offline. Students will learn how to create and
navigate through an RSLogix 500 project, configure I/O modules, and create program and data files. Students will learn how to enter ladder logic using a variety of methods
and verify a project so it will be ready to download. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of
knowledge and learning tools. Students will have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Software who need
• Configure the display
refresher training
• Navigate through the menus, ladder view, and project view
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
• Create a new project
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
• Configure I/O modules in a project
PREREQUISITES
• Create program and data files
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Enter ladder logic
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
• Assign addresses to ladder logic
is suggested
• Verify a project
• Copy, paste, and move rungs
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Edit with .SLC library files
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Software
206
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches students the core tasks required for communicating with and monitoring an online RSLogix 500 project. Students will
learn how to configure communication drivers and upload, download, and go online with an RSLogix 500 project. Students will learn how to go online and use RSLogix
Emulator 500 software, which will allow students to test their project in a non-production environment. This course covers how to enter ladder logic online and use a variety
of data monitoring tools, such as histograms and trends. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of
knowledge and learning tools. Students will have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Software who need
• Create and interpret data
• Configure communications software
refresher training
table monitors
• Transfer an RSLogix 500 project file
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
between a computer and a processor • Create and configure trends
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
and histograms
• Use RSLogix Emulator 500 software
PREREQUISITES
• Edit ladder logic while online with an • Use workspace manager
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Force inputs and outputs
RSLogix 500 project
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
is suggested
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
9393-RST500DSENE
9393-RST500DSENF*
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
207
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Students will learn to enter a variety
of project documentation, such as rung comments and page titles, that students can use to improve their own RSLogix 500 projects. Students will learn how to import and
export RSLogix 500 databases and how to backup their RSLogix 500 projects. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide
students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Software who need
• Use RSLogix 500 backup utilities
refresher training
• Add symbols, address descriptions, instruction, rung comments, and page titles
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
• Use database tools and import/export a database
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
• Reporting
PREREQUISITES
• Search an RSLogix 500 project
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
is suggested
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Motion Control
5 Hours
Software
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE –
DOCUMENTING AND SEARCHING
Computer-Based
Training
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
RSTRAINER FOR RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE – ONLINE MONITORING
9393-RST500ONENE
9393-RST500ONENF*
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSTRAINER FOR HYDRAULICS
9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTHYDENF*
20 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This computer-based training course is designed to teach students the fundamental concepts, principles, and equipment used in hydraulic systems. Students gain knowledge
about pumps, valves, actuators, and fluids that comprise hydraulic systems through example hydraulic simulations. Problem-solving simulations and troubleshooting
situations help students learn about the operation and characteristics of various types of hydraulic equipment.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
• Are users of hydraulic systems who need refresher training
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Need to know components, functions, and basic operation of hydraulic systems
• Basic functions and principles of hydraulic systems
that include pumping, conducting, filtering, controlling, and actuating
• Pumps (gear, vane, piston)
• Valves (pressure control, flow control, check, directional control)
PREREQUISITES
• Actuators (linear, rotary, hydraulic motors)
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Fluids (hydraulic fluid oil additives, auxiliary equipment, contaminants and
filtration, conductors and fittings)
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
RSTRAINER FOR RSLINX SOFTWARE
9393-RSTLINX
9393-RSTLINXENF*
20 Hours
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course provides students with a basic understanding of the powerful monitoring, configuration, communication, and diagnostic
capabilities of RSLinx software. The skills students will learn will enable them to use RSLinx software for the acquisition of PLC data and to integrate the display, archiving,
and management of critical data. Students will learn to use RSLinx software to exchange data between Rockwell Automation hardware and software and commercial
software applications.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
Individuals who:
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Are users of RSLinx software who need refresher training
• Driver configuration
• Are interested in RSLinx software
• Diagnostic tools and utilities (network monitoring tools, configuration tools and
• Have a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
security, utilities: backup, restore, EDS hardware installation tools, etc.)
PREREQUISITES
• Client application communications (DDE/OPC topics, Alias topics, DDE/OPC
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
diagnostics)
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Condition Monitoring
Software
208
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PURPOSE
This software is a student tracking and reporting utility for use with the RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses. It provides similar functionality to a learning
management system by maintaining, recording, and managing student information for the RSTrainer computer-based training courses. This advanced system maintains every
student’s progress, scores, and personal information in an easy-to-use interface and database system that eliminates the burden of manually documenting employee training
information.
OBJECTIVES
INTENDED AUDIENCE
This software will allow the following information to be tracked for each student
Training professionals, managers, or supervisors who maintain several students’
completing the RSTrainer computer-based training courses:
records and progress in a training program
• Passwords and log-on information
PREREQUISITES
• Account and program access
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Progress
• Scores
RELATED PRODUCTS
All RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses
OBJECTIVES
After completing this computer-based training course, students should be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Introduce modular programming
• Select modes and states
• Break down states and equipment modules into steps
• Identify equipment and control modules
• Organize unit procedures
• Define interfaces for procedures and modules
• Implement modular programming tools and modular programming
into RSLogix 5000 software
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
• Control engineers who want to improve the efficiency of their software
development process
• Plant engineers who need to integrate and maintain lines of machines
• Technicians and other maintenance individuals who need to interpret and
maintain modular software programs
PREREQUISITES
• First-hand knowledge of how your machines operate
• Able to organize data into programs and routines and create user-defined data
types in RSLogix 5000 software
• Able to write and program ladder diagrams in RSLogix 5000 software
• Students can use these courses to get the prerequisite RSLogix 5000 skills:
- RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming (CCP151)
- RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development (CCP143)
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
209
Motion Control
Drives
COURSE PURPOSE
This computer-based training course provides students with the skills and knowledge to produce a software design specification for a machine or line of machines. The
modular programming concepts in this course are derived from the ISA-88.01 industry standard and include the OMAC PackML state and data models as defined in the
ISA-TR88.00.02 technical report. The specification will follow modular programming guidelines and describe: equipment and control modules for controlling the machine’s
I/O devices, procedures for supervising and coordinating the modules, data structures for interfacing procedures with modules, state model for machine’s overall operation,
and naming conventions for software components. By using a modular approach to software design, software becomes much easier to reuse from project to project. As the
base of modular code increases, development time decreases. Additionally, the quality of the code increases because students will be able to refine it each time they reuse it.
Process Control
9393-MODPROG
Condition Monitoring
MODULAR PROGRAMMING FOR MACHINE APPLICATIONS
Computer-Based
Training
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Computer-Based
Training
9393-RSTSMGRENF*
Software
RSTRAINER ENTERPRISE EDITION FOR STUDENT MANAGER
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Personal Trainer
Create automation expertise with one-on-one training
Benefits
Computer-Based
Training
• Access to an automation expert
• Job-relevant training adjusted according
to the individual’s needs and skill levels
• Documented best practices to
minimize production errors
• Increased employee competency through
extensive training, hands-on practice and
experience with your installed equipment,
systems and applications
• Reduced training expenses associated
with off-site training
• Flexible schedule – daily and weekly
options available
Automation Expertise
Computer-Based
Training
This highly-focused, on-the-job training lays the foundation for
successful skill and knowledge transfer. Use the Personal Trainer
to provide in-depth technical experience or to mentor newly
hired employees.
Motion Control
The Personal Trainer is an experienced Rockwell Automation
instructor and technical expert who develops and implements
an individualized training plan for one to two individuals
on-site at your facility. The Personal Trainer mentors individuals
throughout the hands-on experience to improve skills
and knowledge.
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Training Deliverables
• A dedicated on-site instructor for one-on-one or two-on-one
training for a pre-determined time period
• Training materials to facilitate learning and knowledge transfer
• Hands-on activity and experience performing job tasks with
installed equipment
• Identification and implementation of best practices including
troubleshooting and/or programming techniques that use
critical-thinking skills and job aids
• Improved confidence in job skills as a result of the training
occurring in the real-world environment
Software/Hardware
• Installation and configuration
• “Quick Start” assistance
• Communication setup
• Reporting
Integrated Architecture
• Integration
• Communication setup
• Programming languages and power
programming techniques
Legacy Products
• Migration paths
• Configuration
• Communications
Application
• Various uses and integration of
Rockwell Automation products
• Conversions
For more information
Contact your local authorized Allen-Bradley distributor,
Rockwell Automation sales office, or call 440-646-3434 (option 7).
Software
Catalog #: PTRAINER
210
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training Curriculum
AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS
Fundamentals of AC/DC
Motors and Drives
PLC Fundamentals
VISUALIZATION
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Applications and Displays
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Drawing Objects
FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition Interactive Objects
CONTROLLOGIX/RSLOGIX 5000
RSLogix 5000 Software Project Configuration
RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming
RSLogix 5000 Software Online Monitoring
RSLogix 5000 Software Motion
NETWORKS
EtherNet/IP - Hardware
and IP Addressing
EtherNet/IP Communications and
Diagnostics
Note: Consult course description for prerequisites
212
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
SLC 500/RSLOGIX 500
SLC 500 - Hardware
Fundamentals
SLC 500 - Programming
Fundamentals
Also
Available
in Spanish
RSLogix 500 Software Offline Programming
RSLogix 500 Software Online Monitoring
RSLogix 500 Software Documenting and Searching
GENERAL INDUSTRIAL
Electrical Theory
Industrial Electrical
Industrial Safety
Industrial Mechanical
Also
Available
in Spanish
Industrial Hydraulics
Industrial Pneumatics
Mobile Hydraulics
Also
Available
in Spanish
Mobile Electrical
Web-based training is accessed via Rockwell Automation University Online.
One ePass is needed to activate a single web-based training course.
ePasses are valid one year from the date of purchase.
Product Description
Web-based Training Single ePass
Web-based Training ePass 5 Pack
Web-based Training ePass 20 Pack
Web-based Training ePass 50 Pack
Web-based Training ePass 100 Pack
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Product ID
WBT-1PACK
WBT-5PACK
WBT-20PACK
WBT-50PACK
WBT-100PACK
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
213
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FUNDAMENTALS OF AC/DC MOTORS AND DRIVES
ePass/WBT1PACK
20 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course is a knowledge-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts and
terminology. Through animated simulations, students will learn the various components and functions of drives and motors. Students will learn to recognize AC and DC drive
and motor hardware and functions through example drive applications.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Recognize AC and DC motor hardware and operation
• Select a replacement motor
• Recognize line protection and filtering device hardware and functions
• Prevent electrostatic damage to drive components
• Recognize AC and DC drive hardware and functions
• Recognize AC and DC motor braking methods
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Preform pre-power and power-on checks
• Monitor and control a drive using a HIM
• Select a drive for basic applications
Web-Based Training
PLC FUNDAMENTALS
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation AC and DC drives or drive software who
need refresher training
• Are interested in the capabilities of AC and DC drive hardware and software
PREREQUISITES
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understanding of basic electrical and electronic concepts
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
CATALOG #
ABT-D100-TSG10
ePass/WBT1PACK
20 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of important PLC principles and concepts. Students will understand how to connect to PLC
hardware and how they function in various control systems. Students will study the various programming conventions, as well as practical issues about automation controls
and components.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand the basics of programmable logic controllers
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Data handling instructions
• What is a PLC?
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Comparison instructions
• PLC hardware
• Math instructions
• PLC numbering systems
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Sequencing instructions
• How is a PLC structured
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
• Specialty instructions
• How to program a PLC
PLC-5
Documentation
Reference
Guide
CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
• Practical issues
• Devices connected to a PLC
• Product support
• How to use timers
• How to use counters
Condition Monitoring
Software
214
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
5 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
215
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the concepts of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) communications and diagnostics. During this course, students
will learn how to establish EtherNet/IP connections, send messages, and perform basic networking diagnostics. Helpful animations, background information, answers to
frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for setting up communications over an EtherNet/IP network
• Configure an Ethernet/IP module in a local and remote chassis
• Are interested in understanding how to send messages over an EtherNet/IP
• Configure a digital and analog I/O module in a chassis
network, and perform basic networking diagnostics
• Modify EtherNet/IP module parameters
PREREQUISITES
• Add a controller to an I/O configuration
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Produce and consume data over an EtherNet/IP network
• Communicate between multiple controllers on an EtherNet/IP network using an
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
MSG instruction
• Configure the 9300-8EDM Ethernet diagnostic module
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
• Obtain computer IP addresses
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
• Access diagnostic information using a web browser
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Condition Monitoring
ETHERNET/IP – COMMUNICATIONS AND DIAGNOSTICS
Web-Based Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course covers the fundamentals of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) hardware and IP addressing. During this course, students
will learn how to design and optimize an EtherNet/IP network and configure an EtherNet/IP driver and IP addresses for EtherNet/IP devices. Helpful animations, background
information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing EtherNet/IP networks
• Design and optimize EtherNet/IP networks
• Are interested in optimizing EtherNet/IP networks, configuring communications,
• Configure an EtherNet/IP communications driver using RSLinx
and configuring EtherNet/IP addresses
• Ping an IP address
PREREQUISITES
• Configure and modify EtherNet/IP addresses using:
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- BOOTP-DHCP server software
- RSLinx software
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
- RSLogix 5000 software
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
ePass/WBT1PACK
Software
ETHERNET/IP – HARDWARE AND IP ADDRESSING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION –
APPLICATIONS AND DISPLAYS
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications and displays. This course is part of a
series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME software. During this course, students will learn how to work with default graphic displays, configure
application-wide settings, configure RSLinx Enterprise, and work with tags in an application.
OBJECTIVES
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Use the application explorer
• Use default graphic displays
• Create a new display
• Use the startup editor
• Define project settings
• Configure security and language options
• Use direct-reference tags in an application
• Create and use new HMI tags
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME applications
• Are interested in configuring application-wide settings, configuring RSLinx
Enterprise software, and working with tags in an application
PREREQUISITES
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
FactoryTalk View ME & PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
Web-Based Training
FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION – DRAWING OBJECTS
CATALOG #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) drawing objects in graphic displays. This course is part
of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME software. During this course, students will be introduced to a variety of basic graphic objects and learn
how to modify their properties, animate them, and arrange them on the displays. Students will learn how to use objects from the graphic library.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME displays
• Understand drawing objects
• Are interested in learning about basic drawing objects
• Understand object properties
PREREQUISITES
• Arrange objects
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add objects from the graphic library
• Use the object explorer
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Animate drawing objects
FactoryTalk View ME & PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
Condition Monitoring
Software
216
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course provides information about creating FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) interactive objects. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME software. During this course, students will learn how to work interactive and advanced objects in graphic displays
as well as create and configure data logs, trends, and alarms.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are responsible for designing FactoryTalk View ME displays
• Add advanced features to
• Create and configure:
• Are interested in learning about interactive objects
interactive objects
- Push buttons
PREREQUISITES
• Create parameter files and
- Indicators
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
tag placeholders
- Display objects
- Control list selectors
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
- Gauges
FactoryTalk View ME & PanelView Plus
- Graph objects
Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
- Display navigation objects
- Local message displays
- Data logs
- Trends
- Alarms
ePass/WBT1PACK
COURSE PURPOSE
This web-based training course teaches students the core hardware of SLC 500 control systems. This course provides an overview of the SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, and
SLC 5/04 programmable controllers, concepts, and terminology. During this course, students will learn about chassis, power supplies, and processors. This course presents
information about the SLC 500 communication options, discrete and analog I/O modules, and hardware configuration.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following topics:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation SLC 500 processors who need refresher training
• SLC 500 family
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of the SLC family of processors and
• Chassis
RSLogix 500 software
• Power supplies
PREREQUISITES
• Processors (status indicators, keyswitch, channel 1, channel 0, battery, and
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
memory module)
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
217
Software
Condition Monitoring
• Communication options
• Discrete and analog I/O modules
• Hardware configuration
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Drives
SLC 500 – HARDWARE FUNDAMENTALS
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
ePass/WBT1PACK
Process Control
FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION –
INTERACTIVE OBJECTS
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500 – PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS
ePass/WBT1PACK
7 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This web-based training course teaches students the core programming concepts of SLC 500 control systems. During this course, students will learn about memory
organization, addressing, ladder logic concepts, and the SLC 500 operating cycle. Students will be provided with an overview of RSLogix 500 software.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following topics:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation SLC 500 processors who need refresher training
• Memory organization
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of the SLC family of processors and
• Addressing (address types, indexed and indirect addressing)
RSLogix 500 software
• RSLogix 500 software overview
PREREQUISITES
• Numbering systems
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Ladder programs
• Operating cycle
• Status file
Web-Based Training
RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE – OFFLINE PROGRAMMING
(ALSO AVAILABLE IN SPANISH)
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
CATALOG #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project. During this course, students will learn how to create and
navigate through an RSLogix 500 project, configure I/O modules, and create program and data files. Students will learn how to enter ladder logic using a variety of methods
and verify a project so it will be ready to download. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of
knowledge and learning tools. Students will have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Software who need
• Navigate through the RSLogix 500 software
refresher training
• Configure the display
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
• Create a new project
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
• Configure I/O modules in a project
PREREQUISITES
• Create program and data files
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Enter ladder logic
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
• Assign addresses to ladder logic
is suggested
• Verify a project
• Copy, paste, and move rungs
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Edit with .SLC library files
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Software
218
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
5 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
219
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Students will learn to enter a variety of
project documentation, such as rung comments and page titles, that students can use to improve their own RSLogix 500 projects. Students will learn how to import and
export RSLogix 500 databases and how to backup their RSLogix 500 projects.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 software who need
• Use RSLogix 500 backup utilities
refresher training
• Add symbols and address descriptions
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
• Add instruction comments, rung comments, and page titles
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
• Use database tools
PREREQUISITES
• Import and export a database
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Print reports
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
• Search an RSLogix 500 project
is suggested
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Condition Monitoring
RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE – DOCUMENTING AND SEARCHING
Web-Based Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for communicating with and monitoring an RSLogix 500 project online. During this course, students
will learn how to configure communication drivers and upload, download, and go online with an RSLogix 500 project. Students will learn how to go online and use RSLogix
Emulator 500 software, which will allow students to test their project in a non-production environment. This course covers how to enter ladder logic online and use a variety
of data monitoring tools, such as histograms and trends.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Software who need
• Configure communications
refresher training
• Transfer an RSLogix 500 project file
• Need to configure and navigate through RSLogix 500 software
• Edit ladder logic online
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
• Monitor data
PREREQUISITES
• Force inputs and outputs
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common processor and ladder logic terms and operation
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
is suggested
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
ePass/WBT1PACK
Software
RSLOGIX 500 SOFTWARE – ONLINE MONITORING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE – PROJECT CONFIGURATION
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Web-Based Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and
produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the
required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of RSLogix 5000 control systems who need refresher training
• Install RSLogix 5000 software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Identify main window components
PREREQUISITES
• Configure the display
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Navigate through the software
• Create and manage project files
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Configure a controller
• Organize tasks, programs, and routines
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
• Configure a local I/O module
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
• Organize data
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Produce and consume tags
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
• Export and import tags
RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE – OFFLINE PROGRAMMING
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is part of a series of
e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and
produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through the demonstrations, students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and
see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
• Are users of RSLogix 5000 software who need refresher training
about the following tasks:
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Enter and edit ladder logic elements
• Configure ladder logic display options
PREREQUISITES
• Print a ladder logic routine
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Enter and edit function block diagrams
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration web-based
• Configure function block diagram display options
training course (ePass/WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000
• Print a function block diagram
software is recommended
• Enter and edit structured text
• Configure the structured text display
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
• Print a structured text routine
• Verify project components
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
• Search and replace text
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
• Create a cross reference list
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Software
220
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is part of a series of e-Learning
courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to establish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and
identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the
required tasks for example automation control applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of RSLogix 5000 software who need refresher training
• Establish communications
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
• Monitor status
PREREQUISITES
• Print a ladder logic routine
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Identify and correct faults
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
• Program ladder logic online
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
• Print a function block diagram
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
ePass/WBT1PACK
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
221
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is part of a series of e-Learning
courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to configure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through
step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who:
about the following tasks:
• Are users of RSLogix 5000 motion control systems who need refresher training
• Define a typical RSLogix 5000 motion control system
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 motion
• Compare axis control modules
control software
• Configure the servo modules
PREREQUISITES
• Configure the controller
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Add and configure a SERCOS servo drive axis
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
• Add and configure an analog servo drive axis
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
• Understand the motion instruction tag structure
RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
• Compare immediate and synchronous instructions
RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
• Test and tune an axis
RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
• Use motion direct commands
RELATED JOB AIDS AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
CATALOG #
Logix5000 System Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Condition Monitoring
RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE – MOTION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
ePass/WBT1PACK
Software
RSLOGIX 5000 SOFTWARE – ONLINE MONITORING
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ELECTRICAL THEORY
ePass/WBT1PACK
15 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course begins with the basics — the atom, electrical charge, voltage, current, and more. The basics are followed by an in-depth,
theoretical approach to circuit analysis, basic magnetism, magnetic induction, and single- and poly-phase AC circuits.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand electrical theory systems
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Electrical fundamentals
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Basic physics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit fundamentals
Circuit analysis
Basic magnetism
Magnetic circuits
Single-pass AC circuits
Magnetic induction
Poly-phase AC circuits
Web-Based Training
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICAL
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important electrical concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws as
they apply to electricity and basic electrical circuits. Students will study the various components of electrical systems and how they function and interact with each other.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand basic electrical concepts
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Electrical fundamentals
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Circuit fundamentals
• Circuit analysis
• Basic magnetism
• Circuit components
• Electrical testers
• Schematics
Condition Monitoring
Software
222
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
15 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
223
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important mechanical concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws as
they apply to mechanical power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will study the various components of mechanical systems and how they function and
interact with each other.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand basic mechanical concepts
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Basic physics
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Linear actuators
• Clutches
• Brakes
• Clutch/brake combinations
• Bearings
• Gears
• Drives
• Couplings
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Drives
INDUSTRIAL MECHANICAL
Web-Based Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course covers the ten common safety concerns in industrial, manufacturing, and construction environments. It delivers an interactive
training experience focused on safety from an employee perspective.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand basic industrial safety standards and procedures
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Introduction to safety
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Walking and working surfaces
• Prevention and protection plans
• Personal protective equipment
• Electrical safety
• Machine guarding
• Chemical safety
• Powered industrial trucks
• Industrial hygiene
• Ergonomics
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
ePass/WBT1PACK
Process Control
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important hydraulic concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws
as they apply to hydraulic power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will study the various components of hydraulic systems and how they function and
interact with each other.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand basic hydraulic concepts
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Fluid conditioning
• Basic hydraulic physics
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Check valves
• Pumps
• Accessory components
• Actuators
• Fluid conductors
• Pressure control
• Schematics
• Directional control
• Basic system design
• Flow control valves
• Modular control valves
Web-Based Training
INDUSTRIAL PNEUMATICS
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Web-Based Training
Drives
Process Control
COURSE PURPOSE
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important pneumatic concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws as
they apply to pneumatics, as well as understand schematics and system design. Students will study the various components of pneumatic systems and how they function and
interact with each other.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need to understand basic pneumatic concepts
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Directional control valves
• Electrical physics
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Accessories
• Compressors
• Air line conductors
• Air dryers
• Vacuum
• Air preparation
• Schematics
• Air distribution
• Actuators
Condition Monitoring
Software
224
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
5 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
225
Software
Condition Monitoring
COURSE PURPOSE
This course delivers an interactive training experience to assist students in working with electrical systems of mobile equipment. Students will learn the various physics laws
related to electric power, as well as the electric components and circuits associated with these systems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need a better understanding of mobile electrical equipment
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Electrical fundamentals
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Circuit fundamentals
• Circuit analysis
• Basic magnetism
• Circuit components
• Electrical testers
• Charging and starting systems
Web-Based Training
5 Hours
Drives
MOBILE ELECTRICAL (ALSO AVAILABLE IN SPANISH)
Web-Based Training
COURSE PURPOSE
This course delivers an interactive training experience covering the concepts needed to understand and work with the hydraulic systems of mobile equipment. Students
will learn various physics laws related to hydraulic power, as well as the hydraulic components and circuits associated with these systems. Students will study the basics of
hydrostatic transmissions, as well as valves and maintenance systems common to almost all combustion engine vehicles. Students will study the symbols and language of
hydraulic schematics, helping them better understand their systems.
OBJECTIVES
WHO SHOULD ATTEND?
After completing this web-based training course, students should be knowledgeable Individuals who need a better understanding of mobile hydraulics equipment
about the following topics:
PREREQUISITES
• Modular control valves
• Fluid power physics
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course
• Fluid conditioning
• Pumps
• Check valves
• Actuators
• Accessory components
• Hydraulic transmissions
• Fluid conductors
• Pressure control
• Schematics
• Directional control valves
• Flow control valves
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
ePass/WBT1PACK
Process Control
MOBILE HYDRAULICS (ALSO AVAILABLE IN SPANISH)
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Job Aids
Your Training is Over. Back on the Job. Now What?
Job Aids Provide Convenient On-the-Job
Performance Support
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Inevitably, no matter how effective training is, as more
time passes, information that’s not used frequently
will be forgotten. Yet, as industrial technologies continue
to increase in complexity, recalling each
critical piece of information becomes essential to
your company’s success.
We’ve got you covered: Rockwell Automation job
aids provide on-the-job support at a glance.
Our extensive selection of job aids, including procedures
guides, troubleshooting guides, and reference guides,
cover a diverse range of technologies and job functions.
Available in a variety of languages and complemented
by a compact, easy-to-use design, job aids are ready to
go to work with you for the long haul.
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Procedures Guides
Procedures guides help ensure that your employees
always follow best practices and perform within
established guidelines. Covering the gamut of
pertinent software related tasks in programming and
troubleshooting, our procedures guides provide
easy-to-follow, step-by-step instructions that result in
more productive employees. First time, every time.
Drives
Troubleshooting Guides
Put away those cumbersome technical manuals!
Rockwell Automation troubleshooting guides provide
an essential “just-in-time” resource when you need
it most. With quick access to product-specific, bestpractice information, users can quickly navigate through
a series of flow chart questions, checks, and actions to
help identify equipment problems and their
appropriate resolutions.
Process Control
Reference Guides
Reference guides provide users the information they
need, the moment they need it by organizing critical,
frequently used information in a straightforward,
intuitive format. Reference guides come in four
different types:
Condition Monitoring
• Document Reference Guides provide the most
frequently used information found in a full technical
manual.
• Quick Reference Guides define parameters for a
specific device or system.
• Quick Reference Cards are the ultimate in portability.
Custom Job Aids
Custom job aids from Rockwell Automation provide
you with a proven source for technical documentation
customized for your specific facility and application. Not
only can you get a cost-effective, tailored solution covering
the ins and outs of our extensive product lines, but we can
cover non-Rockwell Automation equipment.
From step-by-step troubleshooting procedures, to
quality-inspection sheets, recipe setup sheets and more;
you’ll find maintenance and systems engineers spending
more time doing what they do best.
Rockwell Automation custom job aids: Your specific
information when and where you need it most.
For More Information
For more information about Rockwell Automation
Training Services go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
When Should You Consider Job Aids
Software
• Employees need refresher training.
• Complex routines are not performed
frequently enough to commit to memory.
• Your manufacturing environment demands
straightforward access to a large knowledge base.
• Current documentation is unorganized, inaccessible,
and is not circulated.
• Employees perform similar job functions, but have
widely varying skills.
• Employee turnover creates need for
on-the-job support.
• Glossaries organize and define standard terminology.
226
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Mobile
Mobile
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Rockwell Automation Interactive iBooks!
Not just a textbook but a new and exciting way to read and learn about
industrial automation concepts straight from your iPad®.
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Rockwell Automation iBooks are highly engaging and include
diverse learning activities:
• Videos/Animations – a wide variety of videos and animations
world examples
• Podcasts – listen to interviews with automation workers that
and industries
• Web links – access to supplemental information instantly
• Check Knowledge – relevant questions will test your
understanding of concepts
to enhance concepts and provide realoffer unique perspectives of various jobs
Availability
To purchase Rockwell Automation iBooks, visit the iTunes® Store.
Introduction to Automation iBook®
The Introduction to Automation iBook will provide you with a broad and fundamental understanding of industrial
automation. Topics range from an overview of common automation industries to an introduction of basic
automated system components, such as controllers, I/O, drives, and HMI (Human Machine Interface). In addition,
you will learn common automation terminology, what tools are used with industrial automation, and what careers
may be available to them within this field. The variety of learning resources integrated in this iBook will give you a
solid foundation with automated systems and prepare you for more advanced automation-related topics.
Mobile
Mobile
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Introduction to Automation Chapters:
• Identifying Common Industries and Applications in Industrial Automation
• Understanding Industrial Automation Careers
• Identifying Industrial Automation Standards and Regulations
• Understanding Basic Mechanical Components
• Understanding Automation Control Systems
• Understanding Controllers
• Identifying I/O Devices and Modules
• Understanding Networks
• Recognizing Logic
• Recognizing Basic Programming Concepts
• Identifying System Documentation
• Identifying Human Machine Interfaces
• Identifying AC and DC Motors and Drives
• Understanding Safety in Automation
• Understanding Process Control
Audience
This book is intended for individuals who have little or no experience with automation systems.
Software
228
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
AC and DC Drives iBook
Safety
The AC and DC Drives iBook will provide you with an understanding of AC and DC drives, including basic
configuring, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting using a HIM or HMI. You will identify basic components
common to industrial drive applications. You will also learn the characteristics of AC and DC drives in various
examples of real-world applications. This book includes key concepts, definitions, links to multimedia examples
and more to give you an interactive learning experience.
Mobile
AC and DC Drives Chapters:
• Identifying Drive System Components and Concepts
• Identifying Line Protection and Filtering Methods for
AC and DC Drive Systems
• Recognizing DC Motor Functions Controlled by DC Drives
• Identifying DC Drive Hardware and Functions
• Recognizing AC Motor Functions Controlled by AC Drives
• Identifying AC Drive Hardware and Functions
• Identifying Braking Methods for AC and DC Drive Systems
• Comparing AC and DC Drive Systems for Basic Applications
• Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Drive Components
• Identifying Electrical Measuring Tools and Functions
• Identifying Basic Startup Procedures for AC and DC Drives
• Using a HIM to Configure, Control, and Monitor a Drive
• Performing Preventative Maintenance and Basic Troubleshooting for Drives
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
229
Software
Condition Monitoring
Process Control
Mobile
Audience
This book is intended for individuals who have some experience with electric motors and are interested in
understanding AC and DC drives.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix Troubleshooting With a New Mobile Learning App
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
The ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide mobile app contains electronic
paths that walk you through faults that can occur on a system.
This interactive mobile app is specifically designed for use on the plant floor.
The troubleshooting guide is filled with procedures, error code
information, and status indicator listings with recommended actions,
reference charts, and hardware/software diagrams.
Safety
Mobile App Features:
• Detailed illustrations with pertinent troubleshooting information
• Consistent starting point from which to logically begin troubleshooting
• Important safety considerations, precautions, and general warnings
• Logical progression of questions, causes, and actions to determine
the problem
• Easy and fast navigation from screen to screen
• Search and bookmark functionality
• Animations of LED lights, hardware views, software procedures
• Embedded videos, user manuals, diagrams, PDF documents
• Definition hot-spots, links to embedded glossary, and ability to look up
terms via web
• Ability to add, access, and delete user notes
• User-friendly, high-resolution interface
Mobile
Compatibility
• Apple iOS 5.0 and above iPhone® and iPad
• Windows XP
• Windows 7
• Mac® 10.7
Troubleshooting on-demand when and where you need it
Mobile
Availability
The ControlLogix Troubleshooting App can be
found in iTunes.
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software
230
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Workstations
Workstations
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Training Workstations
Practice and Reinforce Your Job Skills
Hands-on Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Workstations provide ideal practice for:
• New hires
• New technologies
• System upgrades
• New production processes
• Transitioning employees
• Competency assessments
Safety
Networks
Training workstations can now be added
to Rockwell Automation Parts Management
Agreements, thereby giving you greater
flexibility and value. Ask your local
Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor for more details.
Workstations
Superior tools and technology are the most obvious
building blocks of success in today’s manufacturing
operations. Those with the best tools coupled with
strategic innovation tend to get the best results. But this
isn’t the whole equation because even automated tools
are essentially “enablers”… extensions of a machine
user whose knowledge, skill, and productivity are the
ultimate drivers of your success. Rockwell Automation
understands this, which is why we build training
workstations to optimize the productivity of both your
manufacturing and human assets.
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
Built from the same proven Rockwell Automation
technologies you use every day, our training
workstations precisely mirror your manufacturing
processes for the most realistic experience possible.
Whether you’re introducing new skills, bringing skills
up-to-date or conducting pre-deployment testing
on a new process before going “live,” our training
workstations effectively get employees up-to-speed,
while supporting manufacturing’s human dimension
for the best results.
Software
232
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Top 10 Workstations
Workstation
Part Number
Automation Ferris Wheel Workstation
ABT-TDFW100
PowerFlex 755 Workstation
ABT-TDPF755
ControlLogix Workstation –
No Motion and No Controller
(7-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX2NP
CompactLogix Workstation
ABT-TDIALITE-A
Kinetix 6500 Workstation
ABT-TDK6500
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation
ABT-TD20941
ControlLogix Workstation –
No Motion (10-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3
ControlLogix Workstation –
No Motion and No Controller
(10-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3NP
SLC 500 Workstation - SLC 5/03
Processor (7-Slot Chassis)
ABT-TDSLCN2
PlantPAx Process System Workstation
ABT-TDPAX
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
For practice exercises related to training workstations, these self-paced lab books are available with a workstation purchase.
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Configuration and Startup
ABT-CCA161TLB
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Communications on DeviceNet
ABT-CCA162TLB
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
ABT-CCA163TLB
Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic
ABT-CCN142TLB
Studio 5000 Logix Designer:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
(requires a 10-slot ControlLogix chassis)
ABT-CCP146TLB
Studio 5000 Logix Designer:
Basic Ladder Logic Programming
(requires a 10-slot ControlLogix chassis)
ABT-CCP151TLB
Studio 5000 Logix Designer:
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
(requires a 10-slot ControlLogix chassis)
ABT-CCP153TLB
DeviceNet Workstation (ABT-TDDNET2-A)
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx
Configuration and Troubleshooting
ABT-CCP164TLB
EtherNet/IP Workstation (ABT-TDENET5700)
EtherNet/IP Design and Troubleshooting
ABT-CCP180TLB
CompactLogix Workstation (ABT-TDIALITE-A)
CompactLogix Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
ABT-CCP298TLB
ControlLogix 10-Slot Workstations
(ABT-TDCLX3-B, ABT-TDCLX3NP)
Studio 5000 Logix Designer: Fundamentals
(requires a 10-slot ControlLogix chassis)
(Note: This lab book combines information from
both the ABT-CCP153TLB and ABT-CCP146TLB
lab books.)
ABT-CCP299TLB
ControlLogix Workstation – No Motion (10-slot)
(ABT-TDCLX3-B)
PhaseManager Project Design
(requires a 10-slot ControlLogix chassis)
ABT-CCP711TLB
SLC 500 Workstation (10 Slot Chassis)
(ABT-TDSLC1 120V AC)
SLC500 and RSLogix 5000 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
ABT-CCPS43TLB
PanelView Plus 6 Workstation
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Programming
ABT-CCV204TLB
FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
ABT-CCV206TLB
GuardLogix Application Development
ABT-SAFLOG101TLB
GuardLogix Fundamentals and Maintenance
ABT-CCPS43TLB
PowerFlex 700 AC Drive Workstation (ABT-TDPF700)
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation (ABT-TD20941)
ControlLogix 10-Slot Workstations
(ABT-TDCLX3-B, ABT-TDCLX3NP)
__________________
GuardLogix Controller Workstation
(ABT-TDGRDLX1-B)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Safety
ABT-CIA101TLB
Networks
Introduction to Automation
and Integrated Architecture
Workstations
Integrated Architecture Workstation (ABT-TDIA-A)
Workstations
Part Number
Condition Monitoring
Lab Books
233
Software
Workstation
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Note: Lab books must be purchased in conjunction with a workstation. Previously purchased workstations apply.
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Lab Books
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Catalog #: ABT-TDFW100
Catalog #: ABT-TDFW100C (with case)
AUTOMATION FERRIS WHEEL WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Control hardware:
- (1) 24V power supply
- (1) 1769-PA2 power supply
- 1 CompactLogix controller
- (1) 1769-IQ16 DC input module
- (1) 1769 OB16 DC output module
- 1 PowerFlex 40P AC drive with remote HIM
• Network hardware:
- (1) 1783-US08T 8-port unmanaged
Ethernet switch
- 5 Ethernet cables
• Operator interface panel:
- 1 illuminated E-stop
- 7 push buttons
- 5 pilot lights
- 1 dual push button / pilot light
- (1) 3-position switch
- (2) 2-position switches (1 with key)
- PanelView Plus 600 color terminal
• Ferris wheel assembly:
- 1 plastic Ferris wheel with 6 seats
- (1) 230V motor
- 1 encoder
- 1 photo-eye
- (1) 2-color stack light
- 1 plastic safety cube to cover the Ferris
wheel assembly
DIMENSIONS
Automation Workstation
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Depth: 18 in. (46 cm)
• Weight: 90 lb (41 kg)
Note:
Ferris Wheel Assembly
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 9.5 in. (24 cm)
• Depth: 8 in. (20 cm)
• Weight: 20 lb (9 kg)
INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 0.5 Hp PowerFlex 40 AC drive
• Network hardware:
- 1 ControlNet-to-DeviceNet linking device
- 1 ControlNet Flex™ I/O adapter
- 1 NETGEAR 5-port Ethernet switch
- 1 RightSight™ photoeye
- 1 tower light
• ControlLogix hardware:
- (1) 10-slot I/O chassis
- (1) 1756 system power supply
- 1 ControlLogix controller
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 EtherNet/IP bridge module
- 1 DeviceNet scanner module
• Flex I/O hardware:
- 1 DC input/output combo module
- 1 analog input/output combo module
• Motion control hardware
- 1 M08SE SERCOS interface module
- 1 Kinetix Integrated IAM Drive
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
234
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
For the size with an optional shipping case,
add 3 in. (8 cm) to the width and depth, and
8 in. (20 cm) to the height.
Catalog #: ABT-TDIA-A
DIMENSIONS
Box 1
• Width: 31 in. (79 cm)
• Height: 22 in. (56 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (32 kg)
Box 2
• Width: 29 in. (74 cm)
• Height: 21 in. (53 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 35 lb (16 kg)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
RELATED PRODUCTS
Introduction to Automation and Integrated
Architecture Lab Book (ABT-CIA101TLB)
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDIALITE-A
Safety
RELATED PRODUCTS
CompactLogix System Fundamentals &
Troubleshooting Lab Book (ABT-CCP298TLB)
Catalog #: ABT-TDCMPX
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
235
Software
Condition Monitoring
Workstations
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Height: 18 in. (46 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (31 cm)
Networks
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE BASIC WORKSTATION
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 0.5 Hp PowerFlex 40 AC drive
• CompactLogix hardware:
- 1 DIN Rail
- 1 system power supply
- 1 CompactLogix controller
• 1 PanelView Plus 6, 600 terminal
• 1 Stratix 8-port switch
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Height: 24 in. (61 cm)
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight: 40 lb (18 kg)
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 0.5 Hp PowerFlex 40 AC drive
• Operator interface panel:
- 2 dual input and output push buttons
- 4 digital output pilot lights
- 1 analog input
- 1 analog meter
• CompactLogix hardware:
- 1 DIN Rail
- 1 system power supply
- 1 CompactLogix controller
- 1 digital output module
- 1 analog output module
• Point I/O hardware:
- 1 Ethernet adapter
- 1 digital input/output module
- 1 digital input/output module
- 2 dual input and output push buttons
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
• Stratix 8-port switch
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
COMPACTLOGIX WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CONNECTED COMPONENTS WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 1 MicroLogix 1400
• 1 PowerFlex 4M AC drive
• 1 PanelView C600 terminal
• 1 Stratix Ethernet switch
• Dual discrete inputs/outputs
• 3 selector switches
• 4 push buttons
• 1 analog output meter
• 2 photo eyes
• Ethernet cables
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 29 in. (74 cm)
Catalog #: ABT-TDCONNCOMP
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Networks
CONTROLLOGIX WORKSTATION – NO MOTION
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- 1 ControlNet™ bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware:
- (1) 7-slot I/O chassis
- (1) 1756 system power supply
- 1 ControlLogix controller
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Operator interface panel:
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX2-A
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight: 90 lb (41 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
procedures guides
• ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-1756-TSJ20)
• Logix5000 Systems Glossary (ABT-1756-TSG10)
• Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-1756-DRG70)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Condition Monitoring
Software
236
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX2NP
CONTROLLOGIX WORKSTATION – NO MOTION (10-SLOT CHASSIS)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3-B
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Workstations
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
procedures guides
• ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-1756-TSJ20)
• Logix5000 Systems Glossary (ABT-1756-TSG10)
• Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-1756-DRG70)
• Labs books associated with the
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 curriculum.
Workstations
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (33 kg)
Condition Monitoring
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- 1 EtherNet module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware:
- (1) 10-slot I/O chassis
- (1) 1756 system power supply
- 1 ControlLogix controller
- 1 DC input module
- 2 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Operator interface panel:
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Networks
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
procedures guides
• ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-1756-TSJ20)
• Logix5000 Systems Glossary (ABT-1756-TSG10)
• Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-1756-DRG70)
Safety
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight: 90 lb (41 kg)
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
237
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware:
- (1) 7-slot I/O chassis
- (1) 1756 system power supply
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel:
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CONTROLLOGIX WORKSTATION –
NO MOTION AND NO CONTROLLER (7-SLOT CHASSIS)
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CONTROLLOGIX WORKSTATION –
NO MOTION AND NO CONTROLLER (10-SLOT CHASSIS)
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- 1 EtherNet module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware:
- (1) 10-slot I/O chassis
- (1) 1756 system power supply
- 1 DC input module
- 2 DC output modules
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel:
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (33 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All Studio 5000 Logix Designer software
procedures guides
• ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-1756-TSJ20)
• Logix5000 Systems Glossary (ABT-1756-TSG10)
• Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-1756-DRG70)
AADVANCE CONTROL SYSTEMS WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- 2 Stratix 5700 industrial Ethernet switches
• Control hardware:
- 2 controllers
- 2 digital input modules
- 2 digital output modules
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Operator interface panel:
- 5 digital inputs
- 5 digital outputs
- 3 analog inputs
- 2 analog outputs
- 33 wire off or short simulation switches
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3NP
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TDAADV **
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 29 in. (74 cm)
• Height: 21 in. (54 cm)
• Depth: 10 in. (26 cm)
Lead Time = 12 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Condition Monitoring
** AADvance Controls Systems workstations are
available for order by qualified System Integrators
and customers. Please call to ensure you meet this
requirement.
Software
238
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Networks
Safety
RELATED PRODUCTS
• GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-GRDLX-DRG70)
• GuardLogix Fundamentals and Maintenance
Lab Book (ABT-SAF-LOG101TLB)
• GuardLogix Application Development Lab Book
(ABT-SAF-LOG103TLB)
GUARDPLC WORKSTATION
Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDPLC1
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Height: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Depth: 8 in. (20 cm)
• Weight: 20 lb (9 kg)
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• GuardPLC 1600 controller
• Distributed I/O expansion module
• Power switch
• 120V / 220V plug receptacle
• E-stop push button
• 6 dual discrete inputs/outputs
• Patch connectors
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 58 lb (27 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide
(ABT-1753-TSJ50)
• GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-1753-DRG70)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
239
Software
Condition Monitoring
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• GuardLogix primary controller
• GuardLogix safety partner
• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis
• ControlLogix power supply
• 8 dual discrete inputs/outputs
• 1 selector switch
• CompactBlock I/O safety modules:
- 1791ES-IB16 EtherNet/IP module with 16 safety
inputs and 16 pulse test outputs
- 1791DS-IB8XOB8 DeviceNet module with 8
safety inputs, 8 safety solid-state outputs
• Communication modules:
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
- DeviceNet bridge module
• Light curtain
• E-stop push button
• Patch connectors
• Stratix 2000™ 5-port Ethernet switch
• MatGuard™ safety mat
Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDLX1-B
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
GUARDLOGIX CONTROLLER WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX DC DRIVE WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 3 Hp PowerFlex Digital DC drive
• EtherNet/IP communications
• 230V 3-phase AC operation
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Emergency stop button
- Programmable digital outputs
- User-configurable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed reference
- 0…10V analog output
• Digital programming keypad
• Optional: Enhanced digital programming keypad
• 3 Hp DC motor with encoder feedback and
speed switch
• User-accessible wiring terminals
• Hinged covers for drive access
Catalog #: ABT-TDPFDC
DIMENSIONS (DRIVE UNIT)
• Width: 23 in. (59 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Weight: 65 lb (30 kg)
DIMENSIONS (MOTOR)
• Width: 38 in. (96 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 24 in. (60 cm)
• Weight: 100 lb (45 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
PowerFlex DC Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-20P-DRG70)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
POWERFLEX 700 AC DRIVE WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 700 AC drive
• EtherNet communications
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital output
- User-configurable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed reference
- 0…10V analog output
• Human interface module
• 1 Hp AC motor with encoder feedback
• Fault simulation switches
• User-accessible wiring terminals
Condition Monitoring
COMPATIBILITY
The PowerFlex 700 workstation can be used with the
Fan Demo Unit (ABT-TDPF700FAN).
Software
240
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700
DIMENSIONS (DRIVE UNIT)
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 17 in. (43 cm)
• Weight: 57 lb(26 kg)
DIMENSIONS (MOTOR)
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 67 lb (30 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Troubleshooting Guide (ABT-20B-TSJ20)
• PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide (ABT-20B-TSJ50)
• PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
(ABT-20B-DRG70)
• Lab books associated with the PowerFlex 700
curriculum
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Note:
For the size with an optional shipping case,
add 3 in. (8 cm) to the width and depth,
and 8 in. (20 cm) to the height.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Safety
DIMENSIONS (MOTOR)
• Width: 26 in. (66 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 68 lb (31 kg)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
RELATED PRODUCTS
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
Reference Guide CD (ABT-20G-DRG70)
POWERFLEX 753/755 COMBO WORKSTATION
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF750COMBO
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
RELATED PRODUCTS
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
Reference Guide CD (ABT-20G-DRG70)
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Workstations
Workstations
• Drive operator panel:
- Digital inputs and outputs
- 0…10V speed reference
- 0…10V analog output
- User-configurable analog input
- User-configurable analog output
- Safe-speed relay with switch
- Safe-off 24V LED module
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 48 in. (122 cm)
• Height: 55 in. (140 cm)
• Depth: 26 in. (66 cm)
• Weight: 400 lb (181 kg)
Condition Monitoring
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 753 AC drive:
- EtherNet/IP comms via carrier card
- Encoder card
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 755 AC drive:
- Embedded EtherNet/IP
- Safe speed monitor card
- Dual encoder card
- Universal feedback card
- Auxiliary power supply
• I/O cards
• 120V AC operation
• 1/30 Hp 230V induction motor with optical
incremental encoder (for the PowerFlex 755
drive only)
• 1 Hp motor with encoder
• Human interface modules
• Drive selector switch
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
DIMENSIONS (DRIVE UNIT)
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (52 cm)
• Depth: 17 in. (43 cm)
• Weight: 98 lb (45 kg)
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
241
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Digital inputs:
- (4) 24V DC inputs
- 3 programmable
- 1 enable input
• Digital outputs:
- 2 open collector, max load 25 mA
- 1 relay, 24V DC
• (2) ±10V DC / ±1V DC differential analog input,
13 bit + sign
• (2) ±10V DC differential analog outputs,
11 bit + sign
• (2) 5V/12V encoder inputs quadrature/differential
• DriveLogix™ compact I/O up to 1 rack (8) modules
• 1 Hp motor, 230V/460V
• 1 PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive, 115V/23V
3-phase input
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700S
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
POWERFLEX 700S PHASE II AC DRIVE WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POWERFLEX 753 WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 753 AC drive
• Communications carrier card with
EtherNet/IP adapter
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital outputs
- Programmable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed references
- 0…10V analog outputs
- User-configurable analog inputs
- User-configurable analog outputs
• Human interface module
• 1 Hp AC motor with encoder feedback
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF753
DIMENSIONS (DRIVE UNIT)
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 16.9 in. (43 cm)
• Weight: 150 lb (26 kg)
DIMENSIONS (MOTOR WITH CASE)
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 14 in. (36 cm)
• Weight: 67 lb (30 kg)
Note:
Networks
For the size with shipping case, add
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
3 in. (8 cm) to the width and depth, and * Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
8 in. (20 cm) to the height.
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
RELATED PRODUCTS
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation
Reference Guide CD (ABT-20G-DRG70)
POWERFLEX 755 WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 755 AC drive:
- Embedded EtherNet/IP communications
- Communications carrier card
• 120V AC operation
• 1/30 Hp 230V induction motor with optical
incremental encoder
• Human interface module
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital outputs
- Programmable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed reference
- 0…10V analog output
- User-configurable analog input
- User-configurable analog output
- Safe-speed relay with switch
- Safe-off 24V LED module
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF755
COMPATIBILITY
The PowerFlex 700 workstation can be used with the
Fan Demo Unit (ABT-TDPF700FAN).
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 25 in. (61 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (41 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (32 kg)
Note:
This unit comes with a case. For the size
with shipping case, add 3 in. (8 cm) to
the width and depth, and 8 in. (20 cm) to
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
the height.
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Condition Monitoring
Software
242
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700FAN
Safety
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 14 in. (36 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Weight: 25 lb (11 kg)
COMPATIBILITY
The Fan Demo can be used with the PowerFlex 700
(ABT-TDPF700) and PowerFlex 755 (ABT-TDPF755)
workstations.
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TD20941 (120V AC),
Catalog #: ABT-TD20942 (230V AC, 20 A)
KINETIX 6000 SERVO DRIVE WORKSTATION
Workstations
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (32 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• Studio 5000™ Logix Designer and Logix5000
Motion Control Procedures Guide (ABT-1756-TSJ52)
• Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic Lab Book
(ABT-CCN142TLB)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
243
Software
Condition Monitoring
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 2-axis power rail
• 120V AC operation
• Integrated axis module
• MP-series motors
• SERCOS communication card
• Illuminated mushroom E-stop push button
• Integral surge suppression
• Auxiliary encoder
• Cable package:
- Universal feedback cable
- Universal motor power cable
- Lo-profile I/O connector kit
- Lo-profile feedback connector kit
- Lo-profile auxiliary feedback connector kit
Networks
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Vertical-mounted fan
• 230V AC motor
• Manual pressure damper
• Upstream air pressure transducer
• Motor connector and cable
• I/O connector and cable
• AC power cord
• 2 A fuse
• 4…20 mA output
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FAN DEMO UNIT WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
KINETIX 6000 SERVO DRIVE WITH SAFE OFF WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 2-axis power rail
• 120V AC operation
• Integrated axis module
• TLY motor
• SERCOS card
• Safety I/O card
• Fiber optic communication option
• Illuminated mushroom E-stop push button
• Integral surge suppression
• Auxiliary encoder
• Cable package:
- Universal feedback cable
- Universal motor power cable
- Lo-profile I/O connector kit
- Lo-profile feedback connector kit
- Lo-profile auxiliary feedback connector kit
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight: 80 lb (32 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
• Motion Control Glossary (ABT-M100-TSG10)
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide (ABT-1756-TSJ52)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TDK6500 **
Catalog #: ABT-TDK6500EN2TR (with EN2TR) **
KINETIX 6500 WORKSTATION
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Kinetix 6500 integrated axis module (460V AC)
• Kinetix 6500 axis module (460V AC)
• 2 Ethernet safe speed monitoring control modules
• 2 MPL motors
• 5-port Stratix Ethernet switch
• 1783- ETAP
• TLS-3-GD2 guard locking switch
• Power supply 24V, 5 A
• Safe-off button
• 2-position selector switch
• 2 photo switches
Workstations
IMPORTANT:
This unit requires a controller and connecting
modules. Please see the Important Ordering
Information.
Condition Monitoring
Software
244
Catalog #: ABT-TD2094SO
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 17 in. (43 cm)
• Weight: 113 lb (51 kg)
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
This unit must have the following additional
equipment to operate:
• A 10/100 Mbps Ethernet bridge:
- Order ABT-TDK6500EN2TR for a unit with
a bridge
- Order ABT-TDK6500 for a unit without a bridge
(provide your own)
• A ControlLogix controller to
- Order ABT-TDCLX3-B (complete ControlLogix
workstation)
- If you chose to buy the Kinetix unit without the
ControlLogix workstation, you will need
your own controller, I/O, and interface.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDARMORDMC
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 23 in. (58 cm)
• Height: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Weight: 89 lb (40 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
(ABT-N100-TSJ50)
Safety
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• VFD ArmorStart distributed motor controller:
- DeviceNet communications and 24V control
• Local CB disconnect
• DeviceNet configuration terminal
• I/O capabilities:
- 4 DC inputs (sourced from DeviceNet power
24V DC)
- 2 relay outputs (sourced from control power)
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ARMORSTART DISTRIBUTED MOTOR CONTROLLER WORKSTATION
SLC 500 WORKSTATION - SLC 5/04 PROCESSOR (10-SLOT CHASSIS)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
This unit does not contain onboard I/O simulation. The
Universal I/O Simulator workstation (ABT-TDUIO1 or
ABT-TDUIO2) is sold separately.
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Workstations
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All SLC 500 processors, procedures, troubleshooting,
and documentation reference guides
• SLC 500 & RSLogix 5000 Maintenance &
Troubleshooting Lab Book (ABT-CCPS43TLB)
• Lab books associated with the SLC 500/RSLogix 500
curriculum
Workstations
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height: 19 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (32 cm)
• Weight: 50 lb (23 kg)
Condition Monitoring
ACCESSORIES (OPTIONAL –SOLD SEPARATELY)
• 1746 PID Simulation Kit:
- Catalog number ABT-TDSLCPID
• Universal I/O Simulator Workstation:
- Catalog number ABT-TDUIO or ABT-TDUIO2
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC) **
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC) **
245
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• SLC 5/04 processor
• 10-slot I/O chassis
• Power supply (5 A)
• Digital I/O modules:
- 3 DC input modules (16 pt.) sink 10…30V DC
- 3 DC output modules (16 pt.) source 10…50V DC
• Intelligent I/O modules:
- 2 analog combo modules
• Advanced interface converter
• Bulletin 800T E-stop push button
• Covered empty chassis slot
Networks
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500 WORKSTATION - SLC 5/05 PROCESSOR
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• SLC 5/05 processor
• 7-slot I/O chassis
• Power supply (5 A)
• Discrete modules
- (2) 32-point input modules (24V DC)
- (2) 32-point output modules (24V DC)
• Analog modules
- 1 input module
- 1 output module
• 1 AIC isolated link coupler
• 2 remote BCD displays with 12V DC input
• 2 DC volt meters (0…10V DC)
• 2 bar graph meters (Texmate)
• 4 Potentiometers (10K Ohm)
• (8) 3-series thumbwheel switches
(BCD/Hexadecimal)
• 1 volt regulator (12V)
• Hard-shell enclosure
(7-SLOT CHASSIS)
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight: 50 lb (23 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
All SLC 500 processors, procedures, troubleshooting,
and documentation reference guides
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
SLC 500 WORKSTATION - SLC 5/03 PROCESSOR (7-SLOT CHASSIS)
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• SLC 5/03 processor
• 7-slot I/O chassis
• Power supply (rack mount)
• Digital I/O
- 1 DC input module (16 pt.)
- 1 DC output module (16 pt.)
• Analog I/O
- 1 analog input/output combo module
• 2 panel meters (0…10V)
• (2) 1K pots
• 4 selector switches
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLCN
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLCN2
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Height: 14 in. (36 cm)
• Depth: 7 in. (18 cm)
• Weight: 32 lb (15 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
All SLC 500 processors, procedures, troubleshooting,
and documentation reference guides
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Condition Monitoring
Software
246
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height: 21 in. (53 cm)
• Depth: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (32 kg)
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Digital Inputs:
- 12 Bul. 800B NO/NC maintained push buttons
- 3 Bul. 800B NO/NC momentary push buttons
- 1 Bul. 800B NO/NC momentary push button
• Digital outputs:
- 16 Bul. 800B push-to-test pilot lights
• Bul. 800T E-stop push button
• Intelligent inputs:
- 4 Bul. 800T 10KW potentiometers
• Intelligent outputs:
- 2 DC analog meters (0…10V)
- 2 DC digital bar graph meters (0…5V)
• BCD inputs:
- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input
switch (0…9)
- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input
switch (0…F)
• BCD outputs:
- 2 four-digit BCD LED output displays
• 4 Interface cables
Networks
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
These units are sold separate from the processor rack
immediate shipment.
systems:
• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1 or ABT-TDSLC2)
Catalog #: ABT-TDDNET2-A
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 29 in. (74 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight: 45 lb (20 kg)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
RELATED PRODUCTS
• DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-N100-TSJ20)
• DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
(ABT-N100-TSJ50)
• DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and
Troubleshooting Lab Book (ABT-CCP164TLB)
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Workstations
Workstations
ArmorBlock® MaXum™ input module
ArmorBlock MaXum base
2 DeviceNet proximity sensors
E3 overload relay:
- Phase and load simulators
Condition Monitoring
•
•
•
•
247
Software
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Safety
RELATED PRODUCTS
• All available PLC-5/RSLogix5 job aids
• All available SLC 500/RSLogix 500 job aids
• Lab books associated with the SLC 500/RSLogix 500
curriculum (when used with a processor
rack system)
DEVICENET™ WORKSTATION
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Drive system:
- 1 PowerFlex 40 drive
- 1 PowerFlex 40 DeviceNet adapter
- 1 AC motor
• ControlLogix system:
- 4-slot chassis
- 1 power supply
- ControlLogix controller
- EtherNet I/P bridge module
- DeviceNet bridge scanner module
• Absolute multi-turn encoder
• 1734-ADN Point I/O DeviceNet adapter:
- 3 Point I/O 4-pt. input modules
- 3 Point I/O 4-pt. output modules
• PanelView terminal
• 2 terminators
• 2 open QuikLink taps
• 2 micro QuikLink taps
• 4 DeviceNet drop lines
• DeviceNet flat media
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO1 (120V AC) **
Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO2 (220V AC) **
UNIVERSAL I/O SIMULATOR WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ETHERNET/IP™ WORKSTATION
Catalog #: ABT-TDENET5700 **
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS
DIMENSIONS
• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis with the following
• Width: 30 in. (76 cm)
modules:
• Height: 21 in. (53 cm)
- ControlLogix Controller
• Depth: 13 in. (33 cm)
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
• Weight: 45 lb (20 kg)
- EtherNet/IP web server module
- Digital input module
RELATED PRODUCTS
- Digital output module
• EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide (ABT-N300-TSJ50)
• ControlLogix power supply
•
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
• CompactLogix chassis with the following modules:
(ABT-N300-DRG70)
- CompactLogix controller
•
EtherNet/IP Design and Troubleshooting Lab Book
- 1769 digital input module
(ABT-CCP178TLB)
- 1769 digital output module
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
• 1794-AENT EtherNet/IP adapter module with a
four channel non-isolated analog output module
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
This unit is available with different switches:
• Stratix switch (select 6000 or 5700)
• For a unit with a Stratix 5700 switch,
immediate shipment.
• 18 dual discrete inputs/outputs
order ABT-TDENET5700.
• 6 selector switches
• For a unit with a Stratix 8000™ switch, DeviceNet™ scanner, and DeviceNet photo-eye, order ABT-TDENETS8K-A.
• 1 analog output meter
• For a unit with a Stratix 6000™ switch, DeviceNet™ scanner, and DeviceNet photo-eye, order ABT-TDENETIP-A
• 1 photoeye
INTELLIGENT MOTOR CONTROL WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS (CONTROL AND I/O WORKSTATION)
• 4-slot ControlLogix chassis with the following
modules:
- ControlLogix controller
- DeviceNet bridge module
- EtherNet/IP module
- Slot filler
• PanelView Plus 700 terminal
• Stratix 2000 Ethernet switch
• DeviceNet analog limit switch and limit switch lever
• 24V DeviceNet I/O block, 8-input
• N.O. selector switch, 2-position
MAJOR COMPONENTS (MOTOR CONTROL/DRIVE
WORKSTATION)
• E1 Plus DeviceNet module
• PowerFlex 700 Vector Control AC drive with LCD HIM
• 24V AC/DC SMC Flex controller
• SMC Flex DeviceNet module
• 2 N.O. selector switches, 2-position
• 3 multi-function LEDs, 2-position
DIMENSIONS (CONTROL AND I/O WORKSTATION)
• Width: 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight: 44 lb (20 kg)
Condition Monitoring
DIMENSIONS (MOTOR CONTROL/DRIVE WORKSTATION)
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Weight: 104 lb (47 kg)
Software
248
Catalog #: ABT-TDIMC
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDINTCENTER
Safety
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 30 in. (76 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (41 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (33 kg)
PROCESS WORKSTATION
(FOUNDATION FIELDBUS AND HART UNITS)
Catalog #: ABT-TDPROCESS-B
DIMENSIONS (HART WORKSTATION)
• Width: 32 in. (81 cm)
• Height: 26 in. (66 cm)
• Depth: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Weight: 35 lb (156 kg)
MAJOR COMPONENTS (FIELDBUS WORKSTATION)
• Endress & Hauser pressure transmitter
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus linking device
RELATED PRODUCTS
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Procedures
Guide (ABT-1756-TSJ50)
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS (HART WORKSTATION)
• 4-slot ControlLogix chassis:
- ControlLogix controller
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
- HART module
- ControlNet redundant module
• Endress & Hauser temperature transmitter
• Stratix Ethernet switch, 5-port
• Flex I/O
- Flex I/O adapter
- Flex I/O digital combo module
- Flex I/O analog combo module
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
249
Condition Monitoring
Workstations
DIMENSIONS (FIELDBUS WORKSTATION)
• Width: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Height: 14 in. (36 cm)
• Depth: 7 in. (18 cm)
• Weight: 31 lb (14 kg)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Networks
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Flywheel and protective cover
• Load rheostat with knob
• Simpson 1257 analog load meter
• 2-position selector, NEMA/MCS
• NEMA starter with E3 overload relay
• MCC operator station with Hand/Off/Auto selector,
red RUN lamp and Start/Stop push buttons
• MCC disconnect handle simulator with
802A-C33P4-S7 limit switch
• IEC contactor with 193 overload relay
• DeviceNet contactor interface
• 3-position Hand/Off/Auto selector
• Red run lamp
• Surface mount DeviceNet connectors
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
INTELLICENTER WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLANTPAX™ PROCESS SYSTEM WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
MAJOR COMPONENTS (CONTROL WORKSTATION)
• Redundant controller chassis
• Redundant Stratix 8000 switches
• 15 in. VersaView with touch screen
MAJOR COMPONENTS (I/O WORKSTATION)
• Remote ControlLogix digital and HART I/O modules
Safety
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 simulated valves with open and closed feedback
7 hand switches
2 HART potentiometers
4…20 mA potentiometer
4…20 mA digital ammeter
24V DC motor with HOA switch
3-color stack light
Fluke 87 multimeter
Networks
MAJOR COMPONENTS (MCC WORKSTATION)
• PowerFlex 40 drive
•
•
•
•
E1 Plus overload relay with EtherNet/IP module
Stratix 6000 switch
220V AC motor with hand brake
115V AC motor with hand brake and
Hand/Off/Auto switch
DIMENSIONS (CONTROL WORKSTATION)
•
•
•
•
Width: 39 in. (97 cm)
Height: 22 in. (56 cm)
Depth: 14 in. (36 cm)
Weight: 177 lb (80 kg)
DIMENSIONS (I/O WORKSTATION)
•
•
•
•
Width: 29 in. (73 cm)
Height: 22 in. (56 cm)
Depth: 14 in. (36 cm)
Weight: 139 lb (63 kg)
DIMENSIONS (MCC WORKSTATION)
•
•
•
•
Width: 22 in. (55 cm)
Height: 22 in. (56 cm)
Depth: 14 in. (36 cm)
Weight: 124 lb (56 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS
PlantPAx Process System Troubleshooting Guide
(ABT-P100-TSJ20)
PANELVIEW PLUS 6 WORKSTATION
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• PanelView Plus 6 terminal with touch screen
operation
• Ethernet cable
• Swing stand
• Hard-shell enclosure
Workstations
COMPATIBILITY
The PanelView Plus 6 workstation can be used
with the ControlLogix Workstation – No Motion
(ABT-TDCLX3-B).
Catalog #: ABT-TDPAX
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Height: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth: 3 in. (6 cm)
• Weight: 6 lb (3 kg)
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Note:
Units come with shipping cases which
add 3 in. (8 cm) to width/depth and
8 in. (20 cm) to height for the given
dimensions.
Catalog #: ABT-TDPV61000 (1000 terminal)
Catalog #: ABT-TDPV6700 (700 terminal)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
RELATED PRODUCTS
• FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus Procedures
Guide (ABT-2711P-TSJ50)
• FactoryTalk View ME & PanelView Plus Programming
Lab Book (ABT-CCV204TLB)
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
Software
250
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
10 foot #40 single roller chain
1 box of stainless shims
1 spanner wrench
2 stub shafts with withdrawal sleeves
2 bearings (6210, 22213EK)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Safety
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 45 in. (114.3 cm)
• Height: 55 in. (139.7 cm)
• Depth: 18 in. (45.7 cm)
• Weight: 600 lb (272 kg)
Networks
Lead Time = 12 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
POWER TRANSMISSION WORKSTATION
Catalog #: ABT-TDMET2
Lead Time = 12 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Workstations
Workstations
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 45 in. (114.3 cm)
• Height: 55 in. (139.7 cm)
• Depth: 18 in. (45.7 cm)
• Weight: 600 lb (272 kg)
Condition Monitoring
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Gear box
• Coupling
• Drive motor
• Component hardware:
• 2 sets of Starrett dial indicators with bases
• 2 sets of Starrett universal clamps
• 1 dial caliper
• Drive socket sets (3/8 in. and 1/2 in.)
• 1 set of belt sheaves (1 at 7 in. with bushings and
1 at 4 in. with bushings)
• 1 set of chain sprockets (1 at 6 in. and 1 at 3 in.
with bushings)
• 1 sheave gauge
• 1 belt tension gauge
• 1 V-belt B47
• 1 set of open end wrenches
• 1 set of crow’s feet wrenches (3/8…7/8 in.)
• 1 torque wrench
• 10 foot #40 single roller chain
• 1 box of stainless shims
• 1 spanner wrench
• 2 stub shafts with withdrawal sleeves
• 2 bearings (6210, 22213EK)
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
-
Catalog #: ABT-TDMET
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
251
Software
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Centrifugal pump
• Mechanical seal
• Coupling
• Drive motor
• Component hardware:
- 2 sets of Starrett dial indicators with bases
- 2 sets of Starrett universal clamps
- 1 dial caliper
- Drive socket sets (3/8 in. and 1/2 in.)
- 1 set of belt sheaves (1 at 7 in. with bushings
and 1 at 4 in. with bushings)
- 1 set of chain sprockets (1 at 6 in. and 1 at 3 in.
with bushings)
- 1 sheave gauge
- 1 belt tension gauge
- 1 V-belt B47
- 1 set of open end wrenches
- 1 set of crow’s feet wrenches (3/8…7/8 in.)
- 1 torque wrench
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PUMP AND POWER TRANSMISSION WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PACKAGE SORTING SIMULATOR WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 8 proximity switches
• 2 E-stop push buttons
• 2 start/stop push buttons
• 20 contacts for push buttons
• 1 encoder
• 1 encoder cable
• 1 encoder coupling
• (1) 2-hole push button enclosures
• (1) 3-hole push button enclosures
• 3 photo-eyes
• 1 selector switch
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 40 in. (102 cm)
• Height: 18 in. (46 cm)
• Depth: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Weight: 125 lb (57 kg)
Note:
For the size with an optional shipping
case, add 3 in. (8 cm) to width/depth
and 8 in. (20 cm) to height for the given
dimensions.
Networks
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
For a complete workstation inside a shipping case,
add a C to the end of the catalog number.
Example: ABT-TDSORTER becomes ABT-TDSORTERC.
CONVEYOR ASSEMBLY SIMULATOR WORKSTATION
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 2200 Series drive flat belt end drive
• Power supply 24…28V DC
• Push buttons:
- 1 push-pull illuminated
- (1) 2-position momentary multifunction
• Switch and photo eye hardware:
- 3 proximity sensors
- 7 toggle switches, round actuator
- 9 photo eyes
- (1) 2-position selector switch
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
Software
252
Catalog #: ABT-TDSORTERCLX **
Catalog #: ABT-TDSORTERCMPX **
Catalog #: ABT-TDSORTER **
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TDAST **
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 35 in. (88.9 cm)
• Height: 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth: 20 in. (52 cm)
• Weight: 92 lb (42 kg)
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
This unit can be ordered in a variety of controller and
conveyor configurations detailed below. To order any
unit with a case, please add C to the end of the part
number:
• 2 conveyors
- No controller: ABT-TDAST
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
- ControlLogix controller: ABT-TDASTCLX
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
- CompactLogix controller: ABT-TDASTCMPX
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
• 1 conveyor
immediate shipment.
- No controller: ABT-TDASTLITE
- ControlLogix controller: ABT-TDASTLITECLX
- CompactLogix controller: ABT-TDASTLITECMPX
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Catalog #: ABT-TDPOSITION **
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 44 in. (112 cm)
• Height: 24 in. (61 cm)
• Depth: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Weight: 213 lb (97 kg)
PANELVIEW PLUS 1000 WORKSTATION
Networks
** IMPORTANT ORDERING INFORMATION
The simulator contains the mechanical pieces only.
To control the unit you must combine it with a
Lead Time = 9 weeks*
CompactLogix workstation, catalog number:
ABT-TDIALITE or a CompactLogix Basic workstation, * Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
catalog number: ABT-TDCMPX. If you chose to buy the
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
simulator without one of these workstations you will
immediate shipment.
need your own controller, HMI, drive, and network.
You will also need to complete your own setup,
For a complete workstation with a shipping case, order
configuration, and programming.
ABT-TDPOSITIONC.
Safety
For the size of each shipping case, add 3 in. (8 cm) to
width and depth, and 8 in. (20 cm) to height.
Catalog #: ABT-TDPVPLUSTC02
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• PanelView Plus terminal keypad and
touch operation
• DH+™, DH-485
• Serial Interface cable
• Hard-shell enclosure
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Height: 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth: 3 in. (6 cm)
• Weight: 6 lb (3 kg)
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
253
Software
Condition Monitoring
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Workstations
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• 2 Kinetix 300 drives
• Flex I/O hardware:
- 1 Ethernet adapter
- 2 digital input module
- 1 digital output module
• Switch and photo eye hardware:
- 6 proximity sensors
- 5 photo sensors
- 2 color sensors
• 1 vacuum pressure pump
• 1 encoder cable
• 20 fault simulations
• 2 actuators
• 4 puzzle graphics
• Plexiglass enclosed case
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
POSITIONING FAULT SIMULATOR WORKSTATION
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CENTERLINE® MCC ON ETHERNET/IP™ WORKSTATION
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Network hardware:
- Stratix 5700 10-port Ethernet switch
- 2100-ENET Ethernet adapter
• Control hardware:
- PowerFlex 525 AC drive
- (2) E300™ electronic overload relays
- (1) E3 Plus™ overload relay
• Flywheel with manual brake
• 871TM proximity sensor
• Operator panel:
- E-stop
- 6 illuminated push buttons
- 7 selector switches
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 29 in. (74 cm)
• Height: 21 in. (54 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight: 83 lb (38 kg)
Note:
For the approximate dimensions with an
optional shipping case, add 5 in. (13 cm)
to the width, 6 in. (15 cm) to the height,
3 in. (8 cm) to the depth, and 50 lbs.
(23 kg) to the weight.
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
Networks
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
SAFETY COMPONENTS WORKSTATION
Workstations
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
MAJOR COMPONENTS
• Guardmaster safety relay with one
dual-channel input
• 2 Guardmaster safety relays with two
dual-channel inputs
• Guardmaster EMD safety relay expansion module
with time delay
• Safety-wired 4-port distribution box
• 4 safety-wired shorting plugs
• GuardShield™ safety light curtain
• Guardmaster safety sensor
• MatGuard safety mat
• Guardmaster grip enabling switch
• Guardmaster guard locking switch
• Guardmaster safety limit switch
• Cadet™ tongue interlock switch
• 3 SensaGuard™ non-contact safety switches
• Allen-Bradley E-stop push button
• Allen-Bradley power supply
• Stackable banana jacks
• Patchcord connectors
Software
254
Catalog #: ABT-TDMCCENET
Catalog #: ABT-TDSAFCOMP
DIMENSIONS
• Width: 24.5 in. (62 cm)
• Height: 20.5 in. (52 cm)
• Depth: 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight: 65 lb (30 kg) without shipping case
111 lb (51 kg) with shipping case
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 7 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to check availability for
immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
New Industrial Automation Curriculum and
Workstation for Educational Institutions
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Do you need an industry-recognized curriculum
with cutting-edge lab equipment to build a foundation
to help students succeed in technical industrial,
engineering, or automation-related educational
programs? Do your students have little or no
experience with automation systems?
Safety
Rockwell Automation Training Services offers a new
Industrial Automation curriculum package with a
real-world and application-relevant lab workstation to
help you achieve industry standards. These resources
will help you stay ahead of the technology curve.
Networks
• Automation Ferris Wheel Workstation
(ABT-TDFW100)
• Introduction to Automation curriculum kit
(TCT-IA-TIP and TCT-IA-TSP)
• AC and DC Drives curriculum kit
(TCT-ADD-TIP and TCT-ADD-TSP)
Workstations
Engaging, Multimedia, Learning Environment
The new Industrial Automation curriculum and
workstation offers a unique way to combine hands-on
skills with interactive, media-rich technical content for
an outstanding learning experience. The curriculum
offers an introductory level of study, starting with
basics of industrial automation, and builds to more
advanced topics like AC and DC drives technology.
Comprehensive student and instructor kits include
engaging videos, animations, podcasts, and more.
To inquire about other Rockwell Automation college
training kits and workstations contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
office, or call 440-646-3434, select option 7.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
255
Software
Condition Monitoring
Workstations
Interactive and Hands-On
The programmed workstation has a small, fully-functional
Ferris wheel that allows students to operate and maintain
an example automated system, yet also offers expanded
capabilities to program your own operations and faults.
The workstation is equipped with the latest Rockwell
Automation and industry standard technologies,
including a CompactLogix controller, PowerFlex drive,
HMI touchscreen, and more.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Workstations
Workstations
Condition Monitoring
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Software
256
Job Aids
Job Aids
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Job Aids
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Rockwell Automation recognizes that one of the keys to
superior performance on-the-job is the ability to become
efficient and highly effective using support resources.
Rockwell Automation award-winning job
aids provide essential job task information,
thereby minimizing errors that can occur at
the most inopportune moments. Job aids
provide immediate hardware and software
information when it is needed so production
is not impacted. Our job aids are written at a
level of detail to ensure that you are consistently
using best practices. The right job aid can
make the difference between productive
time and downtime and between maximum
performance and minimum operation.
Visualization
Standard Guides
Standard job aids are designed to assist individuals
with software and hardware job tasks. While these
tools are very good at covering tasks associated with
Rockwell Automation hardware components, they are
not designed to take into consideration every possible
custom system configuration or state.
Custom Guides
Job Aids
Custom guides are designed and developed to work
with plant-specific systems and applications. Common
operator-related hardware and software errors can be
eliminated by using custom designed procedures and
guides. Rockwell Automation can assist you with the
design and creation of the guides you need to achieve
maximum efficiency and minimize operator-related
errors. Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distributor to discuss creating
custom guides for your needs.
Glossaries
Glossaries provide an alphabetized listing of common
terminology and definitions as it relates to a specific
technology. Glossaries help users become more familiar
with technical terms and concepts needed to understand
a technology.
JOB AID
CATALOG NUMBER
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
ABT-D100-TSG10
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
ABT-1756-TSG10
Motion Control Glossary
ABT-M100-TSG10
Job Aids
Software
258
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
FEATURES
• Step-by-step procedures for job-specific tasks
• Best practices and standard guidelines
• Tips on software-related shortcuts and special features
• Safety reminders and warnings
• Glossary of key software and hardware terms
• Appendices of basic Microsoft Windows operations
JOB AID
CATALOG NUMBER
1395 Drive Installation Guide
ABT-1395-TSH50
ControlNet™ and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ50
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 and
PanelBuilder32 Procedures Guide
ABT-2711-TSJ50
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-N200-TSJ50ES
PanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e and PanelBuilder 1400e
Configuration Procedures Guide
ABT-2711E-TSJ50
DeviceNet™ and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ50
DriveExplorer Software Procedures Guide
ABT-D500-TSJ51
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
DriveTools32 Software Procedures Guide
ABT-D500-TSJ50
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
ABT-N300-TSJ50
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-1785-TSJ53ES
FactoryTalk AssetCentre Procedures Guide
ABT-9515-TSJ50
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-1747-TSJ52ES
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide - Spanish
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000 Motion
Control Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-2711P-TSJ50ES
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50ES
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide
ABT-4100-TSJ51
Studio 5000 Logix Designer and Logix5000
Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-1756-TSJ50ES
IntelliCENTER Software Procedures Guide
ABT-MCC-TSJ50
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide
ABT-1753-TSJ50
Motion Control Fundamentals Procedures Guide
ABT-M100-TSJ50
RSView32 Procedures Guide
ABT-9301-TSJ50
Visualization
CATALOG NUMBER
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
259
Software
Job Aids
Job Aids
JOB AID
Networks
Safety
Procedures guides provide detailed stepby-step instructions on the most common
software and hardware-related job tasks
that help users to program,
configure, troubleshoot, and
test Rockwell Automation
control equipment.
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Procedures Guides
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Troubleshooting Guides
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Rockwell Automation troubleshooting
guides contain flowcharts that walk you
through faults that can occur on a system.
These guides are specifically designed for use
on the plant floor and their pocket-size design
allows for easy portability. Troubleshooting
guides are filled with procedures, error code
information, and status indicator listings with
recommended actions, reference charts, and hardware/
software diagrams.
FEATURES
• Detailed illustrations with pertinent
troubleshooting information
• Location indicators where action is needed or where
possible problems exist
• Consistent starting point from which to logically begin
troubleshooting
• Logical progression of questions, causes, and actions to
determine the problem
• Important safety considerations, precautions, and
general warnings
Networks
Visualization
JOB AID
CATALOG NUMBER
JOB AID
CATALOG NUMBER
1336 PLUS™ II AC Drive Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1336F-TSJ20
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ20
1394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1394-TSJ21
PlantPAx Process System Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-P100-TSJ20
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ22
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish
ABT-1756-TSJ20ES
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ20
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ20
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ22
ControlNet and RSNetWorx
Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish
ABT-N200-TSJ20ES
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1747-TSJ22ES
Job Aids
Job Aids
Software
260
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
ABT-1336E-DRG70
1336 PLUS and PLUS II AC Drive Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-1336SF-DRG70
1397 Drive Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1397-DRG70
CENTERLINE® MCC and IntelliCENTER Software
Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-MCC-DRG70
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N200-DRG70
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N100-DRG70
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-N300-DRG70
GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1753-DRG70
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1756-DRG70
Motion Control Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-M100-DRG70
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-DRG70
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-20P-DRG70
PowerFlex 700S Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-20D-DRG70
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20D-DRG71
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
1336 IMPACT™ Documentation Reference Guide CD
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
CATALOG NUMBER
Networks
JOB AID
Visualization
Documentation reference guide CDs contain excerpts
of the most frequently used product information from
several technical manuals. By consolidating technical
product content on one CD, users can find important
information faster.
Safety
Documentation Reference Guide CDs
PowerFlex 70 Standard and Vector Control Documentation
Reference Guide CD
ABT-20A-DRG70
ABT-20B-DRG70
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Documentation Reference
Guide CD
ABT-20G-DRG70
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Quick Reference Guides
JOB AID
CATALOG NUMBER
Quick reference guides provide hardware and software
specific information that users can quickly reference
when configuring Rockwell Automation equipment.
Parameter-specific information can typically be found in
a quick reference guide.
1336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide
ABT-1336E-TQR90
1336 PLUS and PLUS II AC Drive Parameters
Quick Reference Guide
ABT-1336SF-TQR90
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick
Reference Guide
ABT-20AB-TQR90
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
261
Software
Job Aids
Job Aids
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Refresh
Improve Job Skills Through Self-Study
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Self-Paced Learning
Do you find it difficult to schedule training for your staff?
Are you trying to cut down on the additional expenses
associated with training?
Safety
Delivered via the Web or CD-ROM, we have the
e-learning course for your needs. From basic industrial to
Rockwell Automation specific content, the RSTrainer and
Rockwell Automation University Online courses provide
introductory and refresher training.
Networks
Visualization
Courses are available in these areas:
• General Industrial
• Automation Fundamentals
• Controllers - ControlLogix, SLC and PLC
• Communications
• Motion
• Visualization (Human Machine Interface)
To download a demo of
computer-based training, go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/
training/self-paced
Job Aids
Sign up now for a free 5-day trial of
our web-based training at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/
training/self-paced
Job Aids
Software
262
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Savings Options
Savings Options
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Training + Starter Workstation with
“Build Your Own” workstation option
Attend ControlLogix courses and maintain your skills
with our Starter Workstation
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Take Your Classroom Training
Back to Your Job
Safety
Six Rockwell Automation ControlLogix courses are
bundled with a CompactLogix Starter Workstation
to provide an opportunity for ongoing practice.
This offer is optional; however, the CompactLogix
Starter Workstation allows you to reinforce the
skills acquired from any of the ControlLogix
training classes. With this offer you can elect to
“build your own” starter workstation or receive a
pre-assembled workstation.
Networks
Visualization
The workstation can be used for:
• Providing opportunities for realistic
and safe practice
• Refreshing skills
• Reinforcing and practicing maintenance
and troubleshooting skills
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Curriculum Map
Motion Control
CompactLogix Starter Workstation
Your CompactLogix Starter Workstation
will include the following:
• Assembled workstation or a “build your
own” workstation that includes a kit
and an instruction guide
• 1 CompactLogix L30ER processor
• 1 CompactLogix AC power supply
• 1 digital combo, 6 digital in/4 digital out
• 4 momentary push buttons
• 2 selector switches
• 1 Compactbus end cap
• AmeriPak shipping case
Note: Software is not included
with the starter workstation.
Savings Program
For a schedule of ControlLogix classes in your area and detailed course
descriptions, go to: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Savings Options
Dimensions
• Width - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Height - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth - 6 in. (15 cm)
• Weight - 15 lb (7 kg)
264
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
4.5 Days
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 3: Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
2 Days
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
2 Days
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 2: ControlLogix
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
4 Days
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Assembled
Build Your Own
CCP299ER
CCP299ERB
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 1:
CompactLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Assembled
Build Your Own
CCP298ER
CCP298ERB
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Assembled
Build Your Own
CCCL21ER
CCCL21ERB
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Assembled
Build Your Own
CCP151ER
CCP151ERB
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Assembled
Build Your Own
CCP153ER
CCP153ERB
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Safety
CCP146ER
CCP146ERB
To enroll in a Rockwell Automation training class: Contact an authorized Allen-Bradley distributor, a Rockwell Automation
local sales/support office or call (440) 646-3434, select option 7. For more information about ControlLogix courses and
other training products and services, visit www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 1: CompactLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Assembled
Build Your Own
Networks
4.5 Days
CompactLogix Starter
Workstation with Ethernet
Visualization
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 1: ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
Motion Control
2 Days
Catalog Number
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
265
Savings Program
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 1: ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
Starter Workstation
Savings Options
ControlLogix Courses
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
Fundamentals Training + One
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Attend a Rockwell Automation Fundamentals class and receive
a discount on your next training class!
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Fundamentals Training + One is a great way to
extend your learning experience beyond just the
basics and save money in the process. Enroll in
any Rockwell Automation Fundamentals class
and receive a discount on your second class.
Safety
After attending a Fundamentals class, you have
thirty days to enroll in a second class to receive
the discount.
Rockwell Automation will automatically reduce
your second class tuition by 20% off the list price.
Networks
Create a Complete Training Plan with Rockwell Automation Curriculum Maps
Visualization
While Fundamentals + One provides a great
foundation to obtain the latest technical knowledge,
you need a comprehensive training plan to achieve true
domain expertise.
Motion Control
Rockwell Automation curriculum maps will help
you determine the best overall training path for a
specific technology or industry. A sample curriculum
map for ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer is
shown below.
To view all curriculum maps online, see the
Rockwell Automation Training Services website:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
How to Enroll
To Enroll in a Rockwell Automation training class,
contact an authorized Allen-Bradley distributor, a
Rockwell Automation local sales/support office, or call
(440) 646-3434, select option 7 and mention Promotion
Code TAS0702.
This offer is not valid with other promotions.
ControlLogix/Studio 5000 Logix Designer Curriculum Map
Savings Program
Savings Options
266
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Take Advantage of Rockwell Automation
Self-Paced Training with these Special Offers
SLC
SLC 500/RSLogix
500/
50
0/RS
0/
RSLLo
RS
Loggiix 500
5
Web-based Training
Safety
Safe
Saf
Sa
fety
fet
ty
With the purchase of Web-based Training ePasses,
your benefits include:
• Significant cost savings when purchasing a 20, 50,
or 100 pack of ePasses
• Easy budgeting and purchasing with package offerings
• Easy redemption because only one ePass is needed to
activate a single course - every course is priced the same
• Unlimited refresher training opportunities for one year
from the time of purchase — you can repeat courses as
many times as needed without using additional ePasses!
Catalog #
Approximate Savings
Web-based Training Single ePass
WBT-1PACK
–
Web-Based Training 5 Pack
WBT-5PACK
–
Web-Based Training 20 Pack
WBT-20PACK
22%
Web-Based Training 50 Pack
WBT-50PACK
34%
Web-Based Training 100 Pack
WBT-100PACK
42%
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
267
Savings Options
Savings Program
Motion Control
Product Description
Visualization
N
Net
Ne
Networks
etw
twor
twor
o ks
ks
Pricing Information
One ePass is needed to activate a single web-based training
course from Rockwell Automation University Online.
ePasses are valid for one year from the date of purchase.
ControlLogix/
RSLogix
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Computer-Based Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Web-only offer
Save 25% on two or more RSTrainer
computer-based training courses. To qualify,
your order must be submitted online.
This offer excludes RSTrainer bundles.
Safety
Computer-based bundles
Save with the purchase of a series of CBT courses:
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Savings Program
Savings Options
268
Computer-based Training
Catalog #
RSTrainer for EtherNet/IP Bundle
(Includes two EtherNet/IP CBTs)
9393-RSTENETAENE
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for EtherNet/IP Bundle
(Includes two EtherNet/IP CBTs)
9393-RSTENETAENF
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Bundle
(Includes three RSLogix 5000 CBTs)
9393-RSTL5KENE
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for RSLogix 5000 Bundle
(Includes three RSLogix 5000 CBTs)
9393-RSTL5KENF
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Fundamentals Bundle
(Includes two SLC 500 CBTs)
9393-RSTSLCALENE
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for SLC 500 Fundamentals Bundle
(Includes two SLC 500 CBTs)
9393-RSTSLCALENF
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software Bundle
(Includes three RSLogix 500 CBTs)
9393-RST500ALENE
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for RSLogix 500 Software Bundle
(Includes three RSLogix 500 CBTs)
9393-RST500ALENF
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Bundle
(Includes three FactoryTalk View ME CBTs)
9393-RSTVMEALL
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for FactoryTalk View Machine
Edition Bundle (Includes three FactoryTalk View ME CBTs)
9393-RSTMEALLENF
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Certificate Programs
Certificate Programs
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Certificate Program
ControlLogix, Drives, and Motion Certificate Programs
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Apply ControlLogix, Drives, and Motion technology
to help improve the quality, efficiency, and
productivity of your plant systems.
Safety
The ControlLogix, Drives, and Motion Certificate
Programs are intended for maintenance and
programming professionals who want to develop
their knowledge and skills using the latest
technology. This program combines a number of
up-to-date training courses.
Networks
You can choose to complete one or both of the
Certificate Programs. As a certificate candidate, you
will follow a series of Rockwell Automation training
courses offering practical, hands-on exercises and
take a final assessment. Participants will be trained
on ControlLogix, Drives, or Motion skills and
competencies. They will understand theoretical
concepts, and learn to maintain and/or program
ControlLogix, Drives, or Motion equipment.
Depending on the combination of training courses
followed, it will lead you to the desired level and
type of certificate.
Visualization
Motion Control
Savings Program
Upon completion of the program requirements,
please contact your local Rockwell Automation
training coordinator to review your training record.
Once approved, you can enroll for the assessment
through your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation training coordinator. You
will be given access to the online, web-based
assessment (fee requirement), the final step
leading to your Certificate of Achievement. A
passing score on the assessment will entitle you to
the rewards and benefits of the Certificate Program
you completed.
Program Rewards
• Recognition Award - Certificate of Achievement
• Custom Rockwell Automation polo shirt with
certificate logo
Program Value-Add
• Job aids
• Continuing education units
• Tools to maintain skills and knowledge:
- CompactLogix starter workstation (available
with specific ControlLogix courses)
- e-Learning discount coupon (available with
ControlLogix certificate program course only)
- ControlLogix, Drives, or Motion training
discount coupon
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
Competency
Recognition
Knowledge assessment
Competitive edge
Education credits
Improved on-the-job skills
Declare yourself a certificate candidate at our Training Services website and receive a schedule of courses
in your area and a Rockwell Automation hat. You will receive a study guide at the time you enroll for the
final assessment.
www.rockwellautomation.com/training
Certificate Program
270
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Certificate Programs
Elective Courses
Core Courses
Core Courses
(Choose 1 Course)
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
Introduction
to the Integrated
Architecture System
Introduction
to the Integrated
Architecture System
CCP146 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CIA101 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CIA101 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
Motion Control
Fundamentals
CCP153 • 4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCP299 • 4.5 Days
3.2 CEUs
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
Kinetix 6000
Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCCL21 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCCL21 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCN200 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Option 2
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Assessment
Assessment
Motion Control
Visualization
CCN130 • 3 Days
1.4 CEUs
GuardLogix
Fundamentals and
Maintenance
Savings Program
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Networks
Safety
Option 1
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
ControlLogix Maintainer Certificate Curriculum
SAF-LOG103 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Core Courses
(Option 1 or 2)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Elective Courses
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
271
Certificate Program
Note: CCP146 or CCP299 may be replaced with CIA101 if you have already completed the Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions are permitted.
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Core Courses
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
ControlLogix Programmer Certificate Curriculum
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
CCP146 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP299 • 4.5 Days
3.2 CEUs
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
CCP151 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP711 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Project Development
Motion Control
Fundamentals
CCP143 • 4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCN130 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Elective Courses
(Choose 1 Course)
Introduction
to the Integrated
Architecture System
CIA101 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Savings Program
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Assessment
GuardLogix
Application
Development
SAF-LOG101 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 4:
Function Block
Programming
CCP152 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS)
Programming
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 4: Structured Text/
Sequential Function
Chart Programming
CCN145 • 4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCP154 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 5:
Advanced Motion
Programming
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500
(CIP) Programming
CCN190-LD • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCN144 • 4 Days
2.8 CEUs
Note: CCP146 or CCP299 may be replaced with CIA101 if you have already completed the Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions are permitted.
Certificate Program
Core Courses
272
Elective Courses
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Motion Control Kinetix 6000/6500
Maintainer Certificate Curriculum
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Core Courses
Safety
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
CCP146 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Kinetix 6500 Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCN201 • 3 Days • 2.1 CEUs
OR
Visualization
Kinetix 6000 Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCN200 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Networks
Motion Control Fundamentals
CCN130 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
CIA101 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Studio 5000
Logix Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
CCP153 • 4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCCL21 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Savings Program
Introduction
to the Integrated
Architecture System
Motion Control
Choose 1
ControlLogix Elective Course
Assessment
Core Courses
(Option 1 or 2)
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Elective Courses
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
273
Certificate Program
Note: CCP146 or CCP299 may be replaced with CIA101 if you have already completed the Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions are permitted.
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Motion Control Kinetix 6000/6500
Programmer Certificate Curriculum
Core Courses
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
CCP146 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Safety
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Programming
CCP151 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Networks
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3:
Project Development
CCP143 • 4 Days • 2.8 CEUs
Visualization
Motion Control Fundamentals
CCN130 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Motion Control
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500 (CIP) Programming
CCN144 • 4 Days • 2.8 CEUs
OR
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS) Programming
CCN145 • 4 Days • 2.8 CEUs
Savings Program
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 5:
Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Assessment
Note: CCP146 or CCP299 may be replaced with CIA101 if you have already completed the Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions are permitted.
Certificate Program
Core Courses
274
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Certificate Programs
DeviceNet
ControlNet
EtherNet
Option
Option
Option
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PowerFlex 700 Drives Certificate Curriculum
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA163 • 1 Day • 0.7 CEUs
OR
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Communications
on ControlNet
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Configuration
and Startup
CCA161 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA164 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCA161 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Communications
on DeviceNet
Choose 2 Drives
Elective Courses
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Communications
over EtherNet/IP
PowerFlex 750-Series
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drive
Configuration and
Startup
CCA183 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CDD161 • 2 Dayss
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 700S Phase ll
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-LD • 3 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
CDD163 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCA171-LD • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex
400/70/700/753 AC Drive
Field Startup for Water/
Wastewater Applications
CCA177 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive
Field Startup for
HVAC Applications
PowerFlex DC Drive
Troubleshooting
On-Site
Only
Course
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx
Configuration and
Troubleshooting
ControlNet and RSNetWorx
Configuration and
Troubleshooting
EtherNet/IP
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer: ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
CCP164 • 3 Days
2.1 CEUs
CCP173 • 3 Days
2.1 CEUs
CCP180 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCP146 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 70
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 750-Series
Configuration
and Startup
CCA159LD • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA182 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 750-Series
Configuration for
an Integrated
Architecture System
CCA184 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Motion Control
CCA165 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Savings Program
CCA162 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Visualization
Networks
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Configuration
and Startup
Safety
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals
CCA101 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
All three options begin by choosing one of the following courses
PowerFlex 700S Phase ll
HiHP Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-HIHP-LD • 3 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
DeviceNet Option
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlNet Option
EtherNet Option
Elective Courses
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
275
Certificate Program
Assessment
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PowerFlex 750 Drives Certificate Curriculum
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals
CCA101 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration and Startup
CCA182 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Safety
PowerFlex 750-Series Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCA183 • 2 Days • 1.4 CEUs
Networks
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration for an
Integrated Architecture System
CCA184 • 1 Day • 0.7 CEUs
Visualization
Choose 2 Drives
Elective Courses
Motion Control
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Level 2: ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
PowerFLex 700 Vector
Control Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP146 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCA163 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Savings Program
PowerFlex 700S Phase II
HiHP Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drive
Configuration and
Startup
PFX700S2-HIHP-LD • 3 Days
CCD161 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 700S Phase II
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-LD • 3 Days
PowerFlex DC Drive
Troubleshooting
EtherNet/IP Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
CDD163 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP180 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive
Field Startup for
HVAC Applications
PowerFlex 70
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Configuration
and Startup
CCA171-LD • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA159LD • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA161 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Communications
over EtherNet/IP
CCA165 • 1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 400/70/700/753
AC Drive Field Startup
for Water/Wastewater
Applications
CCA177 • 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Assessment
Certificate Program
DeviceNet Option
276
Elective Courses
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Certificate Program
Vibration Analysis Certification Options
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Benefits
Safety
• Competency
• Recognition
• Knowledge assessment
• Competitive edge
• Improved on-the-job skills
Visualization
Networks
To obtain certification in Vibration Analysis or Dynamic
Balancing, call your local Allen-Bradley distributor to
enroll in one of the following courses.
Level 2
Level 3
Dynamic
Balancing
Vibration Analysis:
Level I
Vibration Analysis:
Level II
Vibration Analysis:
Level III
Dynamic Balancing
EK-ICM201 • 3.5 Days
EK-ICM261 • 3.5 Days
EK-ICM301 • 3.5 Days
Certification
Assessment
Certification
Assessment
Certification
Assessment
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Savings Program
Level 1
Motion Control
Vibration Analysis Certification Curriculum
EK-ICM121 • 3 Days
Certification
Assessment
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
277
Certificate Program
Vibration analysis courses provide professional
education and certification to help you implement and
operate a successful predictive maintenance program.
Courses are intended for mechanics, technicians,
engineers or analysts involved in the maintenance or
operation of plant machinery. Course completion and
the certification exam procedure allow individuals to
receive certified recognition for the expertise achieved
in either Vibration Analysis Level I, Level II, Level III,
or Dynamic Balancing areas. The certification test is
administered during the last half day of the course (fee
requirement).
Certificate Programs
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
Certificate Programs
TÜV Functional Safety Certification
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Rockwell Automation offers this certification program
in cooperation with TÜV Rheinland.
Functional Safety Engineer Certification
(TÜV Rheinland) Requirements
New standards regarding Functional Safety and relevant
laws and directives demand that people and organizations
perform responsible and accountable tasks during all life
cycle phases of a machine and they have to achieve and
prove required competencies. Within this program,
the defined requirements regarding the design and the
proof of functional safety of machines in respect to the
current standards and guidelines are covered in detail.
To successfully complete the engineer certification
program, the following requirements must be met:
• Minimum 3 to 5 years of professional experience in
the field of Functional Safety
• University engineering degree or equivalent
engineer level responsibilities status certified
by employer
• Completion of Functional Safety Engineer Eligibility
Form and approval from TÜV Rheinland
• Recommended completion of the Functional Safety
for Machinery Introduction course (SAF-TUV1). Refer
to the Safety section of this catalog for course
description information.
• Completion of the Functional Safety for Machinery
Engineer Certification (TÜV Rheinland) course
(SAF-TUV2). Refer to the Safety section of this catalog
for course description information.
• Successful completion of the certification exam
(SAF-TUVT) with a passing score
Functional Safety Technician Certification
(TÜV Rheinland) Requirements
Motion Control
• Minimum of 1 to 2 years of experience working
on industrial machinery
• Experience in machinery maintenance and operation,
verified by employer
• Completion of Functional Safety Technician Eligibility
Form and approval from TÜV Rheinland
• Completion of the Functional Safety for Machinery
Technician Certification (TÜV Rheinland)
course (SAF-TUV3)
• A passing grade on the Functional Safety for Machinery
Technician Certification (TÜV Rheinland) (SAF-TUVT3) exam
Enrollment
Call your local Allen-Bradley distributor to enroll.
The certification exam is administered during the
last day of the course. This training can also be
completed, however, without taking the exam.
Savings Program
TÜV Functional Safety Certification Curriculum
Functional Safety
for Machinery
Introduction
SAF-TUV1 • 3 Days
- Optional -
Certificate Program
278
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Functional
Safety for Machinery
Engineer Certification
(TÜV Rheinland)
Functional
Safety for Machinery
Technician Certification
(TÜV Rheinland)
SAF-TUV2 • 4 Days
SAF-TUV3 • 2.5 Days
Certification
Assessment
Certification
Assessment
SAF-TUVT • 0.5 Day
SAF-TUVT3 • 60 Mins.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
Integrated Performance Assessment
How do you determine workforce
readiness for new technology?
Safety
When you schedule an on-site assessment,
a Rockwell Automation training analyst visits
your facility to evaluate your employees’ skills and
knowledge of automation and control
equipment for specific jobs and tasks
(maintenance, programming, etc.).
Rockwell Automation provides you with
supporting information and recommendations
to improve employee performance while
remaining closely aligned to your company’s
business goals.
Networks
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
What refresher training does your
workforce need?
How can you determine and address
skill gaps?
Visualization
Deliverables
Motion Control
Savings Program
Certificate Program
Rockwell Automation provides a written report that
offers these specific deliverables:
• Detailed job task analysis
• Skill gap identification
• In-depth assessment of employee training needs
• Customized curriculum map and course
descriptions (for your group of employees)
• Training implementation recommendations
• Training prioritization and rankings
• Job performance support tools
• ROI forecasts
To start an Integrated Performance Assessment,
contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor.
280
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Value Where It Counts
Rockwell Automation Integrated Performance
Assessments can help boost plant productivity,
positively impact plant metrics, and reduce total
training time and cost by focusing your workforce
training investment where it counts – on specific
performance improvement and job requirements.
It is the most systematic and comprehensive
consulting service available in the industry.
Our process is comprehensive:
1. Your employees participate in one-on-one
interviews with the training analyst to discuss
training needs.
2. Your employees complete a skills assessment
related to their specific job tasks.
3. The Rockwell Automation training analyst
interviews direct supervisors and managers
to clarify and enhance data collected during
the assessment.
4. Rockwell Automation analyst presents
the results and submits a written report
summarizing the findings and
recommendations for training.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Assessment Services
Training Advisor
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Sa
Savings
ving
vi
ingss Program
Progra
Prog
ram
m
Training Advisor offers you the ability to customize
online assessments in the following areas based on
job tasks that your workforce performs:
• Controllers
• Networks
• Motion Control
• Drives Control
• Safety
• Visualization
• Process Control
• General Industrial
(Electrical and Pneumatic) Control
• Craft Skills
• OEM
• SI
Experience the many benefits of Training Advisor:
• Language switching capabilities (English/Chinese)
• Customize knowledge assessments based on
specific equipment and job tasks
• Capture a snapshot of current knowledge levels
prior to investing in training
• Create individual and group training plans
• Prioritize training based on your installed
equipment, job tasks, and the training needs
identified from knowledge assessments
• Eliminate unnecessary expenses of training
your workforce
• Justify training costs that will help improve
production performance
VVisualization
Vi
su
Training Advisor helps you identify skill and
knowledge gaps hindering production performance
and develop a training strategy that will maximize job
performance and effectiveness.
Benefits
Motion
Moti
Moti
tion
on Control
Con
onttr
troll
Training Advisor helps you determine a custom
training path for your workforce to obtain the
knowledge required to successfully improve
on-the-job performance.
Assessment Services
Unlock improved job performance potential with the
Rockwell Automation online knowledge assessment tool.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Certificate Program
View a demo of Training Advisor by visiting
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training,
or scan this code.
281
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
Pre- and Posttest
Allow us to demonstrate the value of our Training Solutions!
Free Service with On-Site Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Rockwell Automation offers pre- and posttest assessments
with all standard, on-site, training courses. Pre- and posttests
are value-added assessments used to measure students’
knowledge at the beginning and end of training.
Measurable Value
Safety
Our pre- and posttest services provide you
with a measurable return on your training
investment by capturing data that quantifies
students’ knowledge increase as a result of
completing Rockwell Automation training.
Networks
Training Justification
Visualization
If you are not certain your employees need a
particular course, allow Rockwell Automation to administer a
pretest assessment. The results can help you determine whether
your employees will benefit from the training.
Benefits
Motion Control
• Measures students’ knowledge
• Provides quantitative training data
• Offers students constructive feedback on technical skills
and knowledge at the beginning and end of class
• Offers a benchmark against which to measure growth
and training value-add
Savings Program
Certificate Program
282
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Assessment Services
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Assessments are available for courses in
these technologies:
• Programmable controllers
• Drives
• Visualization
• Condition monitoring
• Process
Certificate Program
Savings Program
Motion Control
Visualization
Networks
The Course Selection Tool offers you free short course
assessments used to measure your knowledge of
technical topics covered in Rockwell Automation
training courses. Results from the assessments help
you determine whether you should enroll in a course
or consider enrolling in another course that will better
meet your skill and knowledge needs. All course
assessments are free and results are confidential.
If you are looking for justification or confirmation that
Rockwell Automation training is necessary, then
the Course Selection Tool is an invaluable resource.
Access the Course Selection Tool at:
Safety
The Rockwell Automation Course Selection Tool helps
you answer this question and make confident decisions
about enrolling in Rockwell Automation training courses.
Assessment Services
Not sure if a course is right for you?
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Selection Tool
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
283
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
The Rockwell Automation Difference
Award-Winning, Performance-Based Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Your employees are your greatest asset. To achieve
peak manufacturing performance, you need
technologies and processes driven by highly trained
employees. Ongoing training is an important
component of a strategic approach to maintenance,
and constantly improving human and process
performance consistently translates into increased
job productivity and overall plant profitability.
Skilled operators, maintenance personnel, and
engineers, who maximize machinery and processes,
increase the availability, rate, and quality of your
production environment and boost your Overall
Equipment Effectiveness (OEE).
Networks
Rockwell Automation Offers the Following Instructor-Led Training Options:
Visualization
Standard Open Enrollment Courses
Over 250 are available to help you utilize all
capabilities of Rockwell Automation technologies.
Classes are designed for specific job functions and
focus on the tasks to be performed to do a particular
job. Found on the national schedule, these classes
are conducted at Rockwell Automation and
partner locations.
Motion Control
Savings Program
Tailored Training Courses
Developed in a modular format you can build a
specific course based on job tasks pertinent to your
products and job functions. Select lessons from our
standard courses to create a unique course for your
training needs. Tailored Training creates a course
tailored to your hardware or software requirements.
Whether introductory, prerequisite, refresher or
mastery level courses, you can select from more
than 1,600 job task related lessons.
Certificate Program
Custom Courses
Often, customers have a unique need and require
custom training courses. Rockwell Automation is an
expert in delivering custom training that meets
your specifications and uses your applications
throughout the content. A Rockwell Automation
specialized course can be designed to meet your
employees’ needs and delivered with your
automation equipment, software, and system
configuration incorporated into the course.
This highly effective training solution is often
required for your critical plant areas or applications.
284
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
On-site and Private Training Courses
Any instructor-led course can be conducted on-site,
at your plant or private location, with the convenience
and savings of not having to travel. In addition, our free
pre- and posttest services are only available with
on-site courses. They benchmark an incoming student’s
knowledge and measure the knowledge transfer after
training. The data captured from pre- and posttests
enables you to examine your ROI and justify your
investment.
Embedded Instructors
In large production environments with ongoing
and diverse professional development needs,
special arrangements can be made for an embedded
Rockwell Automation instructor to meet continuous
on-site employee development needs. These
professionals deliver standard and tailored courses,
as well as develop custom materials for courses.
The level of immediacy and responsiveness associated
with your own in-house trainer is unparalleled.
Virtual Classroom
Rockwell Automation now offers interactive Virtual
Classroom training, which are short, one- or two-hour
training sessions conducted by a knowledgeable
instructor via the Internet.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Enrollment
Enrollment
Enrollment
Enrollment
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
286
Enrollment
Training Enrollment Form
Customer Information - Print Clearly!
Date:
Purchase Order | Check
(corresponds to the Payment Option selected)
First Name:
Title/Position:
Company:
Company Address:
City:
Telephone Number:
Last Name:
Middle Initial:
State/Province:
Fax Number:
Zip Code:
E-Mail Address:
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Enrollment
Payment Reference Number:
Safety
Payment Option (Circle One):
Contact Name:
Networks
(Please complete, if other than course attendee)
Course Information
Course Date
Distributor Information
Course Location/City
Visualization
Course Title
For Distributor Use Only
Contact Name:
Distributor Telephone Number:
Distributor Business Partner ID Number:
Distributor Fax Number:
Customer Business Partner ID Number:
Process Control
Drives
Distributor’s Purchase Order Number:
Distributor Name & Address:
Motion Control
Course Code
Condition Monitoring
Terms and Conditions for Rockwell Automation Training Services:
• Payment must be secured by one of the above methods before enrollment can be confirmed.
• If paying by purchase order, credit card, or check, please register through your local Allen-Bradley distributor.
• Registration cancellation less than 14 days prior to the course start date is subject to a fee equal to 50% of the course tuition.
• Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that you only make “refundable” travel & lodging arrangements.
• Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
E-mail or fax this form to your local authorized distributor to register. Call (440) 646-3434 (option 7)
or email [email protected] with questions.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
287
Enrollment
Enrollment
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
288
Index
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000, Continued
CCP146
12
Ladder Logic Basics with CompactLogix
Starter Workstation
VC-LLB
12
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
CCP299
13
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
CompactLogix Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
22
POINT I/O Implementation
Kinetix 6500 Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCN201
23
22
Micro Controllers & Connected Components
Introduction to Automation
CCP800
28
CCP298
13
Introduction to the Integrated
Architecture System
CIA101
28
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2:
ControlLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCP153
14
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Installation and
Data Monitoring
CCPM41
29
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3:
Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
CCCL21
14
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Embedded Web
Server Management
CCPM43
29
Kinetix 6000 Troubleshooting and
Project Interpretation
CCN200
15
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Installation, Data
Monitoring, and Embedded Web Server
Management
30
31
CCP151
15
Micro850 Programming
CCPM44
M850P
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3:
Project Development
CCP143
16
Micro850 Installation, Wiring, and
Troubleshooting with Micro850 Workstation
VC-M850
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Function Block Programming
CCP152
16
PowerFlex 523/525 Drives with PowerFlex 525
Drive Kit: Communications and Programming VC-PF523P
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS) Programming
CCN145
17
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 5:
Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
17
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals
CCP122
36
CCP412
36
CCP409
CCP410
CCP411
CCPS65
37
18
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
18
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
CCP711
PRS012
19
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500 (CIP) Programming
CCN144
19
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration for
an Integrated Architecture System
CCA184
20
Machine-Level Design Optimization:
Drive and Motor Selection
VC-MLDO-01
20
Machine-Level Design Optimization:
Networks, Controller, and I/O Selection
VC-MLDO-02
21
SI: Logix5000 Project Development and Basic
Ladder Logic Programming
SI100
21
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
31
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
CCP154
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Programming
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
37
38
38
Condition Monitoring
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
PhaseManager Project Design
30
Motion Control
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Programming
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Structured Text/ Sequential Function
Chart Programming
Index
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 1:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
OEM100
VC-PIO
Index
11
Networks
CIA101
Visualization
Introduction to the Integrated
Architecture System
OEM: ControlLogix, FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000, and PowerFlex 40
Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
Drives
11
Process Control
CCP800
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
289
Enrollment
Introduction to Automation
Index (cont’d)
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced
Programming
Index
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
OEM: SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
Safety, Continued
CCP122
CCPS43
CCPS45
CCPS41
CCPS42
CCPS65
Functional Safety for Machinery Engineer
Certification (TÜV Rheinland)
SAF-TUV2
Functional Safety for Machinery Technician
Certification (TÜV Rheinland)
SAF-TUV3
SAF-TUVT3 (EXAM)
59
43
NFPA 70E 2015 – Arc Flash Awareness
SAF-SFT10615
59
43
NFPA 70E 2015 – Electrical Safety and
Arc Flash Compliance
SAF-SFT11215
60
42
42
44
44
OEM101
45
58
VC-MFSISO-01 60
VC-SFT10615 61
CA-SAF-SFT100 61
Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Awareness
Networks
Networks
SAF-PLC101
Visualization
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fundamentals
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Enrollment
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
CCP800
66
66
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
CIA101
CCPS65
NetLinx System Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP177
67
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration
and Troubleshooting
CCP164
68
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Configuration
and Troubleshooting
CCP173
68
Data Highway/EtherNet Peer-to-Peer
Communications
CCP310-LD
69
Introduction to Automation
50
SAF-ELE101-LD 50
GuardLogix Fundamentals and Troubleshooting SAF-LOG103
51
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
SAF-PLC102
51
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System
Authorized Maintenance and Troubleshooting SAF-ELE102-LD 52
AADvance Operation, Maintenance, and
PRST9064LD
52
Troubleshooting
Safety Relays and Devices Maintenance
SAF-COM101
53
and Troubleshooting
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 3:
CCP143
53
Project Development
GuardLogix Application Development
SAF-LOG101
54
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
SAF-PLC103
54
Programming
AADvance Comprehensive System Training
PRST9063LD
55
Electrical Safety and Lockout/Tagout
SAF-001
55
Mechanical Safety and Lockout/Tagout
SAF-003
56
Electrical Safety for Non-Electrical Personnel
SAF-004
56
2014 National Electrical Code (NEC):
Update Awareness
SAF-SFT2014A 57
2014 National Electrical Code (NEC):
SAF-SFT2014C 57
Comprehensive Awareness
Functional Safety for Machinery Introduction SAF-TUV1
58
290
Machine Functional Safety and ISO 13849
System Design: Risk Assessment
NFPA 70E 2015 – Arc Flash Awareness
Safety
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller
Systems Fundamentals
SAF-TUVT (EXAM)
Introduction to the Integrated
Architecture System
67
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA162
on DeviceNet
69
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA164
on ControlNet
70
EtherNet/IP Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
CCP180
70
Stratix 5700 Switch Configuration for an
EtherNet/IP Network
CCP179
71
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500 (CIP) Programming
CCN144
71
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA165
over EtherNet/IP
72
CENTERLINE MCC with IntelliCENTER
Software Commissioning on an EtherNet/IP
Network
CCI108
72
Managing Industrial Network with Cisco
Networking Technologies
IMINS
73
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Visualization/HMI
CCP800
78
Introduction to the Integrated
Architecture System
CIA101
78
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCV209
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6500 (CIP) Programming
CCN144
92
79
OEM: ControlLogix, FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000, and PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
OEM100
93
79
94
RSView32 Project Maintenance
CCV206-LD
CCP200
Kinetix 6500 Troubleshooting and Project
Interpretation
OEM: ControlLogix, FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000 and PowerFlex 40
Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
OEM100
80
Microsoft VBA Configuration with FactoryTalk
View SE Applications
RSView32 Project Development
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder32 Application Development
SI: FactoryTalk View SE Configuration
100
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
VBAFTVSE
CCV201
83
CCP196
SI101
84
82
83
84
88
Motion Control Fundamentals
CIA101
CCN130
Kinetix 6000 Troubleshooting and Project
Interpretation
CCN200
89
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Kinetix 6000 (SERCOS) Programming
CCN145
90
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 5:
Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
90
Choosing an EtherNet/IP Network Topology
and Configuring the Network in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer Project
VC-CCN300-01
91
89
Adding Drives and Configuring Axes for Control
over an EtherNet/IP Network in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer Project
VC-CCN300-02
91
Commissioning Axes for Control over an
EtherNet/IP Network Using the Studio 5000
Logix Designer Application
92
VC-CCN300-03
PowerFlex DC Drive Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 750-Series Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCA183
1336 PLUS II Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCA137
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration
CCA161
and Startup
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA164
on ControlNet
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration & Startup CCA182
PowerFlex 750-Series Configuration for
CCA184
an Integrated Architecture System
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA162
on DeviceNet
PowerFlex DC Drive Configuration and Startup CDD161
IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet Configuration
CCI106-LD
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive Field Startup
CCA171-LD
for HVAC Applications
PowerFlex 400/70/700/753 AC Drive Field
CCA177
Startup for Water Wastewater Applications
PowerFlex 700S Phase II HiHP Maintenance
PFX700S2and Troubleshooting
HIHP-LD
PowerFlex 70 Maintenance & Troubleshooting CCA159LD
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
CCA165
over EtherNet/IP
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
98
Networks
81
82
Index
PFX700S2-LD
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals
88
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
81
CCP800
Introduction to the Integrated
Architecture System
99
AutoMax Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA163
CDD163
RE0520
CCV204
VC-FTVIEW-01
CCV207
CCV205-LD
Motion Control
Introduction to Automation
98
99
100
Visualization
FactoryTalk View SE Architecture
CCP800
CCA101
Introduction to Automation
101
101
Motion Control
FactoryTalk View SE Programming
Power Controls (Drives & MCCs)
102
102
103
103
Drives
FactoryTalk ViewPoint Implementation
80
104
104
105
Process Control
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Programming
CCN201
105
106
Condition Monitoring
FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
106
107
107
291
Enrollment
Introduction to Automation
Index
Motion Control, Continued
Index (cont’d)
Condition Monitoring
Power Controls (Drives & MCCs), Continued
PowerFlex 755 Floor Mounted Drives:
Pre-Installation Planning
VC-PF755H-01
Vibration Analysis Fundamentals
108
Index
PowerFlex 523/525 Drives with PowerFlex 525
Drive Kit: Communications and Programming VC-PF523P
108
PowerFlex 7000 Medium Voltage Drive
Operation and Maintenance
CAN7000
109
PowerFlex 7000C Liquid-cooled Medium
Voltage Drive Operation and Maintenance
CAN7000C
109
CENTERLINE MCC with IntelliCENTER Software
Commissioning on an EtherNet/IP Network
CCI108
110
OEM: ControlLogix, FactoryTalk View ME,
Kinetix 6000, and PowerFlex 40 Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
OEM100
Networks
Visualization
PlantPAx Process System Troubleshooting
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
Function Block Programming
Dynamic Balancing
Time Waveform Analysis
XM System Fundamentals
Emonitor Basic
Emonitor Advanced
Enpac Applications
111
Motion Control
128
FTAC
135
RS-MSSQLB
FTM
RS-RSMACC
RS-FTTM
RS-RSTS101-LD
135
128
129
129
130
130
131
131
132
132
Software
PRS010
PRS015
116
116
FactoryTalk AssetCentre System Design
and Implementation
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk
Introduction
117
FactoryTalk Metrics Configuration
117
RSMACC Installation and Configuration
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Basics
CCP152
PRS012
PRS005-LD
118
FactoryTalk Transaction Manager
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Level 4:
PhaseManager Project Design
CCP711
118
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
FactoryTalk Batch Project Design
and Implementation
Drives
PRS101-LD
PlantPAx System Configuration Fundamentals PRS013
Life Sciences Application Suite Configuration
PRS016
Pulp and Paper Application Suite Configuration PRS017
PlantPAx Process System Integration
PRS018
Pavilion8 Basic Model Predictive
PRS801
Control Operations
Pavilion8 Modeling and Analysis
PRS802
Pavilion8 Integration
PRS803
Pavilion8 Control and Visualization
PRS804
AADvance Operation, Maintenance, and
PRST9064LD
Troubleshooting
AADvance Comprehensive System Training
PRST9063LD
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Enrollment
292
Vibration Analysis: Level ll
Vibration Analysis: Level III
Process Control
PID Loop Development and Tuning
Vibration Analysis: Level I
EK-ICM101
EK-ICM201
EK-ICM261
EK-ICM301
EK-ICM121
EK-ICM281
EK-ICM165
EK-ICM141
EK-ICM221
EK-ICM162
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
RSTestStand Enterprise Project Development
119
119
120
120
121
136
136
137
137
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Configuration
RS-FTHSEC
and Data Collection
138
FactoryTalk VantagePoint Configuration
and Reporting
FTVP
138
Microsoft VBA Configuration with FactoryTalk
View SE Applications
VBAFTVSE
139
FactoryTalk EnergyMetrix Software
Configuration in an Energy Monitoring System
FTEM
139
121
122
122
123
123
124
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Virtual Classroom
Adding Drives and Configuring Axes for
Control over an EtherNet/IP Network
in a Studio 5000 Logix Designer Project
Commissioning Axes for Control over an
EtherNet/IP Network Using the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application
146
Valves and Valve Actuators
146
Analytical Measurement
Instrumentation I
Instrumentation II
Process Control Fundamentals
VC-CCN300-01
147
VC-CCN300-02
147
Basic Mathematics
Scaffolding
System Problem Solving and Troubleshooting
Measurement and Tools
Rigging
VC-CCN300-03
148
Introduction to Bearings and Lubrication
Mechanical Print Reading
PowerFlex 523/525 Drives with
PowerFlex 525 Drive Kit:
Communications and Programming
VC-PF523P
148
PowerFlex 755 Floor Mounted Drives:
Pre-Installation Planning
VC-PF755H-01
149
VC-M850
VC-PIO
149
Power Transmission — Gearing
150
Lubrication
Micro850 Installation, Wiring, and
Troubleshooting with Micro850 Workstation
POINT I/O Implementation
Combustion
Power Transmission — Clutches
Power Transmission — Belt Drives
Power Transmission — Chain Drives
Bearings
Mechanical Crane Inspections
Fans, Blowers, and Compressors
Craft Skills & Mechanical Concepts
Industrial Electrical Controls Fundamentals
Basic Electricity — DC
Basic AC/DC Concepts
Basic Electricity — AC
Electrical Print Reading
Test Equipment
Wiring
Batteries
Conduit Bending
Industrial Electronics
Transformers
Motor Theory
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
MFG213
EM-101
EM-101A
EM-102
EM-103
EM-104
EM-105
EM-106
EM-108
EM-200
EM-201
EM-202
Shaft and Coupling Alignment
156
156
157
157
158
Pipefitting
Seals and Packing
Pumps and Pump Repair
Hydraulics and Pneumatics
159
Industrial Electricity and Electronics for
Mechanics
Mechanical Concepts
159
Structural Welding
160
Pipe Welding
160
Fundamentals of Electricity
158
161
MM-403
MM-500
WE-101
WE-103
MFG244
182
Index
VC-MLDO-02
VC-FTVIEW-01
Basic Digital Circuits
163
164
164
165
165
Index
145
Electrical Troubleshooting and Motor Controls
163
166
166
172
172
Networks
Choosing an EtherNet/IP Network
Topology and Configuring the Network
in a Studio 5000 Logix Designer Project
VC-MLDO-01
145
DC Cranes and Controls
162
173
173
174
174
Visualization
FactoryTalk ViewPoint Implementation
144
162
175
175
176
176
Motion Control
Machine-Level Design Optimization:
Networks, Controller, and I/O Selection
VC-MFSISO-01
VC-SFT10615
Motor Control
EM-203
EM-204
EM-205
EM-206
EM-303
EM-400A
EM-400B
EM-401
EM-402
EM-403
GEN-001
GEN-002
GEN-003
MM-101
MM-102
MM-103
MM-105
MM-106
MM-201
MM-202
MM-204
MM-205
MM-206
MM-207
MM-208
MM-209
MM-301
MM-302
MM-303
MM-304
MM-400
177
177
178
178
179
179
Drives
Machine-Level Design Optimization:
Drive and Motor Selection
144
180
180
181
Process Control
NFPA 70E 2015 – Arc Flash Awareness
VC-LLB
181
182
183
Condition Monitoring
Machine Functional Safety and ISO 13849
System Design: Risk Assessment
AC and DC Generator Theory
183
184
184
161
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
293
Enrollment
Ladder Logic Basics with CompactLogix
Starter Workstation
Craft Skills & Mechanical Concepts, Continued
Index (cont’d)
Industrial Leadership Skills
Accountability & Delegation
Communicate with Clarity
Feedback: Giving and Receiving
Coaching for Performance
Problem Solving and Decision Making
Conflict Management
LEADING T.E.A.M.work
Index
Hiring: Right Person Right Job
Mentoring
Project Management
Foundational Leadership Skills
Networks
Enhanced Leadership Skills
ILEAD-001
ILEAD-003
ILEAD-004
ILEAD-005
ILEAD-006
ILEAD-007
ILEAD-008
ILEAD-009
ILEAD-010
ILEAD-011
ILEAD-012
ILEAD-013
Computer-Based Training
187
187
188
188
189
189
190
190
191
191
192
193
RSTrainer for EtherNet/IP –
Hardware and IP Addressing
RSTrainer for EtherNet/IP –
Communications and Diagnostics
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME –
Applications and Displays
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME –
Drawing Objects
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME –
Interactive Objects
RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software – Project Configuration
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software – Offline Programming
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software – Online Monitoring
Silver Courses
Visualization
Silver Courses
196
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software – Motion
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5 Software
Motion Control
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Hardware Fundamentals
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Programming Fundamentals
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Offline Programming
Drives
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Documenting and Searching
Process Control
RSTrainer for Hydraulics
RSTrainer for RSLinx Software
9393-RSTENET1ENE
9393-RSTENET1ENF*
9393-RSTENET2ENE
9393-RSTENET2ENF*
9393-RSTVMEPT1
9393-RSTMEPT1ENF*
9393-RSTVMEPT2
9393-RSTMEPT2ENF*
9393-RSTVMEPT3
9393-RSTMEPT3ENF*
9393-RSTCLX
9393-RSTCLXENF*
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
9393-RSTLKPRJENF*
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
9393-RSTLKOFFENF*
9393-RSTLX5KON
9393-RSTLKONENF*
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
9393-RSTLKMOTENF*
9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTLX5ENF*
9393-RSTSLCHENE
9393-RSTSLCHENF*
9393-RSTSLCPENE
9393-RSTSLCPENF*
9393-RST500OFENE
9393-RST500OFENF*
9393-RST500ONENE
9393-RST500ONENF*
9393-RST500DSENE
9393-RST500DSENF*
9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTHYDENF*
9393-RSTLINX
9393-RSTLINXENF*
200
200
201
201
202
202
203
203
204
204
205
205
206
206
207
207
208
208
Condition Monitoring
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for
Student Manager
9393-RSTSMGRENF*
209
Modular Programming for
Machine Applications
9393-MODPROG
209
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Enrollment
294
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Workstations
ABT-TDFW100
ABT-TDIA-A
ABT-TDIALITE-A
234
235
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
ABT-TDCMPX
ABT-TDCONNCOMP
ABT-TDCLX2-A
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (7-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX2NP
237
ControlLogix Workstation No Motion (10-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3-B
237
CompactLogix Workstation
EtherNet/IP – Communications and Diagnostics
215
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition – Applications and Displays
216
Integrated Architecture Basic
Workstation
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition – Drawing Objects
216
Connected Components Workstation
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition – Interactive Objects
217
SLC 500 – Hardware Fundamentals
217
SLC 500 – Programming Fundamentals
218
RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
218
RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
219
RSLogix 500 Software – Documenting and Searching
219
RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
220
RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
220
RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
221
RSLogix 5000 Software – Motion
221
Electrical Theory
222
Industrial Electrical
222
Industrial Safety
223
Industrial Mechanical
223
Industrial Hydraulics
224
Industrial Pneumatics
224
Mobile Hydraulics
225
Mobile Electrical
225
Mobile
Introduction to Automation iBooks
228
AC/DC Drives iBook
229
ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide Mobile App
230
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (10-slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3NP
AADvance Control Systems Workstation ABT-TDAADV
GuardLogix Controller Workstation
ABT-TDGRDLX1-B
GuardPLC Workstation
ABT-TDGRDPLC1
PowerFlex DC Drive Workstation
ABT-TDPFDC
PowerFlex 700 AC Drive Workstation
ABT-TDPF700
PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive
ABT-TDPF700S
Workstation
PowerFlex 753/755 Combo Workstation ABT-TDPF750COMBO
PowerFlex 753 Workstation
ABT-TDPF753
PowerFlex 755 Workstation
ABT-TDPF755
Fan Demo Unit Workstation
ABT-TDPF700FAN
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation
ABT-TD20941 (120V AC)
ABT-TD20942 (230V AC)
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive with SafeOff
ABT-TD2094SO
Workstation
Kinetix 6500 Workstation
ABT-TDK6500
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller
ABT-TDARMORDMC
Workstation
SLC 500 Workstation - SLC 5/04
ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC)
Processor (10-slot chassis)
ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC)
SLC 500 Workstation - SLC 5/05
Processor (7-slot chassis)
ABT-TDSLCN
SLC 500 Workstation - SLC 5/03
ABT-TDSLCN2
Processor (7-slot chassis)
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation
ABT-TDUIO1 (120V AC)
ABT-TDUIO2 (240V AC)
DeviceNet Workstation
ABT-TDDNET2-A
EtherNet/IP Workstation
ABT-TDENET5700
©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
235
Index
215
236
236
238
238
239
Index
EtherNet/IP – Hardware and IP Addressing
234
Networks
Integrated Architecture Workstation
239
240
240
241
Visualization
214
241
242
242
243
Motion Control
PLC Fundamentals
243
244
Drives
Automation Ferris Wheel Workstation
244
245
245
Process Control
214
246
246
247
247
Condition Monitoring
Fundamentals of AC/DC Motors and Drives
248
295
Enrollment
Web-Based Training (ePass/WBT1PACK)
Products/Services
Workstations, Continued
ABT-TDIMC
ABT-TDINTCENTER
248
Job Aids
249
Savings Options
ABT-TDPROCESS-B
ABT-TDPAX
ABT-TDPV61000
ABT-TDPV6700
ABT-TDMET
ABT-TDMET2
ABT-TDSORTERCLX
ABT-TDSORTERCMPX
ABT-TDSORTER
251
- ControlLogix Maintainer Certificate
271
251
- ControlLogix Programmer Certificate
272
- Motion Control Kinetix 6000/6500 Maintainer Certificate
273
- Motion Control Kinetix 6000/6500 Programmer Certificate
274
- PowerFlex 700 Drives Certificate
275
ABT-TDAST
Positioning Fault Simulator Workstation ABT-TDPOSITION
PanelView Plus 1000 Workstation
ABT-TDPVPLUSTC02
CENTERLINE MCC on EtherNet/IP
ABT-TDMCCENET
Workstation
Safety Components Workstation
ABT-TDSAFCOMP
252
- PowerFlex 750 Drives Certificate
276
Intelligent Motor Control Workstation
IntelliCENTER Workstation
Process Workstation (FOUNDATION
FieldBus and HART Units)
PlantPAx Process System Workstation
PanelView Plus 6 Workstation
Index
Pump and Power Transmission
Workstation
Power Transmission Workstation
Package Sorting Simulator Workstation
Networks
Conveyor Assembly Simulator
Workstation
258
249
• Training + Starter Workstation with
“Build Your Own”Workstation Option
264
250
• Fundamentals Training + One
266
• Self-Paced Training Special Offers
267
250
Certificate Programs
• ControlLogix, Drives, and Motion Certificate Programs
252
270
253
• Vibration Analysis Certification
277
253
• TÜV Functional Safety Certification
278
Visualization
Assessment Services
Motion Control
254
• Integrated Performance Assessment
280
254
• Training Advisor
281
• Pre- and Posttest Assessments
282
• Course Selection Tool
283
Enrollment
287
Trademark List
Drives
1336 FORCE, 1336 IMPACT, 1336 PLUS, AADvance, ArmorBlock, ArmorStart, CompactBlock, CompactLogix, Connected Components Workbench, ControlLogix,
CustomView, Data Highway Plus, Datapac, DH+, DriveExecutive, DriveExplorer, DriveLogix, DriveObserver, DriveTools, E3 Plus, E300, ElectroGuard, Emonitor,
EnergyMetrix, Enpac, FactoryTalk, GML, GuardLogix, GuardPLC, Integrated Architecture, IntelliCENTER, Kinetix, Logix5000, MatGuard, MaXum, Micro850, MicroLogix,
PanelBuilder, PanelView, Pavilion8, PhaseManager, PlantPAx, PLC-5, POINT I/O, PowerFlex, RightSight, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSMACC, RSNetWorx, RSTestStand, RSTrainer,
RSView, SLC, SMC, SoftLogix, Stratix, Stratix 2000, Stratix 5700, Stratix 6000, Stratix 8000, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, Synchlink, Ultra, and XM are trademarks of
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Process Control
iBook, iPad, iPhone, iTunes, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Cisco is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.
Foundation Fieldbus is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
Condition Monitoring
Pentium is a trademark of Intel.
Access, Excel, Microsoft, PowerPoint, Word, and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
National Electrical Code, NEC, and NFPA 70E are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, and ControlNet are trademarks of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Enrollment
296
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P
Rockwell Automation, Inc. (NYSE:ROK), the world’s largest company dedicated to industrial automation, makes its customers more
productive and the world more sustainable. Throughout the world, our flagship Allen-Bradley® and Rockwell Software® product
brands are recognized for innovation and excellence.
Follow ROKAutomation on Facebook & Twitter.
Publication GMST10-CA001K-EN-P – February 2015
Supersedes Publication GMST10-CA001J-EN-P – December 2013
Connect with us on LinkedIn.
Copyright ©2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement